A System of Greek Prosody and Metre

8/13/2019 A System of Greek Prosody and Metre

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/a-system-of-greek-prosody-and-metre 1/296



^̂ ^ "^

g

i.# %13DNV'S0V^ %a3AiNamv*

r?

-:3

5 i^

%a3AiNn-3WV^

^tUBRARYQ/r^,

33

ÔJIIVJJO-^

i?^llIBRARYQr

1<*^

(

^

<m50

^« /OillVJJO^t

o

S

;nc uirc

'%r,* r^-

CO'

-3.

%a3AINf)-3\\v

.U-J

>

ÔFCAIIFO/?/ ^

^,

C3

^

^£?"

^ÂdVMll'l^

C3

^\U•UNIVERV^

cxz.

<

.^

^\-lOSANCElfj>

o"

n

s. *^-

%a3AiNa-3WV^

CO

>•

-<

<,

(_:.

uj

,~ÔF-CAIIFO%, ÛEUNIVERS/A

^CAaVMIl-# ^TiiJONVSOl^"^ %^3AINn3\\V

s^f

vr.

^VÔSANCElfx^

CO

>3:

)

^^^t•L BRARY^^

tr 5

%a3AINfl-3^V^ ^.ÔJIIVO JO"^

^vMUBRARY^r>-

<

.VtOSANr,El£r^ 0.OFCALIFOP4AOrO ..%

f\ /O. s.A;OFCA[IF0%

>o >-

<



^

3» ;53

-<u-

55to

.^X\l-1?BRA?>Y6?>̂*

;=3

:^l-UBRARYQc.

304r)

%0J11V3-J0^ %0:inV3-JO-^

^ SV

''^1%>T1

CSC

.^;OF-CAIIFO%

(^

^4

^

' ^?7

•i^<?Aava8ii-#

^.QF-CAliFOfi'^

o=

^lOS-ANCFlfj^

o 1—~« .

'Âa3AINa-3WV

^ ^.0FCAIIF0%

§I

i

C-5 — C~>

^ ^yommn-i'^

. ,

'' '

O

CD

%a3AINn-3V\V

:^ ^VlOSANCElfj^C

-n ,<—I

O d-

DO

>

Â"^mum-i^^

3*jA^^lLIBRARYOc^

33Sri

5^ ^lOSANCElfj-^-r, O A ,-.•" r^

CO

1>-

.ÔFCAIIFO/?^;. ÔfCAllFOto

ii CD



ANTHON'S SERIESOF

CLASSICAL WORKSFOR SCHOOLS AND COLLEGES.

From H. Humphrey, D.D., Presi-

dent of Amherst College, at Am-

herst, Mass.

1 amvery happy

to see that

youhave

undertaken to furnish uniform editions

of the Latin classics for the use of our

grammar schools and higher seminaries

of learning. Professor Anthon deserves

and will receive the thatiks of the public

for the labour which he has so judicious-

ly and successfully bestowed upon Sal-

lust, Cassar, and Cicero. The explan-

atory notes or commentaries are more co-

pious and comprehensive than those ofany other edition I have seen, ayid much

'tetter adapted to the wants of yoang stu-

dents. Among the most valuable oj

these notes are those which divert atten-

tion to the beautiful uses of the moods

and tenses, and explain the delicate

shades of meaning and peculiar beauties

that depend upon them, which our lan-

guage often expresses imperfectly and

with difficulty, and which young learn-

ers rarely regard. The explanations ofthe force and meaning of the particlesare also very useful.

The historical, geographical, and oth-

er hidexes are alsoki'j:hly valuable, fur-

nishing the student, as they do, withfe-licitous illustrations ofthe text, andmuch

general information.

The text seems to be settled loith much

care and ability. The editions adoptedas the basis or referred to as authorityare those in the highest repute amongscholars. The

typographical execution

is very fine, and this is a high merit.

The wretched reprints offoreign editions

of the classics, got up in cheap offices,

on wretched paper, with incompetent

proofreaders and no editors, to which,until within a very few years, our stu-

dents have beenuniversally condernned,

have, by taking them young, been as

successful innuiking them uncertain andinaccurate scholars as if that had been

one of the main objects of the publishers.School books of all kinds, instead of be-

ing the worst (as they often are), should

be the 7nostcarefully printed books we

have.

H.Humphrey.

From the Rt. Rev. Bishop M'Il-

VAiNE, President of Kenyon Col-

lege, at Gambler, Ohio.

I anticipate the greatest benefits to ourschools and colleges from the admirable

edition of the classics ivhich you are now

publishing, under the superintendence

and illustrated by the copious and learn-

ed notes of Professor Anthon. What

your accomjtlishcd editor has aimed at

in his Horace, Ccesar, and other volumes

of the series, few can have been much

connected with classical institutions in

this country xcilhout lear7dng to be pre-

cisely the one needful thing to their stu-

dents. The object is most satisfactorily

attained. The needed books wc have,

so far as your series has yet been pub-lished ; and as to what are yet to come,

ive have learnedfrom what we have, if I

may use the words of one ofyour authors,

qua3-a summa virtute sumnKjque in-

genio expectanda sunt, expectare.

Wishing you the most abundant encour-

agement in your important enterprise, Iremain your obedient servant,

Ch.\s. p. M'Ilv.\ine.

From William A. Duer, LL.D.,President of Columbia College, in

the City of New-York.

From the manner in which this under-

taking has been so fur executed, as well

as from the established character and

reputation of Professor Anthon as a

scholar, his experience as an instructer,

and the accuracy andjudgment previous-

ly evinced by him as an editor and com-

mentator, I can entertain no doubt of the

success of theenterprise, so far as his

editorial labours andyour

own skill and

experience as publishers ari concerned ;

and I trust that, from the iiicreasing

value of classical studies in the estima-

tion of the public, this judicious and spir-

ited effortto facilitate and promote so im-

portant a branch of education will be

duly appreciated andliberally

rewarded.

I remain, gentlemen.

Your obedient servant,

W. A. Duer.



anthon's series op classical works.

Letters of Recommendation—continued.

From the Rev. B. P. Aydelott,

President of the Woodward Col-

lege, at Cincinnati, Ohio.

From some personal acquaintance,but

much more from general reputation,I

formed a very high opinion of Professor

Anthons abilities to prepare a fall series

of Latin and Greek Classics for the

use of schools, colleges, <^-c.Accord-

ingly, as soon as I could obtain the va-

rious authors edited by him, I procured

them, and,upon

a careful examination,

was so impressed with their supjerior

character, as to introduce tliem as fast

as possible into the different departments

of the institution under my charge.

The various Delphiiieditions are very

good,sofar as ancientgeography, mythol-

ogy, usages, 4'C-, are concerned ;but in

respectto critical remarks and grammat-

ical illustrations they are of little worth ;

they were, in gewral, however,the best

we had.

BvX besides being abundantly full and

clear in everything archaeological, Pro-

fessor Anthon has done more, in the

editions of the classical authors prepared

by him, to unfold the grammatical struc-

ture, and thus throw light upon the mean-

ing and spirit of the original, than any

other commeutatur whom I have consult-

ed. It is a striking, and, I think, de-

cisive, proof of their superiority, that the

students show in their recitations that

they have read his notes and profit-

ed by them, which they never seemed to

me to have done when using other edi-

tions.

Some time ago I commenced a careful

collation of the Greek Grnmniar of the

same author with those of Butmann, Val-

py, kSj-c, making full notes as I went

along, with the design ofpreparing a re-

view of it at therequest of the editor of

an extensively circulated periodical, and

such xvas my conviction of its peculiar

fitness furthe use of schools, that I have

since recommended no other to our pu-

pils.

J would add that the neatness and

taste with which Professor Anthon's

classics are got up {though they arefar

cheaper than the Delphin editions) ought

to form no small recomme7idation ofthem. Our students purchase, study,

and preserve them with manifest pleas-

ure ;and whatever has these

effects uponthe pupil,

will certainly do much to pro-

mote the cause of sound and thorough

classical learning,

B. P. AVDELOTT.

From the Rev. J. S. Tomlinson,'

D.D., President of Augusta Col-

lege, Kentucky.

/ take this opportunity to acknowledge

the receipt {some time since) offour vol-

umes of the Classical Series of Profes-

sor Anthon of New- York ; and, after

a careful examination of them, I can

truly say that I am more than pleased ;

I am delighted with them. The avowed

object of the publication,that offurnish-

ingaccurate and

uniform

editions of all

the classical authors used in colleges and

schools, is one that, in myjudgmeyit, has

long been a desideratum in literature,

and I am gratifiedto -find is about to be

accomplished, especially by one so entire-

ly equal to the task as Professor An-

thon has shown himself to be.

The biographical sketches, commen-

taries, and annotations with which the

volumes are accompanied, while theyre-

flect great credit upon the erudition and

research of the author, cannot fail to en-

hance to the student, in a high degree,

the attractions and value of classical

reading. As an evidence of the estim ate

we place upon the series, we have hither-

to used it as far as it was attainable, and

shall, with greatpleasure, avail ourselves

of the opportunitynow afforded to adopt

the whole of it. Allow vie to add. that

the neat, tasteful, and, at the same time,

substantial style of the niechanical exe-

cution of the work, fully sustains the

well-earned reputation,in that respect, of

the enterprisingestablishment wlience it

emanates. Respectfully,

Your obedient servant, ,

J. S. TOMLINSOiY.

From Alonzo Church, P.D., Pres-

ident of the University of Georgia.

As far as time and a press of busi-

ness would permit, I have examined

these volumes, and am much pleased

with them. They are, I think, well

adapted to the wants of, particularly,

young students, and mil, I doubt not,

furnish what has long been a desidera-

tum in our preparatory schools, viz.,

cheap, yet correct editions of the common

classics, accompanied with judicious

English notes. I do not hesitate to

say that, U'ere I engaged in giving in-

struction to youth from these authors, I

should preferthe editions of Professor

Anthon to any xvhich 1 have seen.

A. Church.



anthon's series op classical works.

Letters of Recommendation—continued.

From Ihe Rev. M. Hopkins, D.D.,President of Williams' College, at

Williamstown, Mass.

Professor Anthon hasunquestionably

done much service to the cause of clas-

sical learning in thiscountry by his edi-

tions of the Latin classics, given to the

public with unusual accuracy and ele-

gance from your press. His Satlust.

CcBsar, and Cicero cannot fail to findtheir way iyito very extensive use, and to

render the entrance

uponclassical studies

much moreinvitirig and profitable.

M. Hopkins.

From Wilbur Fisk, D.D., Presi-

dent of the Wesleyan Umversity,at Middletown, Conn.

/ ain highly gratified to notice that

you have commenced a series of the clas-

sics under the editorialsupervision

ofthat accomplished scholar, ProfessorAnthon of Columbia College. No manin our

country is betterqualified for this

office than Professor Anthon. To showm what estimation he is held in. Englandas a classical scholar, it jieed only be

known that an edition of his"Horace'"

has been published in London, a?id the

publishers informed me that the entire edi-

tion had met with a

readysale

; showingthat, notwithstanding the numerous edi-

tions of this standard work by thefirst

scholars in England, the credit of the

work by our Ainerican scholar had car-

ledr itsuccessfully through the English

market, and that, too, by virtueof its in-

trinsic merit. Your cditio7is of his Cae-

sar, Cicero, and Sallust are now beforeme, and show that there is no falVmg off

fromthe

reputation of the edition of Hor-ace. Thecopious

notes and commenta-ries cannot fail to shed a flood of light

uponthemiiidofthe young student, andwill co>itnbute much, I trust, to foster in

the rising generation of scholars a taste

for the ancient classics.

Wilbur Fisk.

From Silas Totten, D.D., Presi-

dent of Washington College.

The volumes which I have examined Ientirely approve, and think them better

adapted to the purposes of classical in-

struction than anij edition of the sameauthors yet published in this

country.The well-known

ability of the learnededitor admits no doubt of the excellence

of the volumes yet to bepuhli.shed.

S. ToTTEN.

From the President and Faculty ofMiami

University, at Oxford, Ohio.

These three volumes, enriched by a

copious and valuable apparatus of crit-

ical notes, and judiciously arranged his-

torical, geographical, archceological, and

legal matters, furnished by soripe a

scholar as Dr. Anthon, are specimenswell calculated to recommend ihe series

of which they are the commencement.

They are well adapted to promote thor-

ough classical learning, and are entitled

to a high grade ofpopularfavour. Byorder of the

Faculty,R. H. Bishop, President.

From RuFus Babcock, Jr., D.D.,late President of WaterviUe Col-

lege, in Maine.

/ have examined luith considerable

care, and with high and unmingled sat-

isfaction, your recent edition of Profes-sor Anthon's Latin Classics. The dis-

tinguished editor of Horace has rightly

judged, that in order to elevate the rangeand standard ofscholarship in this coun-

try, it isrequisite to facilitate the thor-

ough acquisition of thoseelementary

tert-books which are

usually first putinto the hands of pupils. By the beau-

tiful volumes which you have now givento the publicfrom his pen, more has bee-n

done to inake the student thoroughly ac-

quainted with those three prime authors,

Ca:sar, Salkist, and Cicero, than byany other helps within my knowledge.I need not

minutely specify the various

points of excellence by which these books

are

distinguished,their

practical valuewillimmediately be appreciated by teach-

ers and learners.

Alloiu me, gentlemen, to tender,

through you, my hearty tJianks to Pro-

fessor Anthonfor

the very valuable ser-

vice he has performed in aid of the greatcause of classical

learning. May he

continue his laboursfor the public good.RuFus Babcock, .Ik.

UZP Highly complimentary letters

have also been received Iroiu Jere-miah Day, I) D., President of Yale

College ; from Josiah Quincv,LL.D., President of Cambridge Col-

lege ; and from several other distin-

guisiied scholars, some of which will

be published hereafter.



anthon's series of classical works.

Commendatory Notices—continued.

" The great problem in the art of

teaching is, that the teaclier should

forget that he knows himselfwhat he

is teaching toothers;should remem-

ber that what is clear as day to him

is all Cimmerian darkness to his pu-

pil. This problem, long since proved,

Professor Anthon has, in our opinion,

been the first to put in practice ; and,

in consequence, his are, we may well

believe, the best classbooks ex-

tant."—Knickerbocker Magazine.

"To relieve the youthful

mind from this bootless burden we

count no small praise. We hold it,

indeed, to be among the noblest ends

to which true learning can ever de-

vote itself. We are sure it never ap-

pears more pleasing than in such con-

descension , and, what is still better,

we know no labour more useful to

the community. This meed of praise,whatever il be, belongs unquestiona-

bly to no scholar on this side of the

Atlantic, and to few on the other,

more truly than to Professor An-

thon."— Church Quarterly Review.

"In all these points Profes-

sor Anthon's schoolbooks— if it be

not a sin to caH those schoolbooks

which clever men might studyto

advantage— are surpassmgly excel-

lent and able;while exercising the

most painfully critical research, he

has not disdained the lucidus ordo ;

he has remembered that he was wri-

ting for the education of the young

unpractised mind, not for the culti-

vation ofthe ripe and ornate intellect;

and hence, while his English notes,

whether critical or explanatory, areas copious and comprehensive as the

most abstruse commentary, they are,

at the same time, so simple and so

luminous as to be within the scope

of the earliest and feeblest reason.

.... We have only to say in conclu-

sion, that every school ought at once

to adopt this series of works, which

may, *n truth, be looked upon as in-

troducing a new era into the educa-

tion of our country, and as reflecting

much honour on the talent of the

learned professor by whom they were

prepared."—ilmeriC(i?i Monthly Mag-azine.

"They go beyond any of the ele-

mentary works printed here, which

is saying a great deal."'—Boston Ad-

vocate.

" Mr. Anthon is essentially aid-

ing the acquisition of the ancient

tongues;and we trust that he will

enjoy all the success which his val-

uable labours so justly merit."—Christian Intelligencer.

. ..." So correct in text, so elab-

orate in commentaries, so vastly su-

perior, in clearness, depth, and vari-

ety of information, to any which have

gone before, that no man, however

thoroughly imbued with-classic lore,

has any right to consider these admi-rable works beneath his notice, or

suited only to the half-formed intel-

lect of young beginners."— Christian

Advocate and Journal.

" Teachers owe an incalculable

debt of gratitude to this accomplish-

ed and patriotic scholar, for the mas-

terly and successful effort that he

has madeto

putthem in

possessionof the means of raising themselves

and pupilsto a high standardofschol-

arship. He has laid a sure Ibunda-

tion, on which, with ordinary labour,

they may rear a superstructure that

will throw its shadow across the At-

lantic waves, and win for America the

veneration of those who have hith-

erto looked to us as moving sluggish-

ly on in the paths of Grecian and Ro-man literature."—Family Magazine.

" Professor Anthon deserves the

thanks of the country for the zeal with

which he has undertaken, and the

ability with which he has thus far ex-

ecuted, his task."—Rochester Repub-

lican.

" This is a beautiful edition, with

veryvaluable

notes, bya hand

everyway competent. It forms a most

valuable addition to the stock of

useful classics published by the Har-

pers."—N. Y. Ajnerican.

" As a philologist and a classical

scholar, Professor Anthon has no su-

perior in the United States : and his

schoolbooks are deservedly popular,

both in England and in this country."

—iV. i''. Times." On this side of the Atlantic at

least, and to some extent beyond it,

Professor Anthon is equally known

as admirably qualifiedto edit and en-

rich a version of the classics for our

own times and the higher seminaries

of learning now so thickly scattered

through our country."— The New-

Yorker.



anthon's series of classical works.

Commendatory Notices—continued.

" To all classes—the matures

scholar and the merest tyro, the man

of elegant and easy learningand the

laborious student—these admirable

works will prove a most invaluable

acquisition."— Commercial Advertiser.

" The profound scholar under

whose supervision these excellent

works are put forth to the world is

as well known on the Continent of

Europe as he is on our own shores;

and is, perhaps, theonly son of Amer-

ica who has ever attained that de-

gree of fame for classical attainments

which should constitute him an au-

thority second, if second, only to the

great names of Knglisli or of German

criticism—the Heynes and Bruncks,

the Elmsleys and the Porsons, and

the Bentleys, who have devoted so

much time and labour to minute in-

vestigation and clear exposition of

the great works of old."—N. Y.

Courier and Enquirer.

. . . .

" The notes are all that notes

can be; copious but not diffuse,

learned but not pedantic, luminous,

and replete with varied and most en-

tertaining knowledge."—N. Y. Even-

ing Star.

. . . .

" The production of a learn-

ed philologist, and one of the sound-

est classical scholars of the age, and

one who, to his learned researches,

adds the qualification of a most suc-

cessful practical teacher. No stu-

dent can listen to him without admi-

ration and advantage To this

high praise his editions of the clas-

sics bear ample testimony ; and, judg-

ing

from the

experienceand

opinionsof educated men in our country, and

particularly in Europe, we have no

fear that their claims will not be ad-

mitted and awarded to him whenonce clearly and thoroughly under-

stood."— 0/ieida Whig." The series of classical school-

books published under the superin-

tendence of Professor Anthon has al-

ready obtained a celebrity to whichour own commendation would add

little extension. These works all

appear to be collated and edited with

unusual care, and they are publishedin a style of elegance too rarely char-

acterizing our schoolbooks, in which

it is important that the eye and the

taste, as well as the understanding,

should be allured."—N. Y. Mirror.

" There are few scholars in the

civilized world, comparatively speak-

ing, possessedof the critical acumen

and deep insight into the minutiaj of

the Greek language, which alone

could enable them to produce the

matter with which the pages of these

admirable works are stored : there

are still fewer who, possessing the

requisite degree of knowledge, are at

the same time gifted with the tact

and skill in the science of education

which are so eminently visible intheir manner."—N. Y. Express.

" The high character of Professor

Anthon's scholarship, and the uni-

versal favour with which his books

of elementary classics have been re-

ceived, render any other notice than

an announcement of their publica-

tion unnecessary. The present vol-

umeexhibits the same

untiringre-

search, and the same accurate learn-

ing which have characterized all his

labours."-iV. Y. Gazette.

" There is a very prevalent and

very mistaken idea current, that

schoolbooks are, for the most part,

mere compilations. Truly goodschoolbooks are the most difficult

things in the universe to produce,

and these are such par excellence."—The Sun.

"Professor Anthon is acknowl-

edged by the best judges, not only in

this country, but m Germany and

England, to be one of the ripest clas-

sical scholars of the age. And this

series of books will be used in all our

academies and colleges. The editor

and the publishers will bythis effort

do a good service to American as

well as ancient literature."—CommonSchool Assistant.

"Professor Anthon's classics are

too well known to require any com-

mendation. His editions of Sallust,

Caesar, Cicero, Horace, Otc, have

gained him a reputation for deep eru-

dition and correct criticism which

has been by no means confined to

this country."—Providence (R. I.)

Journal.

lO" In addition to the above, numer-

ousfax^ourahle notices of Anthon'' s series

htivc been received from the 7nostrespect-

able sources,from soine ofwhich the pub-lishers may hereafter present brief ex-

tracts.



A SYSTEM

OF

GREEK PROSODY AND METRE,

FOR THE USE OF SCHOOLS AND COLLEGES;

TOGETHER WITH

THE CHORAL SCANNING

OF THE PROMETHEUS VINCTUS OF ^SCHYLUS, AND THE

AJAX AND (EDIPUS TYRANNUS OF SOPHOCLES.

TO WHICH ARE APPENDED

REMARKS ON INDO - GERMANIC ANALOGIES.

BY

CHARLES ANT HON, LL.D.,

JAY PROFESSOR OP THE GREEK AND LATIN LANGUAGES IN COLOMBIA COLLEOK,

NEW-YORK, AND RECTOR OF THE GRAMMAR-SCHOOL.

N E W-Y O R K :

HARPER &. BROTHERS, 62 CLIFF-STREET.

18 39.



Entered, according to Act of Congress, in the year 1838, by

Charles Anthon,

in the Clerk's Office of the Southern District of New-York.



CO

o9

on

<c

"FA

TO

THE REV. JOSIAH W. GIBBS,

PROFESSOR OF ORIENTAL LANGUAGES IN YALE COLLEGE,

THIS WORK

n f» JJnscribcU

AS A MEMORIAL OF FRIENDSHIP,

AND A TOKEN OF HIGH RESPECT FOR ONE WHO IS EQUALLY CON-

j3 iSPICUOUS FOR HIS ATTAINMENTS IN ORIENTAL LITER-

r>ATURE AND COMPARATIVE PHILOLOGY.



PREFACE.

An accurate acquaintance with the Prosody and Me-

tres of the Greek Language is so necessary an accom-

paniment of true scholarship, that any attempt to advo-

cate its claims to the notice of the student would be en-

tirely superfluous.It must be admitted, however, that,

while all among us are very ready to acknowledge the

importance of this branch of learning, only a small

number, comparatively, have been induced to make it a

subject of careful study ;and the result is, that, in mat-

ters appertaining to Greek Prosody and Metre, many

of those who ought to be better acquainted with these

topics display oftentimes a very lamentable want of ac-

curacy. What renders this the more provoking is, that

they who come among us from transatlantic seminaries

of learning, where metrical studies are much more care-

fully pursued, frequently undertake to sit in judgment

upon our violations of the laws of prosody and metre,

when theythemselves are at best but

very poor repre-

sentatives of the metrical knowledge which exists in

their own countries.

One great obstacle to the successful cultivation of



VI PREFACE.

prosodiacal studies among us has undoubtedly been the

want of aproper

treatise on thesubject, which,

without

encumbering the student, in the commencement of his

career, with any unusual burden, might, nevertheless, lay

before him such a view of matters connected with the

prosody and metres of the Greek tongue as would en-

able him to pursue his investigations in this department

with satisfaction and advantage. The present treatise

has been prepared with this view. Its object is to give

all the necessary information appertaining to Greek

prosody in a simple garb, and one which may invite

rather thanrepel. The more intricate questions con-

nected with thesubject, and on which the

ingenuity of

European scholars loves to exercise itself, are here pur-

posely omitted, and nothing is offered but what may

prove immediately

and

permanentlyuseful.

The Choral Scanning is intended to initiate the young

scholar into a department of metrical study, which, to

the inexperienced, bears a very formidable name;but is

in reality,with the exception of a few knotty points that

occasionally present themselves, a very pleasing branch

of investigation, and a very inviting field for the inge-

nuity of the student. Choral Scanning has hitherto

been regarded by many among us as a mere piece of

chance-work, with no certain rules to guide or inform

us when we are correct. It is hoped that the aids af-

forded in the present treatise on this part of the subject

will tend to show that there is even here much of cer-

tainty, and much that may lead to satisfactoryresults.



PREFACE. Vll

The introduction of remarks on Indo-Germanic Anal-

ogies into a work on Greek Prosody may require some

explanation.The observations in question were intend-

ed to accompany a Greek Grammar recently published,

but were withheld from the fear of making that work too

voluminous and expensive. They are given here, at

the end of the Prosody, partly because no other avenue

may presentitself for years by which they can be

brought forward, and partlyout of compliment to the

4

distinguished philologistwhose name graces the dedi-

cation of this volume, and who has done more for com-

parative philology than any American scholar. Had

he undertaken to write on this subject, the remarks ap-

pended to the present work would never have appeared.

The Sanscrit Question, as it has been termed, has

never obtained a fair

hearing amongus. On the

partof its opponents all is mere idle assertion, and the spe-

cious, but most erroneous and unscholarlike, theory of

Dugald Stewart appears to them to have laid the con-

troversy completely at rest. Many of our half-learned

youth, too, have caught the infection ; and believing, of

course, that what is delivered on this subject with orac-

ular gravity, sometimes even from a professor's chair,

must be the result of careful investigation, and in every

pointof view deserving of being followed, almost regard

the term Sanscrit as a species of by-word and mockery.

It is hoped that the observations appended to the pres-

ent volume will make the matter in controversy more

clearly understood, until some abler pen shall present



Viii PREFACE.

lis with a complete and overpowering view of Tndo-

GermanicAnalogies.

It is

mortifying,indeed, to think

that any remarks at all should be now needed to prove

that the Sanscrit is not a mere piece of patchwork from

the Greek. Yet so it is. What in our own country

is still regarded as a most ingenious and conclusive

theory, would, on the continent of Europe, subject the

individual, who might be bold enough to advocate it,to

a direct imputationof lunacy.

Columbia College, Aug. 20, 1838.



iWV\'WV\^'Wi\^'\i^%«'%^^^'V%'WV\ W%/\'WWV«^VA'W«/\X^W^^/V\/V'WWX^^/VXWVXS/Vl^

PART I.

PROSODY

<WV*WV*VW%XiW^ »



GREEK PROSODY.

I.

I. Prosody (TrpoGcpSia),in its common acceptation at the

present day, treats of the quantity of syllables,or the time

occupied in pronouncing them.

II. The ancient Greek grammarians, however, connected

with the term a much more comprehensive meaning, and

made it refer to everything by which the sound of a syllable

was affected. Hence prosody, with them, included also the

accents and breathings.'

III. Hence it is clear how the ancients came to speak

of seve7i proper prosodies, for they included the threefold

accent,the twofold

breathing,and the twofold

quantity.ÎV. To these seven proper prosodies the ancients added

what are called theaffections

of a word, or the influences

upon it [ndO/j), and denominated these improper prosodies?

V. The three improper prosodies were the apostrophe,

hyphen, and hypodiastole.*

VI. Hence prosody, in its strict acceptation, is tenfold^

consisting of the seven proper and the three improper kinds.

In the present treatise, however, we will confine ourselves

merely to the consideration of Quantity and Metre.

1. Bekkcr, Anecdot. Grac. 676, 16. 'OpHôvrat ovv ttjv irpoaudlap

ovTug, K. T. A. Compare Spitzner, Pros. Gr.<J

1.

2. Chcerobosciis, ap. Bekkcr, A. G. 703, 24. 'lareov on rpix^S ^^J-

erairj npoaudia, k. t. /I.

3. Bekker, 683, 22. Xpr; 6e yLvuaKEiv Ijtl to. nddij ovk elal KVplu^

"irpoaotSiai, oAAa Karaxpri'^TiKu^, k. t. /I.

4. Bekker, I. c.

5. Bekker, 674, 1. Tlpom^cUac elal dsKa, oêla, (iapcia, KEpiaizid-

liivT}, naKpd, ftpaxeia, daaela, ipiXrj, dn6aTpo<j)OC, v(plv,koL virodiaaTok'^.

A



2 GENERAL RULE.

II.

I.

Every syllableis either

longor short

;

or,in other

words, requires a longer or shorter time for its pronuncia-

tion.

II. To these two kinds of syllables a third is to be added,

which is called the common or arbitrary. By this is meant

a syllable which may be used as long or short; as, for ex-

ample, a short vowel which may be short or long before a

mute with a liquid, or a short final syllable which may be

lengthened by crasis or otherwise.'

III.

GENERAL RULE.

In Greek, the vowels e and o are short by nature, ij and

0) are long by nature, and a, i, v, aredoubtful.

1. When a vowel is said to be short by nature, the mean-

ing is, that it is short by its natural pronunciation, being

equivalent merely to one short time. On the other hand,

a vowellong by

nature is

long byits natural

pronunciation,

being equal to two short times. Thus7]

is equivalent to ee,

and 0) to oo.

2. Hence it follows, that the short vowel £ hastj

for its

corresponding long one;

and the short vowel o, in like

manner, has w for its long. But in the case of a, i, v, there

is no distinct mark or letter by which the eye can tell at

the instant whether these vowels are long or short, and

hence they are called doubtful.^

1. It is evident, that, in proper metres, the syllable, in itself arbitrary,

has always the definite quantity of a long or short. Compare the lan-

guage of Hermann, Elem. Doctr. Metr. c. 9, ()1.

"Qxtum in numeris

tempora omnia ceria ac dcfi.nita esse dcbcant, facile intclligitur, in nu-

meris ipsis nihil usqiiam posse anceps esse ; itaque, si quce inveniuntur

ancipites syllahce,i. e., guce breves sint, quum longeB esse debeant, vel

longcE, quum deheant breves esse, eas, quod ad numcrum altinel, pro tal-

ibus numerari, quales debeant esse, etsi non siid tales."

2. The doubtful vowels were called by some of the ancient gramma-rians 6 xpova, i. e., double-timed

; by othersa[i<^L^o%a,

i. e., indefinite.

Comparo Bekker, An. Gr. 800, 27.



RULES FOR LOlSfG VOWELS, 3

3. It must be carefully borne in mind, however, that, by

actual usage, every syllable in any particularcase

alwayshas a definite quantity, either long or short

;and that, when

we speak of doubtful syllables,we do not mean that they

have anything doubtful in their nature, or wavering between

long and short as regards the same word;but only that they

have no corresponding long or short marks by which the

eye can detect their quantity at a glance.

IV.

RULES FOR LONG VOWELS.

1. Nature.

I. Every syllablewhich has an

t?or w is long by nature

;

as, Tifiepa, c^ixog,&ic.

II. Every diphthong, or double vowel, likewise makes a

syllable naturally long ; as, alpo), avpa, relxog, evpog, oUog,

ovdaq, [.irjTpvtd, dyopa, Sic.

III. When two vowels are combined by contraction into

one,the

syllable

becomesnaturally

long ; as, adoj for deido;

dpyog for depyog ; Ipog for lepog.

IV. Every circumflexed vowel is long ; as, dpa^a, ndaa,

Kvloa, pvfia.^

Exceptions.

1 . Every final syllable,which is long by reason of a vowel

or diphthong, can be made short if it stand in the thesis,^

and the next word begins with a vowel;and in the epic

writers this shortening amounts almost to a constant rule ;*

1. This will be again considered under the head of accent.

2. The thesis is that partof the foot on which the stress of the voice

does not fall, and is opposed to the arsis ; thus, inji/xevv,

the firstsyl-

lable has the arsis, the remaining two are in the thesis.

3. The principleon which this exception depends is easily explained.

The 7?in

r/ii^vTj,for example, is equivalent to se, and one of these epsi-

lons being supposed to be elided before the initial vowel of the follow-

ing word, the other epsilon remains, of course, short by nature. In other

words, the final vowel of7//ievt} loses, as it were, a portion of its natural

length, by the sinking of the voice and by the vowel immediately follow-



4 EXCEPTIONS.

as, -qiiivfikv fi-evdeaacv [Horn. II. 1, 358) ; afjicpio 6/zwf [lb.

23) ; dexdal dnotva[lb. 57) ;

KXvdi.fiev

'Apyvporo^' [lb.177), &c.

2. On thecontrary, the long vowel retains its natural

measure when it falls in the arsis of the foot. The follow-

ing Homeric verses contain examples of both kinds.'

'HfiSTepu kvl oiKiJ, kv 'Apysi, rrj'kodi. Trdrpj^f. (//. 1, 30.)

TZef, 6 filv KreaTOv, 6 6' up' Evpvrov 'AKTopiuvog. {II. 2, 621.)

3. Nevertheless, the epic, and, after their example, the

elegiac poets, sometimes permit the long vowel or diph-

thong to retain its quantity even in the thesis of the foot.'^

4. A long vowel or diphthong, with a vowel following, is

sometimes shortenedin the

middle of a word; as, einralog,

OLog, vtog, roTovrog, rovTOv'i^ &c.

ing it. So the d in ajifo is equivalent to two omicrons, one of wliich

it loses before the following vowel, while the other remains short. In

like manner, the diphthongs ai. in dcxOai., and ev in(lev,

are supposedeach to lose a vowel.

1. Here, after one of the vowels has been supposed to be elided, and

asingle

short vowel remains, this latter,

beingin the arsis of the

foot,receives the stress of the voice, and becomes long again. Thus, in the

foot pw EVL, the syllable pu is in the arsis, and hence, though one of the

omicrons composing the omega is supposed to be cut oif before the ini-

tial vowel of kvl, and only asingle omicron remains, that omicron is nev-

ertheless lengthened by the stress of the voicefalling upon it. On the

other hand, in the foot oltid ev, the omega is in the thesis, and hence,

after this vowel has lost one of its component omicrons before the next

word, there is no stress of the voice upon the other omicron, and there-

fore it remains short.

2. It is not correct to say that this mostly takes place only in words

to which a digamma was originally prefixed. Passages frequently occur

in which these lengthenings are found without the support of the digamma.3. Homer only shortens certain forms, of which

kfiiraTog and oioc are

two instances. With the Attic dramatic poets, the shortening of the

diphthong at is much more rare than that of oi, and occurs principally

in the words rfet/latof, yEpalo^, Kpv(^alog, and that, too, mostly in ana-

pffisticand dactylic metres. (Compare remarks under the head oi Hia-

tus in the iambic trimeter, page 67 of this volume.) The comic, later

epic, and epigrammatic poets have proceeded the farthest in this short-

ening of long syllables. Upon the whole, it must be remarked, that the

shortening here referred to takes place most frequently in the diphthongs01, and ai, which the grammarians never regarded as a full long quantityin the thesis of the tone. Hence the ancients attribute to the article of,

al, only U time. Bekker, An. Gr. 821, 29. Spitzner, Gr. Pros.p.

8.



POSITION. ^

II. Position.

I. A short or doubtful vowel before two consonants or a

double letter(^, ^, i/))

is almost always long ; as, areXXd),

Ofifia, avTciyo), rpdneiâ, afidâ, dlxpa.

II. These two consonants may belong to the same word

with the vowel; as, eanepog, or one of them may belong

to the sameword,

and the other to the

succeeding

word;

as, Twv dfiodev ye,-&ed dvyarep AiOf, or both may be found

at the beginning of the following word ; as, dvdpd -^vrirbv

Eovra.

Exceptions.

1. A short vowel before a mute, folloAved by a liquid (A,

H, V, p), remains short, provided the mute and liquid belong

to one and the same syllable."

2. This rule, however, of a Aôwel before a mute and li-

quid, is itself subject to the following limitations :

I. Homer and the oldest Greek poets mostly avoid the

shortening

of

syllables

before a mute and liquid, and

generally permit it only when the form, followed by p

or X, could not otherwise be adapted to the verse.

Hence Homer usually shortens the preceding syllable

only before (ip, 6p, &p, Kp, up, rp, (pp, XP, and before

kX, nX, tX, x^-

II. In scanning the dramatic writers, the following casesmust be carefully noted.

(a.)A short vowel before a soft mute

(tt, k, t), or an

aspirate ((/>, x^ ^) followed by a liquid, is much

rather left short than lengthened by the Attic poets.^

{(3.)A short vowel before a middle mute

(/3, y, 6), fol-

1. The syllable, therefore, always remains long,1. When the liquid

stands before the mute; as, 6epKu. 2. In compound words, whether

the liquid precede or follow; as, EnTiajiCmvu. 3. When a word ends

with one of the two consonants, and the next begins with the other; as,

Iplc; jneyulrj, Myovalv nuvTee;. 4. When the vowel is long by nature;

as, I'Kdd'kov, firjvvrpov.

2. Porscn, ad Eurip. Orest. 64. Erfurdt, ad Soph. Aj.1109.

A2



b RULES FOR SHORT VOWELS.

lowed by p,is short in the comic writers, but in

tragedyis

mostly long,

(y.)A short vowel before a middle mute, followed by

any liquid except p,is almost always long. In

Euripides such syllables are always long ;but in

iEschylus, Sophocles, and Aristophanes, they are

sometimes short.'

(d.) The tragic writers occasionally leave a vowelshort before the two liquids fiv.^

III. As the epic writers, according to what has just been

remarked (2, 1), employ this shortening chiefly when

the word cannot in any other manner be adapted to

the measure, this circumstance explains why some-

times even two mutes, as an, and the double consonant

4', neglect length by position, and leave the preceding

vowel short; as, for example, before ZaKvvdog, ZeJieia,

'LKanavdpoc, OKenapvov, &c.*

V.

RULES FOR SHORT VOWELS.

I. A vowel before another vowel or diphthong is, gener-

ally speaking, short. Still, however, there are numerous

exceptions to this rule, which will be mentioned in the

course of the work.

II. Every syllable which has an £ or o is short by nature,

unless lengthened by position or crasis; as, endg.

1. Porson, ad Eurip. Hec. 298. Elmslcy, ad Eurip. Med. 288.

2. This is opposed by some critics, and among tlie rest by Elmsley

{ad Eurip. Bacch. 1132), but the rule is successfully defended by Por-

son.

3. To remove these shortenings, Knight {Prolog, ad Horn. 79) writes

AaKVvOoc, Ai'?i,eia, Kdjiav^pog, &c., and refers, in support of this opin-

ion, to the coins of Zancle (Messana) of the seventh century B.C.,

which give the name of the place in the old form, AANKAH. Thiersch

{Gr. Gr.() 146, 8) thinks that this form for the name of Zancle may

have arisen from the defective orthography of ancient times. This, how-

ever, is very unlikely ;and we may cite, in support of Knight's opinion,

the ovxi /iupaydov of Asclepiades {Anthol. Pal. vol. ii, p. 501).



LENGTHENING OF SHORT SYLLABLES. 7

Exceptions.

The Greek peels, especially the epic, often avail them-

selves of the aid of the arsis in lengthening a short syllable.

This takes place, I. At the end of Môrds;

II. In the begin-

ning of them;

III. In the middle of compounds.

I.

Lengthening ofshort

syllablesat the end

ofivords.

1. A short syllable at the end of a viôrd is often length-

ened in this manner, when the next wôrd begins vf'iih. a li-

quid ; as, Kara XiTcdpriv {II. 6, 64) ;de

[xeXirjv {II. 20,

322) ;vdarl VLôvreg {II. 7, 425) ;

d-rrd piov {II. 14, 154).

2. A short syllable at the end of a word is also sometimes

lengthened in a similar manner, when the next word begins

with the semivowel a; as, Kara, GV(peoloiv {Od. 10, 238).'

3. The Attics, in iambic trimeter verse, sometimes

lengthen the short syllable before p ; as, Trapd pdOpoiat

(Soph. Antig. 704). In the measures which approach

nearer to the epic dialect, other syllables also occur length-

ened.^

II. Lengthening of short syllablesin the heginn'ing of words.

Not only at the end, but also at the beginning of words,

the epic language lengthens a short or doubtful vowel by

the arsis, especially where two or more shorts follow. Andhere the following cases may be distinguished :

1. It happens least frequently that a pure short is made

long; as, Ze(f}vpi7j {Od. 7, 119); enlrovog {Ih. 12,

423) ;oiec {lb. 9, 425).

2. The doubtful vowels a, i, v, are far more frequently

1. Such lengthening is observed the most rarely before mutes, and

Mast of all before the aspirates 0, Xi & The reason is, that the aspi-

rates never admit of being doubled in pronunciation, whereas the liquids

easily are.

2. Hermann, ad Soph. Antig. I. c.—Id. El. Doctr. Metr. 45.—Mark-

land, ad Eurip. Suppl. 1)4.—Elmsley, ad Eurip. Iph. in Taur.p. 199,

Lips. ed.



8 RULES FOR DOUBTFUL VOWELS.

made long in the arsis of a tetrasyllable, or longer

word; as, for example, in such forms as dddvarog,

dKa^arog, dve(pE?iOg, dndXaftog, dTTOveeoOai, dnodiu)-

fiai,(fee. The same usage occurs in many polysylla-

bles, with t and v; as, Aloyevrjg, IlplanLdTjg, 'IraXia,

&vya~epa, vXaKoiiwpoi, &c. In proper names, as Pri-

amides, Italia, &.C., the Latin poets have followed the

example of the Greeks.

III. Lengthening of short syllables in the middle of verbs.

1 . The epic writers often lengthen by arsis in the middle

of compound words; namely, when the latter part begins

with a liquid; as, dtdneXeiori. {Od. 9, 291); Kardvevuv

{lb. 490) ; KardpiyrjM {lb. 14, 226).'

2. The tragic writers have occasionally allowed them-

selves lengthenings of this kind, especially in proper names;

as, 'iTTnofieduv, UapOevonalog.'^

3. The lengthening in the middle of the word before other

thanliquid

letters is

quite rare,and occurs

mostly only in

polysyllabic words; as, Ailrtersog {II. 16, 174) ; Hiocbaveog

{Anthol. Pal. 1, 502, Appollonid. 6, 2) ; aTcoepaeie {II. 21,

329).

VI.

RULES FORDOUBTFUL

VOWELS.I. The chief object of Greek prosody is to reduce to rule

the quantity of the doubtful or arbitrary vowels, a, i, v.

II. This is done in various ways, among which the po-

sition of the accent affords some, though not very extensive

aid, as may be seen by what follows.

1. Spitzner recommends, that, in the case of short vowels, the con-

sonant which follows be doubled; as, eTiXadov, uXXjikto^ (Gr. Pros. p.

15). It is better, however, to write the consonant singly, and supposeit to be doubled in pronunciation.

2. Compare Herman ), El. Doctr. Metr.p. 28.

3. In cases of this kind, many critics have recourse to the digamma.

{S^tzner, de Vers. Gr. Heroic, p. 86.)



RULES FOR DOUBTFUL VOWELS. 9

"Use of accent in determining quantity.

I. Every syllable marked with a circumflex is long by

nature; and, therefore, when this accent stands upon a

doubtful vowel, it shows this vowel to be long ; as, KkvQi,

Trpdyfia.

II. In like manner, when the acute accent stands upon

thepenult

of apolysyllabic word,

the final

syllableis

long;

as, ayiog, ayta, dyiov. So, also, Traideid, prjTopetd.^

III. On the other hand, when a doubtful vowel stands at

the end of a word, and the penult has the circumflex, the

final syllable is short; as, KXvdt, Trpdynd?

IV. The final syllable is also short when the acute is on

the antepenult ; as, rixpdrjTL, 'KepKvpd?V. In dissyllabic and polysyllabic words, when the final

syllable is short and the penult has the acute accent, the

penult also is short; as, Kpiaig (t), XvoLg {v), noXXaKig (a).*

VI. As, however, the lenglh or shortness of a syllable

can be obtained only imperfectly from the accent, it is ne-

cessary to seek for general rules, which may coincide with

the usage of the poets. These we will now proceed to

give.

Of the doubtful vowels in the end of words.

I. Final a is short ; as, rpaTTS^a, 'ivd, Imrord, rervcpd.

1. A long vowel being equal to two short ones, and the accent which

stood on the antepenult ofujiOi; being shifted to the penult of dyia, this

penult becomes, in fact, the antepenult, beyond which the accent cannot

be thrown back;the final syllable being now equal to two vowels, and

compelling, of course, the acute to be transferred to the l.

2. In this case, when we resolve the word, the acute stands over the

antepenult, and the circumflex is formed from the union of the acute of

the antepenult with the grave of the penult ; as, fidu'Xlov,/j.a?iAov. Nowif the last syllable were long here, the acute would fall upon the fourth

syllable from the end, which is contrary to one of the laws of the acute

accent.

3. This follows from what has been said under note 1.

4. For, if the penult were long in this case, it would require to be

marked with the circumflex.



10 EXCEPTIONS.

Exceptions.

1. But a pure is long ; as, 'Adfjvad, (j)iXtd, oiKvd, ex-

cept verbals in rpia ; as, ipaXrptd, and derivatives from

adjectives inrjg ; as, aXridecd ;

and also Upetd, Kwdeid,

(iaoiXeid {a queen) ;but (iaaiXsLd (a kingdom), and jSa-

atXetd(adj.

fem.royal).

2. The Doric a for7]

is long ; as, (pdfxd, Alveid;and

also the Doricgenitive

in a from nominatives kiag

and7]g ; as, 'Avvi6dg, d

; 'Arpeldrig, d.

3. Words ending in da and 0a have the a long ; as, jSa-

oiXivdd, Ai]dd, "LiimiOd, except aKavdd and ifXiBd.^

4. Words ending in pa not preceded by a diphthong ;^

as, Kapd, Trijpd, x^P^ '> except dyKvpd, yecpvpd, bXvpd,

Kspicvpd, and the perfect middle of verbs in pw ; as,

6ce(f)6opd, TTenopd.

5. Words ending in pa with a consonant preceding ; as,

dypd, Trerpd, aKearpd ; except a<podpd, GKoXcnevSpd,

Tavdypd.

6. All feminine adjectives from masculines in og ; as,

Stuaid; except did, Ttorvtd, id, and fiid.

7. Duals in a, as novad, and vocatives from nouns in ag,

as Alveid^ or poetical vocatives of the third declen-

sion, as Aaoddfid, JloXvddixd.

8. The accusative in ea, from the genitive (third declen-

sion) in £0)g ; as, ll7]Xed, from JIr]Xeo)g ; [iaoiXed, from

(3aai.Xeo)g ;but in Homeric Greek, TlrjXed,'^ from Urj-

Xrjog ; [iaoiXrjd, from jSaaiXrjog.^

1. The length of the final syllable in words ending in 6a and 6a, ap-

pears to be derived from their Doricorigin.

Lohcck. ad Phryn. 438.

2. For TTEtpa, fieipu, a<patpu, &c., have the final syllable short. The

word traipa retains the long a, as being formed from 'irapoc, iriipa, Erai-

pa. Again, AWpaand

'^aii^u'itake the

long quantityon account of the

two consonants that intervene between the diphthong and finalsyllable.

3. But the vocative in a from masculine nouns in Tjg is short.

4. In Homer (//. 1, 265;

Od. 12, 630) Q-rjaea is to be pronounced,

by synizesis, Qr/aeu. So also Tvdia {11. 7, 222), of which the Homeric

genitiveis TwJt'of.

5. Even in Attic Greek the a is sometimes shortened. Compare

Porson, ad Eurip. Hec. 870.



FINAL av. 11

9. Nouns in eta, from verbs in evw; as, 7rpo0?/T£(a, 6ov-

Xeid} «>-^'

II. Final av is short; as, dv, TrdfiTrdv, Aidv, fieXdv, TToif]-

odv, ervipdv.

Exceptions.

1. Masculines in av are long ; as, Ttrdv, Traidv.

2. The neuter adjective -ndv;and hence the Attics ap-

pear to have taken occasion to lengthen here and there

the forms compounded with it; as, d^ndv, iTxi-ndv, -rrap-

d-rrdv. But -ndinrdvand TTporrdv are probably every-

where decidedly short.^

3. Adverbs in av; as, Xidv, aydv, irepdv. On the con-

trary,

ordv and onordv follow the quantity of the sim-

ple dv.

4. Accusatives of the first declension, from a long nom-

inative; as, (piAidv, from (ptXid; Alveidv, from Alveid^.

But the accusative in av from a short nominative is

short; as, Tvorvidv, from norvid

; rpdne^dv, from rpd-

TTS^d.

5. The Doric genitive plural of the first declension in

dv, as formed by contraction, is likewise always long ;

as, fisXulv, vvjtcpdv,for fxeXioyv, vvjj,(f)(ov. So, also,

the Doric forms derived from those intj,

or produced

by contraction; as, TTOLfj-dv, Uooeiddv, 'AXKfidv.

III. Final ap is short ; as, ovdp, vstcrdp, ixdicdp.

Exceptions.

1, Monosyllables in ap are long ; as, Kdp, xl)dp.

2. The adverb yap is properly short;but before ol and

similar words it very often occurs long in epic lan-

guage, through the force of the following breathing.^

1. For more specialrules concerning eia, la, oia, and aia, in Attic

Greek, consult Maltby, Lex. Pros. cc. v. and vii.;of his Prosody, p

ix. and Ixv., ed. 2.

2. Blomfield, ad Mich. Pers. 42. Bultmann, Gr. Gr.(^ 62, n. 5.

3. D'Orvillc, Vann. Crit. p. 391, scj.



12 FINAL ag.

IV. Final af is long ; as, Alveidg, Trdg, Ifidg, îXidg, rv-

tpdg, 7indg.

Exceptions.

1. Words of the third declension not forming the geni-

tive in avrog ; as, i:ie?idg, fieydg, Xa^-rrdg, aeXdg, Kepdg,

&c. But rdXdg has the final syllable long.

2. The accusativeplural

of nouns andparticiples

of the

third declension; as, Ttrdvdg, rv-nrovrag, noLnevag,

(ppevac, &c. (but fiaaiXedg, from ftaoiXea). The accu-

sative plural of the first declension, on the other hand,

is always long.

3. Adverbs in ag are short; as, iriXag, drpefidg, ajKag.

4. Kg is short in the second person of the diflêrent tenseswhich terminate therein

; as, erey^dg, reyêidg, olddg,

XeXotirdg, necbvKdg.

5. By a license of the Doric dialect, forms in ag, other-

wise long, are occasionally shortened, and that, too,

even in accusatives plural of the first declension; as,

Moipdg {Theocrit. 2, 160) ; avrdg {Id. 3, 2) ; vvjicpag

(Id. 4, 29).

II. Of Final I.

I. Final i is short; as, lî, otX, fisXi, TvirrovaT, ridrjfii,

&c.

Exceptions.

1. But the abridged form Kpl (for KpCdrj) is long, together

with the names of letters in i; as, ^l, m, &,c.

2. The paragogic t, added by the Attic comic poets and

orators to certain pronouns and adverbs, is likewise

long; as, ovtooI, vvvl, ovtmoI, &,c. So the similar c

in the words 66l, ravrl, devpl, &c.

3. Adverbs ending in i,and formed from nouns, have the

I either long or short, but more commonly short;such

as d[iox6h d[jLaxr]Tl, Travdrjixi, iravoiuXi, aTTOVTjTi, &c.



FINAL SYLLABLES. 13

But those which refer to nations have the l always

short; as, 'LKvdiorl, 'ApyoXiarl, Bap6api.OTX,&c.'

II. Final cv is short; as, TvnTOvalv, epXv, irdXlv, ttoXlv,

nplv, vlv, o(plv.

Exceptions.

1. Final lv, making Ivo^ in the genitive,is long ; as, prp/-

fj,lv,Iktlv.

2. Nouns that have two terminations for the nominative ;

as, 6eX({)lv (otherwise deA^if), uktIv, plv, Iv, Xiv.

3. The datives plural rnuv and v[dv, though in several in-

stances Sophocles makes rudv andviilv,

and the epic

dialecthas also

a^iuv, v[j,iiiv.

III. Final ig is short; as, dig, rplg, -noXlg, rvpavvlg, &c.

Exceptions.

1. Monosyllabic nouns, and those which have two ter-

minations for the nominative; as, Ig, Xig, pig, Klg,

deX-

(j)lg, CLKTlg.

2. Dissyllableswhich make the penult of the genitive

long ; as, dxlg, (3aX6lg, nXrjlg, Kvrjjilg, Kp7)mg, bpvlg^

&c.

3. Polysyllables with two short syllables before the last ;

as, Parpaxlg, icaXa}ug, Kavovlg, irXoicaiug, pa(pavlg, &c.

(but (iaaiXlg, itcsTlg).

1. Consult Blomfield, ad Msch. Prom. 216. According to this critic,

the adverbs in question ought always to be written with a simple vowel

in the termination. The MSS. fluctuate between t and ei; as, afioyr^TC

and ajioyT]Tei,uvari and avare'c. On the other hand, Lobeck, ad Soph.

Antig. 1213, maintains that the diphthong is admissible into the words

derived from adjectives ; but in those from substantives he would makethe formation conform strictly to the radical word. Spitzner, Pros. Gr.

p.48.

2. "Opvtf, however, has the last syllable often short in tragedy, though

always long in comedy (Porson, ad Eur. Hec. 204). In Homeric Greek

the final syllableis long. Spitzner thinks that we must assume a double

form, opvir, Idor, Iv, and also opvcoc,Iv. The yet e.xtant plural bpvciq

favours this opinion.

B



14 FINAL SYLLABLES.

4. Adjectives in ig, compounded from long forms, are

likewise

long

in the final

syllable; as,

dXiKprjnlg, (3a-

6vKVT]iilg,&c.

III. Of Final V.

I. Final v is short; as, ov, yovv, yXvKv, daKpv^ aarv.

Exceptions.

1. The third person singular of the imperfect and second

aorist of verbs invfii ; as, 'idv, ecpv ;

also of the sec-

ond person imperative in one of its forms; as, SeLKVv,^

OjJiVV.

2. The names of the letters[j,v,

vv;and fictitious words

;

as, V, ypv, &c.

II. Final vv is short; as, oijv, noXvv, (3padijv, êvyvvv.

Exceptions.

1. The accusative of nouns which have vg in the nom-

inative; as, IXvv, lÔvv, laxvv, d(ppvv, fivv.

2. Nouns that have two terminations for the nominative;

as, ôpKvv (otherwise ôpKvg) ;or vvog in the geni-

tive; as, noaovv.

3. The first person singular imperfect and second aorist

of verbs invfii ; as, ecpvv, edvv, edeiKVvv, eêvyvvv.

4. Nvv, when equivalent to mmc. 'Nvv, the enclitic,

though short in Homer (who uses also vv), is often long

in tragedy, and always long in comedy.'

III. Final vp is long ; as, Trvp, ndprvp. Yet, in the ob-

^ lique cases, these make Trvpog, TTVpL ; fxdprijpoc, fidprvpt.^

V: :

1. The third

person imperative, dsiKvvTo,follows the

analogy

of dtin-

vvBl.

2. Monk, ad Eurip. Alcest. 1096. Id. in Mus. Crit vol. i., p. 73.

An opposite doctrine is maintained, however, by EUendt, Lex. Soph.

vol. ii., p.183.

3. The Etym. Mag. 506, 20, considers substantives in vp as scarcely

Greek, and admits only such asfiuprvp, TJ'iOvp, Sec, but rejects forms

like KepKvp, lAAt'o, to which Arcadius, de Ace. 19, 17, adds also Aiyvp.



INCREMENT OF NOUNS. 15

IV. Final vg is short; as, (iadvg, Kopvg, niixv^, Trpeofivg,

Bapvg,d^vg.

Exceptions.

1. Nouns in vg, which have vog in the genitive ; as, dx-

Xvg, IXvg, Ix^vg, vrjdvg, ocppvg, TrXrjdvg.^

2. Nouns vv^hich have two terminations in the nomina-

tive; as, <l?6picvg.

3. Monosyllables ; as, [.ivg, avg.

4. Terminations of verbs in vju ; as, 6eiKVvg (second per-

son singular present), dsiKVvg (participle), edeiKvvg, &c.

II.

Ofthe

doubtful vowelsin the

increment ofnouns.

I. A in the increment of nouns is generally short; as,

oCdixa, drog ; Kpeag, drog ; veKrap, dpog ; jxeXav, dvog ;av-

Xa^, diiog ; "Apaijj, dj3og ; i-iaKap, dpog ; aXg, dXog ; rdXag,

dvog, &c.

Exceptions.

1 . All increments in avog are long, except rdXdvog, [MsXa-

vog ; as, Ttrdv, dvog ; Udv, dvog ; 'Aviav, dvog ;ira-

idv, dvog, Sic.

2. All increments in aaog, from nominatives in a^ pure,

are long ; as, ola^, dKog ; pva^, dKog ; (paia^, dnog ;

cpXva^, dKog, &;c.

3. A is long in the dative plural of nouns, &c., that have

a long penult in the genitive singular ; as, yiyag, av-

rog, dot; rvipag, avrog, dot

; Txdg, avrog, dot. But

those which are syncopated in the sing-ular have the a

short; as, dvdpdai, iraTpdoi.

4. Add the following examples of nouns which have a in

the increment long .

3. But KliTvg, Eurip. Hippol. 227, and always so in tragedy. Also

&pKvg. Monk, ad Eurip. I. c.



16 INCREMENT OF NOUNS.

Kspag,



INCREMENT OF VERBS, 17

" a lash,•"• (poivi^, iKog. Homer, however, has QprjiKeg al-

ways short.

VI. But I is generally short in nouns iniip, t6og ;

and i^,

Ixog ; as, %epvti/), l6og ; arC^, Ixog ; &pc^, rplxog ; fxdoTi^,

Ixog," a gum."

VII. T is short in the increment of monosyllables in vg,

vog ; as, 6pvg, 6pv6g ; îvg, nvog.

VIII. T is also short in the increment of neuters in v;

as, SaKpv, vog.

IX. T is likewise short in the increment of masculines

and feminines in vg and vp ; as, veicvg, vog ; IXvg, iXvog ;

IxQvg, vog ; iidprvp, vpog ;and also in the neuter noun "nvp,

Txvpog. But 6a6vg^ vdog, and KU)p,vg, vdog, must be excepted.

X. T is generally shortin the increment of nouns in

vând

vi/) ; as, bvv^, vx^^ j ^dXvif}, v6og ; except SoCdv^, vKog ;

KOKKV^, vyog ; Ki]pv^, vnog ; K?) )^, vKog ; yvip, virog ; ypvip,

imog ;while Be6pv^ has either vnog or vKog.

XI. Nouns of two terminations, in vg or vv, have v long

in the increment; as, (bopKvg or

< ?6picvv, vvog.

III.

Of the doubtful vowels in the increment of verbs.

I. The quantity of the penult in the present and imperfect

remains the same through all the voices and moods; as,

Kplvo), eKplvov, Kplve, KplvoLfii, Kplvo), Kplveiv, KplVO)V, Kpl-

vojj,aL, eicplvonrjv, uplvov, &c.

II. Most tenses have the same quantity in the penult as

those from which they are formed; as, ervnov, tvtto), erv-

7T7JV, TVTTrjOOfiai., rervna, erervnei-v, &c.

III. Verbs in dôf, iô), and vô), increase short in the fu-

ture ; as, dpTrd^cj, dood ; vofiiô), lau) ; k^.v^cj, vaco.^

1. MttCTTt^, lyoQ," a lash ,•" but fiaari^, Xxo^, a species of gum.

2. The poets, especially the epic, not nnfrequently lengthen the forms

of verbs in fw by doubling the sibilant letter, and that not merelv in the

arsis, but also in the thesis. Thus, aixuuc 6' alxfiUGaovat {ÎL 4, 324) ;

and ETOLuaaaacaT' 'AiT/vy {lb. 10, 571), &c.

B3



18 INCREMENT OF VERBS.

IV. Verbs in aw, when ao) is preceded by a vowel, and

all verbs inpao), have the penult of the future

long; as,

fidw, doo); opao), doo)

; dpdo), doco}

V. Verbs in do, when preceded by a consonant other

thanp, have the penult of the future short

; as, andoj, doo);

yeXdiO, dao).

VI. Verbs in aao) shorten the penult of the future, drop-

ping one of the sigmas ; as, nXdoao), doco ; IfidooCi), daw.VII. Liquid verbs, or those ending in Aw, juw, vo, pw,

shorten the penult of the future, but in the first aorist active

invariably take, either a long vowel or a diphthong; as,

-ddXXo, ddXd), ed7]Xa ; teXXo), teXo, eretXa; (patvoj, (pdvib,

ecjyrjva ; dapOvvG), dapdvvcj, eddpdvva ; anetpo), onepu), eo-

irapua?

VIII. Verbs in loi, not proceeding from roots in ^o, in-

crease long in the future; as, icvXlco, loo)

; kovlg), lao). But

eadlo) has the t everywhere short."

IX. Dissyllabic verbs in vco are for the most part long in

the future and aorist; as, 6vo), 6vgo), edvaa

; rpvci), rpvoo),

erpvaa. Except irrvit), tttvom, ETrrvaa; kvo), kvog), eKvoa ;

(3Xv(t), fiXvoo), E(3Xvaa ;and one or two others.

X. Polysyllabic verbs in vo), on the other hand, are for the

most part long in the penult of the future and aorist; as,

ioxvo), Icxvoo), loxvoa ; daupvo), daKpvao), edaKpvaa, Sic.

XI. But polysyllables in vo) are for the most part short;

as, dvvo), dvvoG); dpvo), dpvoco ; dcpvG), dcpvao, Sic.

XII. Verbs in v(o, which have lengthened forms invim,

1. Except Kepdu, dau;and nepdu, aau, in the transitive signification ;

for TTfpud),^^ I pass over,'''' has the a

long. Clarke, ad II. 1, 67.

2. The principle on which the change takes place is this : in the fu-

ture the tone rests on -the lastsyllable, which is contracted, and hence

the

previous syllableis short. In the

aorist, however,the

augmentin-

creases the number of syllables, and the tone consequently changes and

travels back towards the root.

3. Compare Draco, de Mctr. 22, 25; 67, l.—Etym. Mag. 575, 31.

The apparent contradiction among the ancients, it being elsewhere

{Const. Lose. 247, 20.—Theod. Gaz. 77) laid down, that, except in ka-

6lu, L is short in these penults, is ascribed by Spitzner and others to

corruptions in those passages. Gr. Pros. p.87.



INCREMENT OF VERBS. 19

for the most part shorten the doubtful vowel; as, deiKvvo),

eSeiKvvov ; fiiyvvo), e[j,iyvvov.The verbs

(j)v(j)and SvCi)

are not exceptions to this rule, since they do not furnish

complete forms in vju, but only in the second aorist.

XIII. Polysyllablesin

vfxihave the v everywhere short,

except in the singular number of the present tense, active

voice, and in the third person plural of the same tense and

voice; as,

êvyvvfu,êvyvvoi ;

but êvyvvfiev, êvyvvre,

êvyvvTov, êvyvvvat, Sic.

XIV. On the other hand, dissyllablesin viu have the v

everywhere long ; as, dvOt, dvvac, edvre, &c.

XV. The penult of the second future and second aorist

is always short; as, ddfioj, XadC), Kpv6Cd, XIttg), eddfiov,

eXd-

6ov, eKpv6ov,eXlirov.

Withthe

single exceptionof the

verb nXrjaacj, which, in the epic dialect, retains the long

vowel in the penult ; as, enXrjyov, er:Xr]y7]v}

XVI. The third persons plural in aai, and the feminine

participlein aaa, are always long ; as, XeXotTrdoL, KEKpvcpd-

oi, lordai; Tvipdaa, ypd-ipdaa, &c.^

XVII. The augment, which, in verbs beginning with v

or I, consists merely in lengthening this vowel, makes, of

course, the initial syllable of the historical tenses long ; as,

iKe,TevO), Ikstsvov, iKerevaa.

XVIII. The doubtful vowel in the penult of the perfect

active strictly follows the measure of the root in the pres-

ent ; hence the middle syllable is short in most forms which

have a in the present ; as, ypdcpoo, yeypdcpa ;but fluctuates

1. Clarke, ad. II. 3, 31. The Attic tragedians retain this in the sim-

ple form {Eurip. Orest. 487;Eleclr. 1148) ; but, on the contrary, shorten

the compounds ; as, hKnla-yelca {Med. 8), kK7t?Myevre( {Rhes. 287). In

like manner, besides irâyi^v in the passive, we have alsolTjn'jyr]v

and

the like in later authors. So in

Apollon.Rhod. 4, 1052,

uTroTfi7]j£VTEc.2. The old form of the third person plural

ended in -vtl;the r was

afterward changed into a and the v thrown out, the syllable, however,

remaining long ; as, MJ-oinavTi, TiE^.oinuvai, 'keT.oinuaL. So the primi-

tive form of the feminine participleended in -vaa, having the previous

vowel long,and this afterward dropped the v, but retained the long quan-

tity ; as, Tinpdvaa, Tvipdaa.



20 ^INCREMENT OP VERBS,

in those with i and v; as, Tpl6cj, rerpl(pa ;

but piTTTCj, ep-

pl(pa ;and again, kvtttco, H,eKv<pa ;

but KpvTrro), K£Kpv(pa.

XIX. The perfect miadle, with the exception of those

which have a in the root and change it into o(as, Tpe(po),

e-pdipov, rerpocba), has usually a long vowel in the penult;

as, ayo) (I break), edya ; av6dvo), sdda; Kpdi^b), niupdya ;

piyeo), epplya ; rpci^o), rsTplya ; (ppioaoj, iretpplfca, &ic. But

'necppdda andsome others are found short

;

and,in old

forms,the first vowel was shortened by position, after rejecting

the intermediate consonant; as, jSedda, yeyda, detdla, rrecpva.

XX. Perfects, with what is called the Attic reduplication,

have usually, in polysyllabic verbs, a short vowel in the pe-

nult; as, dXetcjiOJ, dXt^Xicpa ; opvaacx), opwpvxa. Still, how-

ever, in Ionic poets, forms of this kind are occasionally

lengthened; as, eiX'i)Xovda, viTejivrji.ivKe (II. 22, 491).

XXI. When a is inserted in the third person plural of

the perfect or pluperfect, or of the optative, it is always

short; as, 6pG)pE'y(,dro, K.e.K,XLd.raL, neLdoidro, &ic.

XXII. The reduplication before the root of verbs injil

is

short ; as, rWrmi, dlduifit.

XXIII. In verbs in ^t the a is always short; as, iorarov,

ujrdnEV, &c. Except in the third person plural in dot, and

in the masculine and feminine participles ; as, loTdOL, la-

rag, iardaa.

VII.

Of the Doubtful Vowels in the Penultimate.

I. Of a in the penultimate.

I. Penultimate a is generally short before a vowel or

diphthong,

or a

single

consonant; as,

dyXdog,Sdeig, kukoc.

II. But penultimate a is long in the following cases :



DOUBTFUL VOWELS IN THE PENULT. 21



22 DOUBTFUL VOV/ELS IN THE PENULT.

vavdyog,

^evdyog,

Xoxdyoq^

(pdyog,

2. Before 6 in

dndSog,^

OTTddl^,

3. Before & in

dvpaOev,

4. Before ic in

KVdKUV,

5. Before A in

veoddXrjg^

ddXog,

oidycjv,

rdyog,

Tdyeo),

TteTTpdya,and the like.

dSo),"

io satiate,'"

ddoJv.

evyddrjg, Dor. for evyrjd'^g,

eirpddrjv.

AdKWV,^

rpidKaq.

KoddXog,

PdXog.^

And in KdXog, which is long in Homeric Greek, but al-

waysshort in Attic.''

6. Beforejr*

in

dfjiog {mens),



DOUBTFUL VOWELS IN THE PENULT. 23

passed with the long quantity from the epic dialect to

thetragedians.

On the

contrary, klxo^vo

in Homer

and the epic poets, but klx&vo) in the tragic writers.

So (pddvix)in Homeric Greek is long, but in Attic short.'

In dissyllables in avoq ; as, ddvoq, dpdvog, Trdvog, (pd-

v6g, Kpdvog, and compounds, dopvKpdvog, entKpdvoi',

jSovKpdvoc. And in the following :

TToXvdvcop,

evdvopia,

veavig,

(paaidvog,

edvog {subtilis)^

lTOLlldVb)p,

GTvydvojp,

^iXdvo)p,

8. Before tt in

drrog,

"AvdTTog,

"Idnv^,

Vepjidvog,

'YovXidvog^

'Btdvo)p,(fee.

Uptdnog,

vdnv, same as

OLvdni.

9. Before p in

&viidpr]g, ridpa,

fcdpig, Xdpog,

Pdpig, (pdpog,^

dpd (preces)* tpdpog,

Kardpa, ddpov,

ndpdpog, evfidpig.

10. Before (Tin KOTndoo), opdoo), Spdoco, and other futures

from verbs in a« pure and pdo).

1. Epic poets not unfrequently shorten verbs in aivu into avu; as,

lieXxiveL,Horn. II. 7, 64

; olddvEi, lb. 9, 554; kv(5uv£C, lb. 14, 73.

2. But £uvo^,'^vcstis."

3. Yet AupSuvoc, liiKdvor, 'Hpidavug. Later poets, however, some-

times shorten the long forms for the convenience of the verse; as, 'loii-

CTLdv6(, 'Omriuvog. Jacobs, ad Anth. Pal. 396, 582, 955.

4. 'kpa has three meanings : 1. a prayer ;2. an imprecation ;

3. mis-

fortune, evil, or ruin. When Homer employs it in the first of these sig-

nifications, the penult of the word is always long. When he uses it in

the second sense, the penult is common. When it occurs in his poemswith the third mcaninjr, the penult is short. Among the tragic writers,

on the other hand, the penult is everywhere short. Mallby, ad verb.

5. <lapof has the penult common in tragedy {Monk, ad Eurip. Hip-pol.

145.—Sandford, Gr. Pros. p. 337, in notis). On the other hand, in

Homer, the penult is always long.



2^ DOUBTFUL VOWEL IN THE PENULT.

In the third person plural in aoi, and the feminine parti-

ciple in aaa; as, rervcpdoi, Lardai, edai, rv-ipdaa.

In the dative plural,third declension, where the penult of

the genitive singular is long by position ; as, rvipdv-

Tog, Tvipdai.

In all derivatives from verbs in aw pure and pau ; as,

opdoig, TTspdoig, &c.

11. Before rin all derivatives from verbs in aw pure and

paw ; as, opdrog, dedrog, ixepdrog, Idrpog, Kpdrrjp, &c.

So iiKpdrog," unmixed" from d and Kepdo) ;

but uKpd-

rog,"unrestrained," from a and Kpdrog. In like man-

ner distinguish between the compounds of dpdojiai and

epdixaL. Thus, noX-vapdrog," much wished for" but

TToXviipdrog, '•''much loved."

In names of nations and proper names; as, 'Aoidrrjg,

liTTapTidrrjg, Teyedrrjg. And also in the feminines

formed from them; as, 'Aaidrig, Midedrig. Add like-

wise names of rivers, mountains, and islands; as, Ev-

(ppdrrjg, ]>ii.(f>drrjg, AevKdrT]g. But forms of this kind

proceeding from short roots have the short vowel ; as,

£i^aXiJ.d~rjg, TaXaTTjg, "Lapiidrrig,&c.

In those words which, coming from Ionic forms, received

long a by Dorism, and passed thence into the Attic and

also the common dialect; as, kadri.

In thefollowing

words :

or?/.



DOUBTFUL VOWEL IN THE PENULT. 25

II. Of L in the Penultimate.

I. Penultimate i is generally short before a vowel, or

diphthong, or a single consonant; as, irevTa, lov, mdog.

II. But penultimate i is long in the following cases ;

Before a voioel.

1. In the following Homeric feminines, which, as the

two columns indicate, have the penult long in Homer

and the epic dialect, but short in Attic*

Epic. Attic.

depylri^ apyta.

advfUTj,advfxla.

aTTLCrlri,dntaria.

diraidtTf,diraLdla.

dTifUTjj drifiia.

eoTiT],korla.

KaKoepylr], KaKovpyla.

opjilr], opfiia.

fKjjpCT], fl(j,)pla.

'npoedplrj, TTpoedpla.

TravoTrXiT], TxavoTrXla.

Tcpodvfilr], TTpodvfila.

Tvpavvli], Tvpavvta.

aiOplr}^ aldpXa.

1. The true reason for this lengthening among the epic writers is to

be found, accordingto

Spitzner, in the easily possible protraction of thedoubtful vowel in pronunciation, proofs of which are furnished also byother vowels

; as, Surrjp and Sureipa for SoT^p and Soreipa. The epic

poets would the more readily allow this protraction in pronunciation, as

it enabled them, without difficulty, to adapt a variety of otherwise use-

less forms to the heroic measure. And, on the other hand, it was natu-

ral that the Attic poetry should use these forms short for the iambus,which was also, indeed, required for the common pronunciation. If this

view of the subject be well founded, it will not be necessary, with Malt-

by, to explain forms like aKOfiiaTlri by contraction from uKo/iianeri, for

which course no sufficient reason can be discovered in heroic verse.

Neither is it of any avail to write eia for la in this kind of words, as it

contradicts the derivation, and is, indeed, correct in avai6eL7) and some

others, but not in uti/utjand the like. Spitzner, Gr. Pros.

p.118.

2. Long in Solon, not found in Homer. Short in Aristophanes, Plui.

1129, but long in the Nubes, 571.



26 DOUBTFUL VOWEL IN THE PENULT.

2 . 'Avla and KaXla are long in both Homeric and Attic

Greek,'the Homeric form

being dvCr]

andKaXiT].

An-

other term Kovia (Hom. kovIt]) has the penult conunon

in Homeric Greek, but in the singular more frequently

long, in the plural always short. Among the Attic

writers, Aristophanes employs it in the lyric passages

with a short penult, but in the dialogue with a long

one. In the tragic writers it occurs thrice, and eachtime with the penult short.^

3. Generally speaking, in alKla, evdlo^, and Xlav, though

Xlav also occurs, especially in Attic.

4. In proper names in io)%' which shorten the vowel in

the genitive ; as, 'Ajxcplojv, AoXlcov, Ilavdicjv, gen.

Jlavdiovog. On the contrary, those remain short

which take the long vowel in the genitive ; as, Bovko-

Xtcov, 'Retlcov, Olvontojv, gen. Olvomo)vog.^

5. Comparatives in mv have the i long in Attic, but short

elsewhere; as, 'yXvicT(i)v,

KaKLO)v.

6. Verbs in m, not proceeding from roots in ^o), have the

I generally long ; as, (pOld), %pi«, nplo), kvXco), e^aXlb),

xX'nii,&c. But those which had originally a ^ in the

root are short; as, arlisi, fiaarto),

to which add eodlo)

and did), though not from such roots.^

1. Ka2.i.d stands once with the short penult in Pseudo-Phocyllides,

V. 79.2. Malthy, ad verb.—Sandford, Gr. Pros.

p. 340, in notis.

3. 'Opluv, gen. -luvog, is of variable measure in Homer and the epic

poets,but short in the tragedians; as, Eunp. Cycl. 273; Ion. 1153.

And also in Callim. H. to Arlem. 254.

4. KrjKiu has the penult short in Homer, long in tragedy. (Od. 5, 455 ;

Soph. Philoct. 783.) With regard to the verbjjjjviu,

it may be observed,

that the penult of the present is common, but that of the future and first

aorist long ; thus, /irjvlo)or

fiTjviu,future firjvlau, first aorist ifirjvlaa. On

the other hand, the second aorist is ijxrjvlov, or, dropping the augment,

UTjvXov. In the second book of the Iliad, v. 769, we havefir/vlev,

but

this appears to be the imperfect. Among the tragic writers, Sophocles

employs the verb five times, but determines nothing respecting the quan-

tity.In the Rhesus of Euripides,

v. 494, we have /iijviuv,and in the

Hippolytus,V 1141, fiavLu. It is safer, however, to lengthen it in the

tragedians. Maltby, ad verb.




7. Dissyllabic oxytones in cog have for the most part a

long penult ; as, Kplog, log,"an arrow," and "poison ;"

but log,"one," and lov,

"a violet,'" proparoxytones,

have the c short.

8. I is also long in the following

Ivy^,

kI(i)v,

TXlOiV,

7TplO)V,

Qplov,

'W,'T-nepluv.

Before a consonant.

1. Before /3 in

dKpl6rjg,T6tg,

arlbr].

But all derivatives from the second aorist of rpldo) and

similar verbs are short; as, rpldog, diarptdrj, nepi-

rplbrig. This remark holds good of napaipvp^r} and

similar formations.'

ipvaWrj,&/il6o),

Tpl6(i),and compounds.

2. Before y in




4. Before & in

epWog,

Wvg,

KpWri,

6. Before k in

<pplK7],

KOtKOg,

TpdvLKog,

6. Before X in

apylXog,^

veoylXog,

veoylXrjgf

ofilXog,

iXvg,

iXrj,

TridlXov,

7. Beforefi

in

BpTfiTj,

l(pdliiog,

fill^og,^

Ppldb), and derivatives,

dyXWeg.

vIkt], and derivatives,

KLKvg, and compounds,

filKpog,or

ofMiKpog.

aiilXa^,

GTzlXog^

ij)lX6g^

X^Xog, and compounds,

Grp66lXog,

[laplXr],

fivaTiXi].

Giiiog,

(plfiog,

Xlfiog, and compounds,

Tijit?/,and compounds,

fiovXlfxidC)}.

8. Before v in verbs in ivo); as, kXIvo), Kplvco, ttIvo)^

dplvo), Gcvo), (hdlvG), Sic. Except rivo) and (pOcvo),

which are long in Homer, but short in Attic.

870. But aid?]," a water-plant," has the short penult. Th. 887. Yet

the diminutive of the former, auhov, has the i short {Aristoph. Nub.

881), and, in like manner, the adjective cldoeig. Nicand. Alex. 276.

Th. 17.

1. It

may

be laid down as a general rule, that t is long in the termi-

nation tAof, when the word is proparosytone. So in similar forms, as

'ACi7u(, and so, also, in the like neuter, ntdlXov. Draco de Metr. 76, 28.

2. Yet amXog is also found. Compare Lycophron, 188, 374.

3. The ancients, as a general rule, give o.xytone forms in Aof as long ;

as, x^^'^C> >pl/\.6g,&c. Draco de Metr. 35, 21 ; 101, 3 : 163, 17.

4. Compare page 27, note 3.

6. Most oxytones in[io( have the long penult. Draco de Metr. 63, 10.




In the following words :

yvplvog,

iplvog.




1 1 Before a in

'Bplaevq,Kvlaa,

laogin

Homer,'

12. Before r in nouns initt], irTjg, crig ; as, 'Aippodlrrj,

'Aficptrplrrj, dcofiarlrtg, iroXlrrjg, dnXlTTjg, rroXlrig, &c.

Except, however, Kplrrjg and other derivatives from

the perfect passive with a short penult.''


GtTog, with com-

pounds,*

Tlrdv,

TptTOV,

(plrvg.^

oldov,

T:i(j)vg,

vl(p(,),but vl(pdg.

uKovtrov,

KXiTvg,

Xlrog,

dixrjvlrog,

ddrjplrog,

13. Before <^ in

ypl(pog,

i,epl(pog,

GTlcpog^

14. Before % in i%wp and rdplxog.

III. Of V in the penultimate,

1. Penultimate v is generally short before a vowel or diph-

thong, or a single consonant; as, vog, kvei, Xvyog.

1. The penult of Zcrof is long with Homer, but short with the trage-

dians. The first syllable in laodsoc, however, is long in tragedy, on the

same principle that the a is lengthened in uduvaroc, aKufj-aror, drrap-

dfivdog, namely, in order to allow of such forms being introduced into

the verse. Compare Blomlield, ad ^sch. Pers. 81;and Burney, ibid.

2. From Eâ?uv6G). Compare Elmsley, ad Eurlp. Heracl. 404. Theform kâ7uC,(j would make tâ/uaa^.

3. On the same principle with uptrrjg, verbal adjectives in to^ have

the short penult as coming from the third person singular of perfects pas-

sive with short penults in iraL or vrat; thus, dupcTOQ, from d and KEKpt-

rat; ukvTog, from d and T^tXvTai, &c.

4. 'AaiTOQ occurs in an epigram of Diogenes Laertius {Anthol. Pal.

7, 118, 2), but this is a late innovation.

5. So <^l-evu, (fl-vfia.On the contrary, ^vtevu, (pvTsvfia. This dis-

tinction was made by Bnmck, ad ApolL Rhod. 4, 807; Soph. Antig.

645. The conflictmg passages, as Eurip. Alcest. 306, 1 147; 0pp.

Cyn. 1, 4, are altered in the latest editions, partly with the consent of

MSS.




II. But penultimate v is long in the following cases :

Before a vowel.

1. In

'Evvcj,

Qvag, iyvvrj,

Txvot;.

With regard to verbs in vu), the safest rule is to re-

gard the penult of the present and imperfect as com-

mon.' Some, however, occur more frequently with

the long penult ; as, laxvio, daKpvcJ, ^v(t), diuo), XvcJ.^

Others, again, are oftener found with the penult short,

of which the following is a list.'&

Ppvd),

dpv(t),

dprvd),

dvvo),

d(pv(x),

detKVVG),

KVO),

eXKVG),

epvG),

fiedvo),

ttXtjOvO),

kXvo).

And so, likewise, all others besides kXv(o and decKVvu),

which have alsovfit

in the present.

Before a consonant.

1. Before /3in v[i6g.

1. The question is ably discussed by Spitzner, Gr. Pros. p. 91, seq.,

and Malthy, Lex. Pros. c. vi., p. Ixiii., 2d ed.

2. Still it must be borne in mind, that derivatives from the perfect

passivehave the v short

; as, Tivaig, Xvtoq, &c. With regard to the

verbs quoted here as having thelong penult, it may be observed, that

Homer sometimes makes it d-vu, though generally i?()w. In Attic Greek

Brunck considers the penultto

be always long. Yet all the derivativeshave short v except ^v/ia ; as, -QvTr'jp, -dvaia, ^vuS/ig, d-vaLfxo^. So,

again,Tmu sometimes occurs in Homer, but Avoi in Attic. Another

verb, not cited above, kuTmu, has the penult long in tragedy, but some-

times short in comedy. And yet the future is always Ku'kvau. Sand-

ford, Gr. Pros. p. 346, in notis.




2.




as, -dviia, KVfxa, Xvfia, dprvna, ixrjvvna, i6pv{ia, Sic.

Except, however, epi)jita, 7rXv[j,a, pv[j,a,

"a river"^

&c.,

which are invariably short.

In &vii6g,"

animus,^'' and its compounds, adv[j,og, pddv-

[iog,&c. But Svpôg,

"thymus,''

has the penult short.

In the first person present indicative active of all verbs

invjxt ; as, deUvvfit, êvyvviii, &c. But the v is short

in the passive and middle of the same part ; as,deiK-

vviâL, êvyvvfj.ac.

In the plural cases of the pronoun ov; as, vfielg, y/iwv,

vfilv, vj^dg.


drpv^cdv,

AlavfiT],

pyfiT],

dtppvfiog,

dpviJiog,

KaTddpvfxa,

Kpyfiog,

il>vjj,og,

Kdrrvna,

Xv[iif],

EyKV[l(j)V,

eXvfia.

8. Before v in the present of verbs in vvo); as, evdvva,

oTpvvcj, ttXvvcj, &c.;but when they terminate in ew

the V is short; as, TrXvvio), &c.


rvvTj,

ALKTVVa,svdvvog,

Kivdvvog^

opKvvog,

jSodvvog,

^vvog,

ajxvva,

KOpVVT],^

ropvvTj,

X^Xvvrj,

aiaxvvT],

p,VV7],

Btdvvov.

1. But ^vfia,"draught," "protection." Herm. Orph. Hymn. 10, 22.

2. But 'AkIv6vvoc, as a proper name, is shortened. Anth. Pal. xi.,

429.

3. As a general rule, it may be said that trisyllablesin vvi] have

the long quantity.Yet there are exceptions. Draco himself, who

gives the general rule, quotes Kopvvri, rafivvr),and Topvvn as shorten-

ed in the epic and lengthened in the Attic writers. Kopvvri, however,

already fluctuates in the epic ; thus, short in Homer, B. 7, 143; Apoll,



34 DOUBTFUL VOWEL IN THE PENULT,

9. Before tt in Xvttt], ypvnog, ravvirovg, and in the ob-

lique cases of yvip, vnog, and ypvijj, vnog.

10. Before p in all verbs in vpo) ; as, 0vpa), ovpoj, ddvpco,

Kvpd), [ivpod,&c.

;but when they terminate in ew the

V is short; as, Kvpeo), fiaprvpeu), rropcpvpeui.


ajKvpa,^

yi^vpa,

Kivvpa,

?idcl)vpa,

bXvpa,

Kep/cvpa.^

KoXXvpa,

Gfpvpa,^

Kvpog,

ovoyvpoq,

Txvpoq, ''wheat''' (but

TTvpog, from Trvp),

rvpng,^^cheese" (but

Tvpog, " Tj/re"),

TTanvpog,

yvpog,

oii^vpog^

iaxvpog,

TTtTVpOV,*

XeiTvpov,

7TX7]p,fivpig,^

avpiy^,

ovpc^o),

Xepi^vpng.

1 1 . Before o it is almost always long ; as, Aiovvoog,

Xpi'oog, "Kpxppvaog, Kafidvorjg, &c. Except verbals

in vaig ; as, Xvoig, avvaig, Sic.

Jthod. 2, 99, 115;

Thcocril. Id. 7, 9 : 9, 23;and long in Theocrit. Id.

25, 63;Ntcand. Alex. 409

;Leomd. Tarent. Epigr. 34, 3. Notwith-

etanding, however, that the long quantity in vvtj predominates with the

Attics, it is remarkable, as Draco observes, that Eupolis has always

shortened ropvvr]. But bdvvi], as sprung from a short root, is always

short in the middle syllable,and so its derivatives

; as, i'Kudvvoz, nept-

(idwof, &c. Spilzner, Gr. Pros. p. 122.

1. The rule appears lo be, that the proparoxytones in vpa of the fem-

inine gender have the v long.On the other hand, paroxytones in vpa

are mostly short; as, nopfvpa {v), <j>Mpa {v), &,c. Except KoXlvpa

iy) mentioned above.

2. Most dissyllables, however, in vpa have the penult short; as, Ivpa,

&vpa, together with their derivatives; as, dvpaloQ, XvpiKOC, &c.

3. Always long in Homer and the epic writers, but always short amongthe Attics.

Mallby,ad verb.

4. Neuters m vpnv, derived from liquid verbs or other long roots,

have the v long ;but those not so derived have the penult short

; as,

uxvpov, evtxvpov.

5. We haven/i^/xfivpic in Homer, Od. 9, 486, and so, also, ApoU.

Rhod. 4, 1269. But Blomfield (G/oss. ad Choeph. 180) supposes both

these passages to stand in need of correction, and Knight actually re-

jects the former. Sandford, Gr. Pros. p.348. Compare Spitzner,

Gr. Pros. p.123.




12. Before r in derivatives in vrrjp, vrrjg, and VTt^ ; as,

[iTjvvTTip, iiTjvvrrjg, 7Tpea6vT'fjg, 7Tpeo6vTig.^

In adjectivesin vTog, derived from long verbal roots in

vu); as, ddaKpvTog, TToXvdaKpvrog, aXirpvrog, arpv-

rog, &c.

In trisyllablesin vrog, which lengthen the preceding

syllable ; as, Bi^pvrog, yutpvTog, Kwkvto^, «fec. But

names derived fromadjectives

in

vghave the short

penult ; as, Kl-nvrog, YiVpyTog.


pvroip,

pvTrj,

pvTog,

aicvTog,

13. Before in

Kv(ji6g,^

KV(pO)V,

arvcpog,

14. Before % in verbs in v%w ; as, (3pvx(o, Tpvx(>ifand

their compounds ;but v in jBpvxtog is short.


OKvrevg,

(3pVT0V,

ycopvTog, and sometimes

XvTG)p.^

Tvcl)og,

TvicpCJ,

ovcpap,

KeXvcpog.

ipvxr],

ipvxog,

tiiipvxog,

Karaipvx(^-

But TTapail}vx'>], being derived from a second aorist, has

its penult short*

1. Yet &VTTJP has the short penult. In like manner, nouns in vtt]^,

from adjectivesin vf, ela, v, are short

; as, (3pa6vTric, oivrrj^, TaxvTjjg.

2. This long penult in Ivrup is extremely doubtful. The verse quo-

ted in

support

of it from the Anthology {Lcomd. Alex. Ep. 29, 4.—An-

thol. Pal. ix., 359) has now ()VTopa, which also stands in the Palatine

MS. Hence IvTT/pioc, besides the usual XvrfjpLOC, will also admit of

great doubt. SpUzncr, Gr. Pros. p.161.

3. But upyvipo^, Koaovfog, &c., have the v short.

4. Porson, ad Eurip. Orest. 62. On the same principlewe have

6taTpl6^ with the short penult, although the verb is SiaTplSu, because it

is derived from the second aorist durpiSov.



36 DOUBTFUL VOWEL BEFORE THE PENULT.

VIII.

Of the Doubtful Voioelsbefore the Penultimate.

I. Of a before the penultimate.

I. A before the penult is generally short; as, deiKrjg,

ddoXog, PdaiXevg.

II. But a before the penult is long in the following cases :

A privative.

Aprivative, though naturally short, may be lengthened

when three short syllables follow ; as, dddvaTog, dKa-

fiarog, diroXeiiog,&c.'

A before a vowel.

1. In

aevaog.



DOUBTFUL VOWEL BEFORE THE PENULT. 37

it is generally a dissyllable ;or else, when a

trisylla-

ble, has the a short.'

Before a consonant.

1. Before y in

vavdyeiii,

vavdyiov,Iddysvrjg,

2. Before 6 in

avdddia, as in

avddSrjg,

pddtog,

ddoXeaxfjg,

3. Before & in pddvuog.

4. Before k in

SidKovog,

XdKEi,}^

&dK^(t),

oldKoarpocpog,(pevdKi^d),

cjpdictdo),

5. Before A in

dXi^G),

(bdXaivT],

IdXejiog,

e6SofidyETrjg,

Evdyopia,

Q7]6dyevrjg,Kpdyiri]g.

ddoXeoxLa,

dddov, from 6atg,

iKETddoKog,

KapddoKect).

^VpdKOOLOL,

l3XdKLKu)g, from j3Xd^,

-dicog,

rpidKovra,didfcooioi,

rpidiioaLot,^ Sic,

dKovaiog.

dXi6ag,

dvdX6(o,avdXioKOi,

1. In Euripides, Hec. 31, we have ataaw where Pierson {ad Mocr. p.

301) would read avainau. But consult Person, ad loc.

2. The participle diaXaKijaaaa lengthens the third syllable in Aris-

tophanes, Nub. 409. The subjunctive \aKi]ai)q shortens the first in an-

other comedv of the same author. Pax. 381. {Elmsleij, ad Eurip.

Med. 147.)

"

3. So, also, in the compounds ; as, TpLuKOVTai^vyo^. (Thcocrit. Id.

13, 74.) In the hundreds, the only ones with long a are dtdKoatot and

TpiaKoaioi, the others having the syllable short; as, TeaTapuKoaioi, tcev-

TuKomoi, &.C. So, also, TeaGepuKovra. {Horn. II. 2, 524, 534.) The

remaining tens have ?; ; as, TrcvTr'iKnvTa, t^r'/Kovra, &c. Later authors,

however, said also -puiKovTa, according lo tlie analogy of other numer-

als. Jacobs, ad Anth. Pal. 617, 705, 806.—Spiizner, Gr. Pros.p.

67.

D

n



38 DOUBTFUL VOWEL BEFORE THE PENULT,

KodXefiog,

dXoavvT],

6. Beforeft

in

dfido),^

dfiTjTog,

dixrjTdg,

7. Before v in

Kpdviov,

TLTdvtog,

vedviag,

Evdv£[j,og,

evdvopia,

dyopdvojiog,

OKtfidXi^()>,

1.Tvii(pdXi6eq.

'Aficoog,

'ATrafXEia^

^tXovdnaTog.

Kardvofiat,

Kpedvofiog,

Xvoodvcog,

ovvdpdvoo),

TTaidvtKog,

TzaLdvl^Ci).

8. Before n in dpdTrerrjg, vdrreXa, dnvo)

9. Before p in

dpdofiai, Homeric,'^

dprjrrjp,

KdpLCOV,

Adpioaa,

Kdpa6og,

dfidpaKog,

10. Before o in

'Aoionog,

ETrapdaifLog,

evKpdaia,

Kopdat-ov,

(pXvdpeo),

dpLOTOV,

dpiardo),

ddpeiKog,

dedptoi',

Xdptvog.

Kdadvdpa,

"Aaidog,'^

irdoaodat, "possidere,

Jldaicpd^].

"4

1. According to Maltby, afiuu, in the active voice, and the nouns

derived from this verb, such asu/xrjr/ip, ufXTinjg,

andu/j.7jt6c, have the a

long in Homer and Hesiod. On the other hand, ufiuojuat.in the middle

voice, and the compound forms hivafiijaaTO, Karafif/aaTo, as well as the

formdiufi7]os

in the active, have the a short. In later epic writers it is

common.

2. But in Attic updofxac, contr. upcj/iai.

3. So 'AouldTjc, with the long initial vowel. We have also 'AtTiOf,"Asian," with the long vowel, and liffior,

"slimy,'"

with the a short.

The long quantity, however, in the former, and in other words of the

kind, cannot be determined with perfect certainty,since the length may

be occasioned by the arsis. Hermann, H. H. in Apoll. 250.

4. But nuaaadai,"vesci," has the first

syllableshoit. Blomfield,

Gloss, ad uEsch. Agam. 1380.




11. Before r in

Iliadrtdag,

^ideuTtdog,

dcSv^droKog,

ddrepov,

And in words compounded of Xdag," a stone ;" as, Aa-

rofiCa, XdTOfioi, Xdrvrcog, Sic.

12. Before in oeipdcpopog.

13. Before

%in

rpaxovpog,

pdxia,

aKpa^oXog,

pvaxerog,

dxsrag, Doric for

II. Oft beforethe Penultimate.

I. I before the penult is generally short ; as, Upiafiog,

Imeifiivog, iKOfxat,&c.

II. But L before the penult is long in the following cases :




UlepLa,

niepiogniepideg,

ppax'tovog,

TTLatVU),

<^dlu)Ttg,

EvdplovoOai,

dvldo),^

A\]^in the compounds of log,

"aji arrow ;" as, lolSoXog,

loxsaipa. But those from lov,"a violet" have it short

;

as, loecdrjg, loOTEcpavog.

Before a consonant.

1. Before /3 in icXl6avog, Kpl6avog, and Kl6(i)T6g.

2. Before y almost always




ttIXeo),




10. Before p almost always ; as, l,snlpa[j,ig,«fec.

11. Before a in

KovlaaXog,

filaeo),

<pdiO7']V0)p,

alav^dpLov,

Tlat(p6vr},

Xaplawg,

'A(ppodlaiog,

And in compounds and derivatives from caog ; as, ladv-

Spog, laodeog?

12. Before t in

TcTvpog,

TpZTO)vcg,

13. Before in dlcpdoj, dlcprjTOjp, al(p(jjvc^0).

14. Before x i^

Kix(^pa,

Ktx(^psov,

oiJ,iX£(^,

raplxe.v(>).

III. Of V before the penultimate.

I. T before the penult is generally short; as, 'AarvoxTj,

apyvpeog, &c.

II. But V before the penult is long in the following cases:

Before a vowel.

In

'EvvdXiog,

Kvdveog,^

liveXog^

[ivovpog,

JEsch. Prom. v. 529. On the other hand, Tuivog,^^

fat,''^ though con-

sidered as long by some grammarians, is probably always short.

1. The measure 'Llav^o^, formerly in Theognis, v. 522, has been al-

tered by Jortin, Dissert, vi., p. 229, and Person, Advers.p. 313. The

Modena MS., collated by Bekker, verifies the proposed change.2. Consult note 1, page 30.

3. Hence, also, iTeivoc, Theocrit. Id. 16, 79. But "Ituv, II. 2, 696,and 'Ircjvi'f, a surname of Minerva, Apoll. Rhod. 1, 551, fluctuate.

4. Consult note 5, page 30.

5. But the first syllable is sometimes short in Attic Greek. Com-

pare Blomfield^ ad Aisch. Pers. 83.

6. Long in Homer, short in the tragic writers. jEsch. Agam, 75.—Soph. Track. 783.—Eurip. Hippol. 255.




[xvodo^og,

Ttverir],

TT?iaTvd^(i},

vsTog,(Spsvdvonac.

Before a consonant.

1. Before (3 in 7)jutv6iov.

2. Before y in

fivyaXirj,

dpvyavdo),

Xvyalog,

(ppvyavov.

3. Before 6 in fivdaXiog, fivdaivo),and in the compounds

and derivatives of kv6oc; as, KvSdXifiog, Kvdifiog.,

&c.

4. Before t^ in epvOpido), epvdidu, and irapanvdionai,

with other compounds of p.vdog.

5. Before k in epvicaKso),and other compounds of kpvKO).

In the following:

[ivKdojxai, _

I KapvKOTTOioJ,

(pvKLoeig,

'

I Kr]pvKevo),

And other derivatives from icrjpv^, vKog.

6. Before A in

&vXaKog^

KoyxvXiov,

JlajicpvXLa,

OKvXojJbaL,

OKvXevd),

ovXdo),

GvXevG),

vXatog,

(l)vXomgy

livXi,d(ji.

7. Beforep,

in

vperepog, Xvfieuv,

Kvpalvo), pvpoG),

Xvpalvo), TTsnvviievog,

And in compounds and derivatives from -Bvp^og ; as,

dvpcJ67]g, -dvpTjprjg, &vp6opat, &,c.

1. Long in Homer, short in Attic. Aristoph. Pax. 843.—A)ith. Pal.

vii., 166, 3.

2. In Homer, II. 5, 749, fivKovis the second aorist.

3. But &vAdKiov seems to have the first syllablesometimes short.

Maltby, ad verb.




8. Before tt in

Xvirid),

Tpvndui,

9. Before p in

yvpocj,

KVpOG),

(pvpdct),

Kvptog,

Kvpofiai,

aKVpCOTOC,

Kivvpofiai,

odvpofxai,

KapTvpo[j,ai,

Tpvnavov,KVTTOO).

Iiivvpofxai,

(Mvpcog,

fj-vptoi,

Mvpaiva,

TTvpafiig,

TTvpiixog,

TrXrjiinvpLa,

TrXrjiiixvpEOJ,

KvprjvT].^

10. Before g is generally long ; as in (pvado, and some

compounds of Avw; as, Xvomovog, XvGcp^eX'^g, &c.

In the following :



PART II.

M E T E E.



^/

METRE.

I. Metre, in its general sense, means an arrangement

of syllables and feet in verse, according to certain rules ;

and, in this sense, it applies not only to an entire verse, but

to a part of a verse, or any number of verses.

II. But a metre, in a specific sense, means a combination

of two feet,and sometimes one foot

only.III. There are nine principal metres: 1. Iambic. 2.

Trochaic. 3. Anapaestic. 4. Dactylic. 5. Choriambic.

6. Antispastic. 7. Ionic k Majore. 8. Ionic k Minore.

9. Paeonic.

IV. These names are derived from the feet which pre-

vail in them. Each species of verse would seem originally

to have been composed of those feet solely from which it

derives it name;and other feet, equal in time, were not ad-

mitted until afterward, and then only under certain restric-

tions.

*V. It must be carefully noted, that twofeet make a metre

in the iambic, trochaic, and anapaestic measures, but that

one foot constitutes a metre in all the rest.

VI. When a verse consists of one metre, it is called mo-

nometer ; when it has two metres, dimeter ; three metres,

trimeter; four metres, tetrameter ; five meXxe^, pentameter ,

six metres, hexameter;seven metres, heptameter, &c.

VII. From what has just been remarked, it follows that,

in iambic, trochaic, and anapaestic verse, a monometer con-

sists of two feet;a dimeter oifour ; a trimeter of six, &c.

;

whereas, in all the other kinds of verse, a monometer con-

sists of one foot, a dimeter of two, a trimeter of three, &c.



48 METRE.

VIII. Verses are also denominated Acatalectic, Catalec-

tic, Brachycatalectic,and

Hypercatalectic.IX. An acatalectic verse is one that is complete in all its

parts, and comes to a full termination;as the following,

which is iambic trimeter acatalectic :'

X. A catalectic^ verse is one that wants a syllable at the

end to complete the measure;as the following, which is

iambic trimeter catalectic :

XI. A brachycatalectic^ verse is one that wants two syl-

lables at the end to complete the measure;as the follow-

ing, which is iambic trimeter brachycatalectic :

XII. Ahypercatalectic^ verse is one that has a syllable at

the end beyond the complete measure;as the following,

which is iambic trimeter hypercatalectic :

"r-'ir-r-ir-r-rXIII. There is also what is called an Acephalous^ verse,

when a syllable is wanting at the beginning ;as the fol-

lowing, which is acephalous iambic trimeter :

XIV. Verses arc also denominated Asynartete (davvdp-

TTjrot),when different measures are conjoined into one line

1. Acatalectic, from uKaTaT^TjKTLKoc (i. and KaTa2,r/yu), i. e., not hav-

ing an abrupt termination. Compare Hcphcestion, c . 4, p. 24, ed. Gais-

ford. 'AKardTiriKTa Kalelrai /XETpa,baa tov re'XevTaiov Tzoda oXoKXripov

eXî-

2. Heph(Bstion, I.e. Kara'XTjKriKa 6e, ocra fie/ietunevov exec tov t€-

TievTolov n66a. The term is derived fromnaTaTJjyu,

and denotes verses

that stop before they reach their full ending.3. Hcphastion, 1. c. BpaxvKara?,TiKTu Se KaTÊlrat,, oca and Sltto-

diar enl teaov( oAu noStfjit/iEiurai.

4. HephcBstion, 1. c. 'TTicpKaraXTiKTa de, ocra npbc rijiTe'êio) irpo-

cekade [j.fpor TrotJo^-. Some call it Hyperacatalectic, VTzepanaTaTlriKTOC,

i. e., going beyond acatalectic.

5. Acephalous, from a andKsâTirj,

i. e., wanting a head.



OF FEET. 49

at the pleasure of the poet ;and they are so called because

the union between the two measures is

comparatively

slight, the hiatus and doubtful syllable being admitted;as

in Horace, Epode 13.

Fervidiora mero*|

arcana promorat loco.

Levare duris pectora* |

sollicitudinibus.

OF FEET.I. A foot in metre is composed of two or more syllables,

and is either simple or compound.

II. Of the simple feet, four are of two, and eight of three

syllables. The compound feet are sixteen in number, each

of four syllables.

Simple Feet.

Pyrrhichius



50 OF ISOCHRONOUS FEET.

Paeon tertius

"

quartus

Epitritus primus" secundus

"tertius

"quartus

Proceleusmaticus

Dispondaeus

Diiambus

Ditrochaeus

Bsoyevrig.

dv6po(p6vTr]g.

Evpvadevriq.

Xo)j3'r]T7jpa.

TToXefiLog.

ovvdovXevao).^ — •~- —

emaraTrjg.— -^

6vaTvx'>][J'Ci'.

III. To these add the Dochmius, which consists of an

antispast and a long syllable ("-" """"); so that a simple

dochmiac is the same as an antispastic monometer hyper-

catalectic : dscbvfj

i^eav.'

IV. The conjunction of two feet is termed a dipodia or

syzygy. Most usually, however, the combination of two

dissyllabic feet is called a dipodia, and that of twotrisylla-

bic, or a dissyllabic and trisyllabic, a syzygy. The con-

junction of two feet is often likewise termed a base.

OF ISOCHRONOUS FEET.

I. By isochronous feet are meant those which are inter-

changeable in metre.

II. In order to ascertain what feet are thus interchange-

able, recourse must be had to the arsis and thesis.

III. That part "of a foot which receives the Ictus, the

stress of the voice, or beat of the time, is called arsis or el-

evation. The rest of the foot is termed thesis, or depres-

sion.

IV. The natural place of the arsis is the long syllable

of the foot, and hence, in the iambus, it falls on the second

syllable,in the trochee on the first, while the spondee and

tribrach leave its place alike uncertain.

1. Etym. Mag. p. 285, 25, s. v. Aox/aaKoc. Scidler, de Vers.

Dochm.p. 402, seq.



ISOCHRONOUS FEET. 51

V. The fundamental foot of a verse, however, determines

the arsis for the other feet;and hence the

spondee,in iam-

bic and anapaestic verse, has the arsis on the second sylla-

ble, but in trochaic and dactylic on the first.

VI. So, again, the tribrach, when it stands for the iam-

bus, is to be pronounced^ ^ —

,when it stands for the tro-

chee -^ ---.

VII. Now the ancients considered those feet only as iso-

chronous which were capable of being divided into parts

that were equal in time;so that a long syllable should have

either a correspondent long syllable,or two short ones.'

VIII. The following scheme will exemplify this more

clearly, the place of the arsis being denoted as above (VI.)

by the acute accent.

Iambus

Tribrach

Dactyl

Spondee

Trochee—

Tribrach- ""

Anapaest-" '-'

Spondee~~

IX. By this we perceive that the iambus and trochee are

each interchangeable with the tribrach;and that the dac-

tyl, spondee, and anapaest are interchangeable with each

other.

X. In like manner it will appear that the iambus and

trochee are not interchangeable, and that an iambus never

admits a trochee into iambic verse, nor a trochee an iam-

bus into trochaic verse. Thus,

Iambus "^

Trochee—

The long syllable of the iambus has neither a corre-

spondent long syllable

in the trochee, nor two short ones.

And the case is the same with the long syllable of the tro-

chee. Hence the two feet are not interchangeable or iso-

chronous.'^

1. Dawes, Miscellanea Critica, p.62.—

p. 103, ed. Kidd.

2. For this reason the schoUast on He haestion (p. 76, ed Gaisf.) calls



52 IAMBIC VERSE.

XI. Again, it may be shown, in the same Avay, that the

spondee and amphibrach are also not interchangeable.

Thus,

Spondee

Amphibrach^ -

Here, in whatsoever way the amphibrach be divided,

each division contains either more or less than the corre-

spondent part of the spondee. Hence the two feet are not

isochronous. And, for the same reason, the amphibrach is

not isochronous with the dactyl or anapaest.'

OF THE DIFFERENT KINDS OF VERSE.

I. Of Iambic Verse.

I. Iambic verse derives its name from the foot which

prevails in it, namely, the iambus.

II. At first the iambus was the only foot allowed to enter

into this measure; but, by degrees, an intermixture of other

feet was permitted, under certain restrictions.

III. When a verse consists entirely of iambi, it is called

a pure iambic verse;when other feet are introduced and

intermingled with the iambus, it is denominated a mixed

iambic.

IV. The reason why other feet besides the iambus were

allowed to enter appears to have been, not only to lessen

the iambic and trochaic measures uvTiTradovvra /lerpa,and Tricha {de

Metris, p. 9, ed. Hcrm.) remarks, uvTiTradijc xal oiov vnEvavrio^ tu)

ld/i6(f}6 Tpoxa^oc. Compare the language of Dawes (Misc. Crit.

p. 103,

cd. Kidd.)" Mihi pcrsuasum est illos duniaxat pedes a veteribus tan-

quam laoxpovovg haberi solUos, qui in singulas ilidcm partes temporihus

tzquales seeari possent, ita scilicet ut singulis longis vcl singula: itidem

longcB, vcl certe bincB breves responderent .... Percipis jam ra-

tionem decantati illius, 6 rpojarof uvrnvadsl rw IdfiGu,sive ob quam in

versu trochaico iambus, in iambico vicissim trochcEus nusquam locum

habeat."

1. Compare Dawes, 1. c." Hinc etiam ratio elucescit, cur amphibra-

chym spondcEO, adeoqve dactylo et anapcEslo, pariter dvTLiradElv videre

sit ;sive cur pes iste in versa neque anapcestico, neque trochaico, nee dc-

niquc iambico conspiciatur."

•



54 IAMBIC VERSE.

3. Dimeter Acatalectic,

Scale.

1



IAMBIC VERSE. 55

V. It must be borne in mind, accordingly, that the final

syllable

in dimeter iambics, as well as in dimeter trochaics

and anapaestics, is not common, but that the verses run on

by synapheia until the system is concluded by a catalectic

line. The following, from Aristophanes, will serve to il-

lustrate this point more clearly :'

rig rfiv | Ke(pdXfiv 1| dnedi] \

66k.Iv||

Trji; fiat [vlSog ; ||

ro rpv^X |

lov||

ro TTepv I

GLvovII TedvfiK,

i

eiiol- ||

TTOv TOI Gh'opoSov || fiol

TO\\;0e(Ta'oj^ II

Tig TTig I eXddg || irdperp|dyev \\

Tso)gI6'd(3eX,T || epd) \ Tepol. ||

Kexi]IvoTeg \\

Mdfifid\kvOol, \\

MeA^ I

Tidal|| Kddfiv \

to.— |1"

Here the last syllables in the first, second, fourth, and

fifth lines, are respectively lengthened by position, through

the influence of the synapheia, and the last line of the sys-

tem is a dimeter catalectic.

4. Dimeter Catalectic.

dXdOTI opog || Tig ol^

[vg. ||

5. Dimeter Brachycatalectic.

TEKVcbv I e[io)v II <pvXd^. \ ||

6. Dimeter Hypercatalectic.

yvval Iicog dvT ||

lol\

OTddevT|| eg.

1. Elmsley, 1. c.—Brunch, ad Arist. Ran. 984.—Dawes, Misc. Crit.

p. 58, ed Gaisf.—

Dunbar, Gr. Pros.p. 43.

2. Ran. 984, seq.



56 IAMBIC VERSE.

7. Trimeter Acatalectic, or Senarius.

Scale.

1



58 IAMBIC TRIMETER.^

a ycj ducatcovju?) nap' dyysXcov, reicva, ?

,/. «

aXXcov aKoveiv, avrbg cjd' sXrjXvda. )

''

'

V. Sometimes, however, one verse, with its final vowel

elided, passes by scansion into the next, but only when a

long syllable precedes ;' as,

Gol (paalv avTov eg Xoyovg iXOslv fMoXovr'

alreiv,aTte?^.6elv r'

dacpaXojg rrjg devp'bdov.

(CEd. Col. 1164, 5.)

VI. The admissibility of the tribrach into an iambic line

arises from the circumstance of its being an isochronous

foot;

its exclusion from the last place in the trimeter turns

upon a principle of rhythm ;since a

tragic trimeter, with

such a concluding cadence, would be anything else but grave

and dignified.

VII. The introduction of the spondee into an iambic line

was owing to the wish of imparting to the verse a greater

degree of weight and dignity,"^as well as of interrupting the

monotonous cadence which a succession of iambi would

have produced.

VIII. The admission of the spondee opened the door, of

course, for the other feet that were isochronous with it, and

in this way the dactyl and anapaest were each allowed to

come in.

IX. The reason

whythe iambus was retained in the

even places appears to have been this : that, by placing the

spondee first and making the iambus to follow, greater em-

phasis was given to the corresponding syllable of each

metre'' on which the ictus and pause took place, than

1. Porson, ad, Med. 510.—Hermann, Ekm. Doctr. Metr.p. 23, seq.

—Tate, Introd. p.3.

2. Hvrat. Ep. ad Pis. 255.

3. By inclrc is here meant a dipodia or conjunctionof two feet, of

which there are three in the trimeter. In reciting iambic verses it was

usual to make aslight pause at the termination of every second foot,

with an emphasis on its final syllable. Thus, Terentianus Maurus {dc

Mdr. 2193, seg., p. 101, cd Lennep.), speaking of the trimeter, says,

" Sed ler fcritur : hinc trimctrus dicilur,

Scandeyido hinos quod pedes conjungimus."



IAMBIC TRIMETER 59

would have been the case had two long syllables stood to-

gether.

X. With regard to the use of the tribrach in the tragic

trimeter, the following particulars must be noted : 1. That,

though admissible into all places of the verse except the

last, yet it is very rarely found in the fifth place. 2. That

the second syllable of a tribrach(as of a dactyl) must not

be a monosyllable incapable of beginning a verse, or the

lastsyllable of a word. 3. That the preposition eg must

not form the second syllable of a tribrach.'

XI. On the use of the dactyl in this same measure the

following must be noted : 1. The dactyl, though admissible

into both the first and third places, is more common in the

third than the first place of the verse. 2. A dactyl is whol-

ly inadmissible into the fifth place.^

3. The first syllable

of a dactyl in the third place should be either the last of a

word, or a monosyllable, except in the case of proper

names.'' 4. The second syllable of adactyl in either

place should not be either a monosyllable incapable of be-

ginning a verse (as dv, yap, 6e, nev, re, &c.), or the last

syllable of a word."* 5. The preposition kg must not be the

second syllable of a dactyl in either place.

XII. On the use of the initial anapasst in the tragic trim-

eter, observe as follows : The anapaest admissible into

And again, v. 251, scq.

" Secundo iamhum nos vccessc est reddere,

Qui sedis hujus jura semper ohtinet,

Scandendo et dlic ponere assuetam moram,

Quam pollicis sonure, vcl plausu pedis,

Discriminarc, qui docent arlem, solent.'''

The cJESural pause, however, in thetragic trimeter, was the control-

ling melody, and the marking of the metres was always made in sub-

servience to this. Compare the remarks of Dawes, Misc. Crit.p. 361,

ed. Kidd.

1. Sandford's Greek Prosody, p. 280, seq.

2. Porson, Praf. ad Her..

3. Dunbar, Gr. Pros. p.51.

4. This canon is occasionally violated by thetragic poets, especially

in the tirst place of the verbe. Elmsley, ad Eurip. Bacch. 285.



60 IAMBIC TRIMETER.

the first place is generally included in the same word.

The only exceptions are where the line begins either with

an article, or with a preposition followed immediately by

its case;as in Philoct. 754, Tbv iaov xpovov. Eur. Orest.

888, 'ETTt ~(l)de S'l-jyopevov. Iph. A. 502, Hap' ifioi.^

XII. The anapaest in proper names is allowed, in order

to bring into the tragic trimeter certain names of persons

that would otherwise beunable

to enter.^

And,in order to

soften down this license, it is probable that proper names

so introduced were pronounced with a hurried utterance,

so as to carry only--' — to the ear.'

XIV. A few instances occur where the proper name be-

gins with an anapaest ; as, MeveAaof, Upidnov, Sic. Elm-

sley considers all such cases as corrupt, but Porson's judg-

ment seems to lean the other way.''

XV. With regard to the use of resolved ortrisyllabic

feet, it is to be observed, 1. That more than two should

not be admitted into the same verse.* 2. That trisyllabic

feet should not concur.*'

XVI. Enclitics, when so used, and other words incapa-

ble of beginning a sentence, are incapable of beginning a

senarian.'

XVII. The verb earl or earlv is very rarely found in

the beginning of a senarian, except it is the beginning of a

1. Monk, ad Soph. Electr. 4. {Mus. Crit. vol.i., p. 63.)

2. Elmshy, in Ed. Rev., Nov., 1811.

3. Tate, In/rod., p. 36, seg. Dr. Clarke is entitled to the merit of

having discovered this principle. Long proper names are, from their

very nature, liable to be rapidly spoken, and thus 'AvTiyov?}, NovtvtS-

2,Efj.oc, '[((iLybVEia, &c., might bo easily slurred into something like Avt'-

jovrj, NovTrr'/LEiUOf, \<l>'yEVEia,&c. The ear, of course, would find no

cause of oifence, and the eye take no cognizance of the matter.( Clarke,

ad11.

2, 811.— Ta/c,1.

c.)4. Elmsley, m Ed. Rev. 1. c.—Porson, Suppl. Prczf. ad Hec.

5. Cla.ts. Journ. No. 64, p.309.

6. This rule is sometimes violated by the tragic poets. Consult Sand-

ford,Gr. Pros.

p. 282, seq. in nolis.

7. Elmsley, ad Soph. Aj. 985. {Mus. Crit. vol. i., p. 367.) Id. ad

Soj>k.(Ed. T. 1084.



IAMBIC TRIMETER. 61

sentence also, or some pause, at least, in the sense has

preceded.'XVIII. Some Doric forms are retained in the tragic dia-

lect; thus, always, 'Addva, dapog, eKart, Kvvayog, -noda-

yog, Ao%ay6c, ^evayog, OTradog. To these, mentioned by

Porson,* may be added the following, as given by Monk :*

apape, -daKog, and compounds, yd-rrovog, yaTreTTjg, ydnedov,

ydjxopog, ydnorog, ydrofiog, Kdpavov,and its

compounds.XIX. Forms of Ionic (epic) Greek are also found in the

tragic dialect; as, ^elvog, [Movvog, nelvog, Tco?^?i6g* &c.

XX. The augment is never omitted by the tragic writers

except in the case of XP^'^ for e%p?/v.As to avoyya, this

preterithas no augment in Attic, although the pluperfect

has. {CEd. Col. 1598.) In like manner, the tragic writers

do not prefixthe augment to KaO£^6iJ,7]v, Kadrji-iTjv, tcadevdov,

though the comic writers sometimes give it. A double

augment is occasionally allowed in tragedy, as in 7]veax6-

[XTjv {avto%6\i,'qv being likewise found)."

Of the C(BSura in the Tragic Trimeter.^

I. One of the greatestbeauties in a tragic trimeter is the

cEEsura.

II. The tragictrimeter has two principal caesuras, one

on the penthemimeris,or fifth half foot

; as,

Ktvdvvog e(7%e |

dope

TTEoelv'F,XX7]vi,k,(I),

and the other on the hephthemimeris, or seventh half foot;

as,

IIo/lAcov Adycjv evprmaO' \

uotsjur)

&avelv.

III. A line is esteemed deficient in harmony, and not

perfect,which is without the ceesura. Many lines have

1. Elmslcy, ad Eurip. Heracl. 386.

2. Forson, ad Eunp. Orest. 26.

3. Ad Eur. HtppoL 1093.

4. Sajidford, Gr. Pros. p. 286, seq.

f). Porson, Snppl. ad Prtrf. ad Hcc.p. ;vvi.

G. Porson, Suppl. ad Prcef. ad Hcc. p.xxiv.



62 IAMBIC TRIMETER.

both; but the penthemimeral is more frequent than the

hephthemimeral in the proportion of four to one.

IV. The caesura is allowed to fall on a monosyllable, ei-

ther with or without the elision, as well as on the lastsyl-

lable of a word. Thus,

Kai vvv Ti tovt' av| (paal Travdy/jUOJ ttoXsl.

Kal revêrai. rovS'|

ovd'a6(JJp7]Tog (ptXcjv.

'A/l/L' ov TToXig OTvyel, ov| rqirâeig Td(pu>.

"Orav yap ev(ppovfjg, rod'

[ i]yi]aeL av vu)v.

V. A verse, however, is not faulty which has what Por-

son terms the quasi-cxBsura ; that is, when after the third

foot there is an elision of a short vowel, either in the same

word or in such a word as 6s, p,£, oe, ye, re, attached to

it ;' thus,

KevTSiTE, fj,i] (j)eideo6\ [ tyto 'tekov Jldpiv.

TvvaL^l irapdevoig r'\drTodXeTTTog [lera.

VI. A verse sometimes occurs without either cassura or

quasi-caesura ; but the third and fourth feet are never com-

prehended in the same word.^

VII. There are two minor divisions of the verse, name-

ly,one which divides the second, and one which divides

the fifth foot; thus,

1. Elmsley ingeniously defends verses of this formation by a hypoth-

esis that the vowel causing the elision might be treated as appertaining

to the preceding word, and be so pronounced as to produce a kind of

hephthemimeral caesura. Elms, ad Aj. 1100. {Mus. Crit. vol.i., p.

477.) Tale, In/rod. p.6.

2. If..the third and fourth feet were comprehended in one and the

same word, a most inelegant and inharmonious division of the line into

three equal parts would unnecessarily be the result. As in the following :

y Kupf up'av

I TiapeanoTCELg \ xpVÎJ-^^v sfiuv.

Compare the remark of Viclorinus (p. 2525),"pcssimus autem versus,

qui singula verba in dipodiis habet,

" Prasentium|

divinitas|

c<zlestmm."

Hermann seeks to limit this rule of Porson's by making the regulation

not absolute in its nature, but only highly ajiproved of by the tragic wri-

ters. Elcm. Doctr. Metr. p. 71, ed. Glaag.



IAMBIC TRIMETER. 63

1. To TTolovI

8V yap ixoXk' dv eêvpoi fj-adelv.

2.'Apx'fjv (ipaxslO'V

si

yiajSoiiiev|

^X-nidoq.

The former of these divisions, though not necessary, is

agreeable ;the latter constitutes what is called the Cretic

termination,^ and leads to the consideration of the

Porsonian Pause.

I. When the iambic trimeter has, after a word of more

than one syllable, the cretic termination (—— —

),êither

included in one word;as

KpvTTTOvra x^^P'^ '^^^ TrpocrwTrov ef-nrdXlv ;

or consisting<of— -^ and a syllable ; as,

Krj(5og ds rovfibv Kat abv ovKer' earZ 6rj.

Xalp', ov yap rjulviari rovro aol ye [i^v.

or of a monosyllable and ^ —•, as,

KaAwf juev elTrag, Bvyarep, aXXd tw KaXco.

then thefifth foot

must he an iambus.^

II.

Hencethe

followinglines are

faultyin metre :

"K-rXaq 6xO'^'^ôiai vcjTOig ovpavov (Eurip. Ion. 1) ;

Tofir) fidraLOV 6' tic

nercjirojv oaxppovuv {JEsch. Suppl.

206);

and are to be corrected as follows :*

1. Sandford, Gr. Pros.p.

290.

2. The cretic is only another name for the amphimacer.3. This is Porson's celebrated canon for the pause in

tragic trimeters,

given in the Supplement to his Preface to the Hecuba. Elmsley (Ed-inb. Rev. No. 37) gives the same rule in other words, but not so clearly." The first syllable of the fifth foot must be short, if it ends a word oftwo or more

syllables.^^ The reason why the tragic poets observed this

rule respecting the fifth foot of a senarius is sought to be explained as

follows by Hermann :

" Causa autem quare ista vocabulorum divisio

displicere debet, h<xc est. Quoniam in fine ciijusque versus, ubi, exhaus-tis jam propemodum pulmonibus, Icnior pronunciationis decursus desid-

eratur, asperiora omnia, quo diffieilius pronunciantur, eo magis etiam

aures ladunt : propterca sedu.lo evitatur ilia vocabulorum conditio, qu<B

ullimum versus ordincm longiore mora a prcEcedente disjungit, eaque re

decursum numcrorum impcdit ac retardat."

4. Porsoii, Suppl. ad Frmf. ad Hcc.p. xxxvi.—Elmsley, Edinb. Rev,

No. 37.



64 IAMBIC TRIMETER.

"ArXag 6 voyroig %aA«:t'oiaiv ovpavov.

To fii] ndratov 6' e/c neT(onoao)(pp6vo)v.

III. But when the second syllable of the fifth foot is a

monosyllable incapable of beginning a verse, such as dv,

av, yap, Se, fiev, ovv, together with all enclitics, used as

such, then the fifth foot may be a spondee ;' as,

Di) 6'

7]iuv 7] HLOovaa, fiioelg [lev Xoyco.

liTTSvdcjuev, eyfcoV(x)[iev rjyov fiol yepov.

IV. The particleav is of most frequent occurrence in

this position ;with respect to which, it must be observed

that it is in this case invariably subjoined to its verb, which

always suffers elision;as in the following line :^

El'fioi Xsyoig TTjv oiptv, e'lnoLii'

av tots.

V. The fifth foot must also be an iambus, although the

cretic termination comes after a monosyllable, when that

monosyllable is incapable of beginning a verse. Hence

the following line is wrong :

Tlvag Xoyovg epovatv, ev yap ru) [xadelv {CEd. Col. 115) ;

and we should read, with Elmsley,—ev 6e ~cb nadelv?

VI. Nor should ear', by elision for earl, form the first

syllable of the fifth foot.''

VII. Thus it appears that there are only three cases in

which the fifth foot may bea

spondee.

1 . (By far the most frequent) when both syllables of the

fifth foot are contained in the same word.

1. Porson, ibid.p.

xxxi. The words in the text, ''used as such,''''

refer to the circumstance of the pronouns col, fioi, fie,ce, &c., being

sometimes emphatic. Sandford, Gr. Pros.p.

291.

2.

Porson,ibid.

p.

xxxii.—Sandford,

Gr. Pros.p.

292.

3. Elm.iley, Edinb. Rev. No. 37. This extension of the Porsonian

canon, though proceeding from Elmsley, has not met with the universal

acquiescence of scholars. Compare Malthia, ad Eurip. Phaaniss. 403

(414), and Scholefidd, ad Pors. Eurip. p. 308. {Phaniss. 414.)

4. Elmsley, ad Eurip. Bacch. 240." His exccptis, nullum scnarium

apud tragicos existcre pulo, qui,in initio quinti pedis,

lav' vel iaf ha-

beat."



IAMBIC TRIMETER. 65

2. "When the first syllable of the fifth foot is a monosyl-

lable capable of beginning a verse, and not disjoined

from the following syllable by any pause in the sense.

3. When the second syllable of the fifth foot is a mono-

syllable incapable of beginning a verse.'

Of Elision and Aphceresis in the Iambic Trimeter.

I. In the iambic trimeter the short vowelse, o,

and the

doubtful a, I,are elided when the next word begins with a

vowel.

II. But the of TTpo is not elided, nor the i ofjrept ;

in

other words, the Attics never place rrpd or nepl before a

word beginning, with a vowel.^ In compounds npo is con-

tracted with e or o, as TrpovKecfieda, rrpovnTog, &;c.

III. The I of the dative plural, third declension, is never

elided by the Attic poets, that of the dative singular very

rarely j^

IV. The elision of e before the particle av is very rare.

There are ten instances in Attic poetry similar to sypaip' av,

for eypaipa av, for one similar to eypaij}' av, for eypa'^e av.^

1. Elmslcy, Edinb. Rev. No. 37. Some apparent exceptions to the

Porsonian canon are not real exceptions : thus, where ovSeir anduTideig,

so given, ought, in Attic orthography, to be written ov6' etc, andfiT/d'

eic ;and where, in the plays of Sophocles, tj/liiv, vfilv,

are exhibited as

spondees, with the last syllable long, whereas that poet employed these

pronouns thus, ijjmv vjiiv,with the last syllable short. Porson, Suppl.

Praf.p.

XXXV.—Elmsley, 1. c.— Sandford, Gr. Pros.p. 293, »j noHs.

2. Compare Porson, ad Eurip. Med. 2S4. "Tragici mmquam in

senarios, trochaicos, aut, puto, anapcEstos legitimos, irepl admiltunt ante

vocalem, sive in eadem, sivc in divcrsis vocilus. Imo ne in melica qui-

dem verbum vel substantivum hujusmodi compositionis intrare sinunt;

raro admodum adjcctivum vel advcrbnim.''''

3."Elmsley," observes Sandford,

"denies the legitimacy of the elis-

ion in any instance; Porson, in the preface to the Hecuba, inclines to

be more lenient. There are, unquestionably, instances of this elision in

Attic verse which all the ingenuity of Elmsley has failed to remove;

but from its extreme rarityit is inadmissible in modern composition."

Gr. Pros. p. 297, in notis.

4. Elmsley, ad Evrip. Med. 416. Blomfield, however, limits this

canon of Elmsley's to those cases where confusion might otherwise

arise; viz., where first aorists and perfects are employed.

"Neque

hanc elisionemjioetis

Atticis displicutsse credo, pr(Zterquu,m in iis vocibus,

F2



66 IAMBIC TRIMETER.

V. The long vowelstj, w, and the doubtful v, are never

elided.

VI. A diphthong cannot be elided before a short or doubt-

ful vowel.

VII. The diphthongs of the nominative plural of nouns

are never elided either in Attic or Homeric Greek.

VIII. The diphthong aL is never elided by the tragic

writers in the first or third persons of verbs, nor in the in-

finitive.'

IX. The elision of oi, even in the words[xot, cot, rot, is

totally denied by some scholars,^ and allowed by others only

in the case ofolfiot before o).^

X. The short vowel is sometimes, in Aittic Greek, cut

off by aphseresis from the beginning of a word, after a long

vowel or diphthong in the close of the preceding word.*

XI. The instances in which the initial a appears to be

so cutoff', are, according to Elmsley, better referred to era-

sis. Hence, in his opinion, such forms as[jlt} 'fxadel and

j^^ 'noTiaaaOai, ought to be pronounced [ia[iadel andjudrro-

Of Crasis and Synizesis.

I. The article, followed by a short, always coalesces into

uli confusio inde oriri posset, i. e., in aoristis primis ct perfectis.^^

Blomf. ad JEsch. Choeph. 841.

1. Erfurdt, ad Soph. Aj. 190, where an examination and correction

of the ditTorent passages that militate against this canon may be seen.

On the same side is Ehnsley, ad Eurip. Iph. Taur. 678. {Mus. Crit.

vol. ii., p. 292.) Hermann, however, seems mclined not to make the rule

so absolute a one, in his remarks on Soph. Philoct. 1060." Non uhique

equidem elisioncm diphthongi defendam, sed hie cam 7iolim sine librorum

aucloritatc removeri. Nam minus suaviter ad aures acceditleicftd/jaofiai

cum ictu in ultima ante casuram,''^ &c.

2.

Elmsley,ad

Eurip.Med. 56.

" Sed hodie inter omnesfere

eru-

diios convenit, dativumfiol

clisionem pati no7i posse, licet cum quibus-

dam vocibus per crasin coalescere possil."

3. Blomfield, Remarks on Matlhia, G. G. p. sxxvii,, third edition.

Incorporated into the fifth edition by Kenrick, p.87. Compare Soph.

Aj. 587.—Koen. ad Greg. Corinth, p. 171.

4. Sandford, Gr. Pros. p. 299, in nolis.

5. Elmsley, ad Eurip. Heracl. 460.



IAMBIC TRIMETER. 67

long a; as, 6 dvrjp into 'dvrjp ;

rov dvdpbg into Tavdpog,

and the like.'

II. Kat never makes a crasis with ev, except in com-

pounds ;and never with dst.

III. In words joined by crasis, as Kan, Kav, icdv(for

Kai

en, Kai ev, Kat dv), and tlie like, i should not be subscribed

except where Kai forms a crasis with a diphthong contain-

ing an iota ; as, Kara for Kai elra ; but KanL for Kai ent, &c.

IV. M^ oi) and?}'ov always coalesce into one syllable

with the Attics; thus, to

[ir]ov r66' ayyof {Track. 622),

is to be pronounced tofiov

Tod' dyyog, &c.

V. Both in tragic and comic versification, a very frequent

synizesis occurs in the words?/ eldevai, and

fii]eiSsvaL

;in

snei ov, in eyco ov, and in the concurrence of o> ov, and o) sl.

VI. The tragic writers make the genitive singular and

plural of the third declension in eug, ewv either monosyl-

labic or dissyllabic, as suits the verse.

Of Hiatus in the Iambic Trimeter^ &ic.

I. Hiatus of any kind is not admitted by the tragic wri-

ters into their iambic and trochaic measures. But observe

that,

II. When a vowel in the end of a word, after another

vowel or diphthong, is elided, a collision takes place be-

tween the

preceding

vowel or

diphthong

and the vowel or

diphthong at the beginning of the next word; thus,

JlaaCiv dvaidet' e.v d'k-roirjoag fJoXoJv,

TeKp-ripi.' dvdpMTTOLGLV (^naaag oacf)?].

III. The hiatus after ti and oti is admitted in comedy ;

as, Tt av, Arist. Thesm. 852;ti dv, Plut. 464

;otl dx-

deasTaiy Av. 84 ;oti ov, Ach. 516, &;c.

IV. In exclamations c^nd the use of interjections, the

1. Dawes, Misc. Crit. p. 481, eel. Kidd.—Matthice G. G.()54. The

lonians and Dorians, on the contrary, contracted u'vr/p, ruvdpd^, &c.

2. Sand/ord's Gr. Pros.p.

308.



68 IAMBIC TRIMETER.

tragic writers sometimes allow a long vowel or diphthong

to stand before a vowel; thus,

'OroTOt, AvKEi' "AtzoXIov ol eyo), eyw.' {^sch. Ag. 1228.)

'fl ovTog Klag, devrepov oe TrpooKoXCJ. {Soph. Aj. 89.)

V. Interjections,such as (ptv,(pev, &c., often occur extra

metrum, and sometimes other words, especiallyin passages

of emotion; thus,

TdXaLva- ovk eariv dXXrj- (patSpa y' ovv air' oniidriiiv?

VI. The diphthongs ai and oi are occasionally shorten-

ed by the Attic poets before a vowel in the middle of a

word;^ as,

JlaXalov re 'dTjoavptOfia Aiovvaov rods. {Eurip. Electr.

500.)

Kafi' (iv rotavrxi %eipt riiiopelv MXoi. {(Ed. T. 140.)

Of the Comic and Satyric Trimeter}

I. The comic iambic trimeter admits an anapaest into the

first five placesof the verse

; as,

Kdrdtd\

Kdrd6d|1Kdrdbd

\

Karddd | ndrdd/i \ aofxai. ||

{Vcsp. 979.)

II. It also admits a dactyl into the fifth place ; thus,

IlvdoLU1

£61' dvITov

XPV^I^1

ov7] II ^MV otI

I

vod.II

(Plut. 55.)

III. It allows of lines without caesura; and, though some-

what rarely,such also as divide the line by the dipodia of

scansion ; thus,

1 Compare the language of Blomfield, adloc.

" Notanda est ultima

syllahatov h/i)

in hiatu porrecta.Hoc ut reclc fiat, hiatus in ictum ca-

dere debet." ^, ,-,^r,c

2. (Ed. Col. 318. Compare Track. 1037.—Electr. 1159, &c.

3. Compare page 4, note 3.

4. Gaisford,ad Hcpluzst. p.

242.—Taie, Introd. p.9.—Hermann,

Ekm. DocLr. Melr. p. 80, ed. Glasg.



"IAMBIC TRIMETER. 69

'AttoAw tov dvdpcoTTOv KaKiara tovtovl. (Plut. 68.)

^novddg (pipetg\

rwvdjXTreXGiv

|

rsT[xr]jjL^VG)v;

(^Ach. 183.)

IV. It violates the rule respecting the Porsonian pause ,

thus,

AovXgv yeveoOai 7rapa(ppovovvrog \

deanoTOV. (Plut. 2.)

Ka/cwf enpaTTov Kai rtivrj^ i]v \

Oldd roi. (lb. 29.)

Aexov TOV avdpa Kat tov opvLV \

tov '&eov. {lb. 63.)

V. It permits also the concurrence of resolved feet, yet

not so that an ana^oeestshould come after a dactyl or tribrach.

VI. The iambic trimeter of the satyric drama appears, in

its structure, to occupy a middle place between the" nicety

of the tragic laws and the extreme license of comedy ;as

far, indeed, as we are able to form any opinion concerning

it from the scanty remains that have come down to oui

times.'

VII. The anapsest is found, as in the case of the comic

trimeter, in the first five places of the verse;the pause is

in like manner neglected, and trisyllabic or resolved feet

are of frequent occurrence.^

We will now return to the most important of the remain-

ing iambic measures.

8. Trimeter Catalectic.

SX^^ I ^/^'^'^

II"^^ vava

I (TTo/'-tTT IIov avp [

av.||

9. Trimeter Brackycatalectic.

^vyevT I

d nalS\\onol

\

6v a\\dovdv.

[ ||

10. Season, or Choliambus.

ibg atI fiev

a\\ yei Bov

|

TraAw|| KaTfj | poJVTd. ||

1 . The only satyric drama that has reached us is the Cyclops of Eu-

ripides.

2. Gaisford {ad Hephczst. p. 242) inclines to exclude the anapsest from

the third place in the satyric trimeter, but without sufficient authority.

On the occurrence of trisyllabic feet, consult Casaubon,de Sat. Foes. p.

222.



70 IAMBIC TETRAMETER.

I. This measure is nothing more than the iambic trimeter

acatalectic, Avith a spondee instead of an iambus for the

sixth foot. Hence its name of scazon {oiid^G)v,"limping")

or choliambus(^^coXLafidog,

" lame iambus").

II. The fifth foot is generallyan iambus, since the line

would otherwise be too heavy if both the fifth and sixth

feet were spondees ; though instances of this kind occur

even in Theocritus; as,

6 i^ov I

GonoiII bg ev

|

6dd' 'Itttt|| ibvd^

|

Kelrat||

eIfisv I TTOvrj II pog [irj \ -noTepx \\

^v tw| rviibcx). ||

III. This species of verse is also called the Hipponactic

trimeter, from the virulent poet Hipponax, who invented

it,

and after whoseexample

it wasemployed

for

purposesof railing and sarcasm. The writers who used it construct-

ed it generally in the neatest and most exact manner, rare-

ly employing resolutions, and entirely avoiding the anapaest,

except that Babrius has sometimes taken it into the first

place. The tragic writers abstained altogether from this

measure, nor did the comic poets use it, unless, perhaps,with allusion to the iambic writers, as Eupolis in the Baptse

{ap. Priscian, p. 1328).^

11. Tetrameter Catalectic.

elfioi I yevoZ ||

ro nap |Oevog || KaXfj \

re nal|| repel \

va.||

I. This measure was much used by the comic poets, but

not at all by the tragic writers. It may be considered as

two dimeters, the first complete, the second wanting one

syllable.^

1. Hermann, Elem. Doctr. Metr.p. 94, ed. Glasg.

2. The iambic tetrameter catalectic is used also in English ; as in the

song called "Miss Bailey," viz., "A captain bold from Halifax," &c.

It forms also the prevalent measure of the modern Greek])oetry, or, in

other words, it is their heroic verse, (Consult FavricI, Chants popu-laires de la Grcce Modcrnc,\o\. i.,p. cxix., Disc. Prelim.) The follow-

ing lines will illustrate this, the pronunciation being regulated entirely

by accent :



IAMBIC TETRAMETER. 71

II. This measure is the most harmonious of iambic

verses, and those lines are the most pleasing Avhich have

the caesura at the end of the fourth foot or second metre; as,

elfiOL yevoLTO irapdevog, \ KaXr] re Kal repeiva.

But the comic writers often neglect this caesura.

III. The following is the metrical scale :

1



72 IAMBIC TETRAMETER.

IX. We have remarked above, that the most pleasing

caesura in this species of verse falls after the fourth foot.

Sometimes the verse is even so constructed as to give a

succession of iambic dipodias, separately heard;

as the fol-

lowing from Aristophanes, Plutus, 253, scq}

î2 -noXXa6rj j

tw deairorxi \\ravrbv dv[iov \ (fjayovreg,

"Avdpeg (ptXot |

KaiSrjjxorat ||

Kal rov tiovelv| epaarai.

12. Tetrameter Acatahctic.

T. This measure, called also Boiscius, from its inventor

Boiscus, is not used by the Greek tragic and comic wri-

ters. Hepha^stion gives an example from Alcaeus, as fol-

lows :^

Aeâl\ [IS

kG>II ixdôvr |

a 6e^ j|

at Xiaoj oiial ||

ae Xiao|

oiial. II

II. The Roman comic and tragic poets, however, made

much use of this species of verse. The Latins called it

octonarius.

III. This measure allows of one oftwo

caesuras. Plau-

tus commonly divides it in the fourth arsis, and therefore

intended it to be asynartete ;which is indicated by the

hiatus and short syllable ;as in the Amphitr. 3, 4, 5, and

Bacch. 4, 9, 9.

Ills ndI

vim sal||vum nun

|

ciat||

— aiit i|

rati ad||

ventum|

senis.||

O TrolI

a 6 pdtrl \\a u Perg \

dmum, ||

— 6 Prm|

me pe-

rtIIisti

I

senix.\\

In Terence, on the other hand, this kind of verse is not

asynartete, because he usually makes the caesura in the the-

sis which follows the fourth arsis; as,

Nunc A7n\ phitrm ||

n^m volt|

dtUi||

di-meiisj pater \\

fdxo I prohe. ||

1. Tate, Introd.p. 10.

2. Hermann, Doctr. Elem. Metr.p. 102, ed. Glasg.



TROCHAIC VERSE. - 73

II. Of Trochaic Verse.

I. Trocliaic verse derives its name from the foot which

prevailsin it, namely, the trochee.

II. The trochee, however, as in the case of the iambus,

is convertible into a tribrach, and the spondee and anapaest

are also admitted, but not the dactyl, except in a proper

name.' There is this difference, however, between iambicand trochaic measure, that the latter admits the spondee

and anapaest into the even places, the former into the uneven.

III. The following are the principal trochaic metres :

1. Manometer Acatalectic, or Base.

dare|vaKTog. \\

Tiflixdr' I

OLKcbv.II

Trochaic monometers are usually found in systems,

which, as in most other numbers, so in the trochaic also, it is

the custom, especially ofthe comic writers, to form into dime-

ters.

These systemsare continued in one unbroken

tenour,concluded by a catalectic verse. On this account there is

no place for hiatus at the end of each verse, nor is it held

necessary to conclude a verse with an entire word;but the

whole system is as one verse. Thus in Aristophanes (^Pac.

339, seq.)we have the following:

Kal fiodre, Kal yeXdr'- •//—6r] yap eêorac rod' vjxlv

ttXeIv, fievELV, Ktvelv, KadevSeiv,

eg TTavTjyvpeig decjpelv,

eOTidadai, KOTradlêiv,

ov6apLêiv,

iov iov KEKpayevaL.

1. Compare remarks under trochaic tetrameter catalectic.

G



74 TROCHAIC VERSE.

2. Manometer Hypercatalectic.

ttovtII

(bv GdXIIwv

MamI6dg tok

||ov

BdpOdp I

w |3o IIa.

3. Dimeter Acatalectic.

Scale.

1



TROCHAIC VERSE. 75

6. DimeterHypercatalectic.^

dg eI yiifj,'

6|| ro^o

\rag Udp || Ig.

Tovg fiev I

Evorddfi. ||

ololv|

ittttl\\ Kolg.

7. Trimeter Catalectic.^

epxe I

Tai rl\\ iid yv |

valKei\\

o) yev [

el. —||

riders.\ firj ijjocp ||

elre| 117)6'

ear||

6J /CTi;7r|og.—

[|

8. Trimeter Brachycatalectic.

61 611 Tzpog -dpov II ovg ea

|

wjuo || Xovreg.

j||

Tov 6'eI juov TTorfi ||

6v a6dKp \

vrov|| ov6elg.

j ||

9. Trimeter Hypercatalectic.

TjXdov Iet^ (JojU II ovg Iv

]

ai}0' e||Kdord

\

ool Xey | w.

TCJjwev I

o orpdr || T^-^a|rd^* Trdr

|| ?}pe/cA

| 7/i^r ||0.


Scale.

1



76 TROCHAIC VERSE.

always at the end of the fourth foot;as in the lines juat

given.'

0) TTarpag Q'/]6i]g tvoLKOi,|Xevaosr', 0l6i,TT0vg ode,

8g rd kXelv'aivtyiiar'' ydr], |

Kal Kpariarog r]v dvqp.

This caesura, however, is often neglected by the comic

poets.

II. The fourth foot of a tragic tetrameter should alwaysend with some word that allows a pause in the sense

;not

with a preposition,for instance, or an article belonging in

syntax to what comes after.^

III. If the first dipodia of the verse is contained in entire

words (and so as to be followed at least by a slight break

of the sense), the second foot is a trochee, or may be a tri-

brach ;^ as,

w<: arifiog, \\ olKrpd 7rd(7;)^wv, eêXavvofiat xôvog.

Kad' 6 Bpofiiog, || d)g 'ifioiys âiveraL, doâv Xeyu).

fxrjTepogde

|1 [xrjd' 'idotjU [xvrjfia- TToXeîa yap tjv.

IV. In every place except the fourth and seventh, a dac-

tyl of proper names is admitted. This dactyl is chiefly al-

lowed to enter where its two short syllables are enclosed

between two longs in the same word; very rarely when

the word begins with them;under other circumstances,

never ;* as,

1. This caesura is found neglected in ^-Eschylus, Pcrs. 164, where

Porson corrects the verse by removing Siiryif/ to the end of the line;an

emendation of which Hermann speaks rather slightingly. {Porson,

Suppl. ad Prczf. p. xliii.—Hermann, Elcrn. DocLr. Melr.p. 52, ed.

Glasg.) Blomfield follows Porson.

2. Porson, Suppl. ad Praf. p.xliii.

3. This nicety of structure in the long trochaic of tragedy was first dis-

covered by Porson. Consult Tracts and Misc. Criticisms of Porson,

ed. Kidd, p.197.— Class. Jnurn. No. 45, p. 166, seq.

—Maltby, Lex.

Pros, p,Ixvii. Tate, in his Introduction, p. 12, examines and explains

(from his paper in the Class. Journ. 1. c.) the different lines that appear

to militate against this canon of Porson's.

4. The principle on which this rule is probably based has already been

alluded to in a previous note, page 60.



TROCHAIC VERSE. 77

ecg dp j I(j)lye ||veldv

\ EAet'Ty^ || voarog j fjVne

\\ -npwiiev

I Of.

iravreg| ''E.XXfiv || e^- arpdr |

05- de|| M.vpiu6o \

vcjv ov||

Gol nap I ^v.

^vyyov I

ov r' e|] /i^v Ili'/la

| dfiv re||rov ra

|

Se ^vv ||

dpibvrd I îof.

V. As toscansion, one

limitationonly

obtains;

that

or ^- ^ — in the sixth place, never precedes^ -- - in the

seventh. Even in comedy, a verse like the following is

exceedingly rare :

ovre yap vavayog, avfj,rj yrjg XdOrjraL j (pepofievog.

VI. If the verse is concluded bv one word forming the

cretic termination (—-^ —

),or by more words than are to

that amount united in meaning, so that after the sixth foot

that portion of sense and sound is separately perceived, then

the sixth foot is — -^ or — ^ ^;that is, it may not be

or -^ — —. Thus,

iêXavvojîeada narpLdog, Kal yap rjXdeg |kêXdv.

eXTTidsg 6' ovttoj KaOevdova', alg irsTTotda

\

avv -êolg.

VII. If from the beginning of a trochaic tetrameter you

take away a cretic (—--'—), or a first paeon (—^ -^

^), or

fourthpffion f--

— ^ —),

a regular iambic trimeter will be

formed. Thus,

ddaaovT] n' ) sxpriv Trpodatveiv lic6[j,rjv

61' dareog.

ovxi MSveI

Xecj rpo-rroiOL ^p^fJ-^d' oIgteov rdde.

Idlovfj I

Kotvbv TToXiratg enccpipcov eyKXrjjxa re;

Vin. The senarius thus formed, however, must alwayshave apenthemimeral caesura, in order that the proper pause

may take place at the end of the fourth trochaic foot.'

1. It admits, too, a dactyl, although very rarely,into the fifth place.

Porson, Suppl. ad Prmf. p.xliii.

G2



78 ANAP^STIC VERSE.

Comic Tetrameter Catalectic.

I. The scansion agrees with that of the tragic, except

only that the spondee in the sixth sometimes, though very

rarely, precedes the tribrach in the seventh;as in the fol-

lowing line from Philemon :

ovre yap vavaydg, dvfiij yrig Xd6r]raL ^epofievog.

II. The comic, like the tragic tetrameter, admits the dac-

tyl only in the case of a proper name, and not otherwise.

III. As regards structure, it must be remarked, that the

comic poets freely neglect the nice points of tragic verse.

They pay little attention to the pause at the end of the

fourth foot, and to the rules respecting those divisions which

sometimes take place after the first dipodia or before the

final cretic. Lines like the following occur in great abun-

dance :'

TTpcora fxev xo-Lpeiv 'Adrjvat |

oLot Kat rolg ^v^fidxotg.

arr' dvvjj,eLg \ e^afidpTrjr' ,

eni ro (BeXnov Tpsneiv.

nXelarayap

&eCov dndvrojv(hcpeXovaaig

|

t7]vtxoXiv.

III. Of Anapmstic Verse.

I. Anapaestic verse admits its proper foot, the anapasst

(^^

_) with the dactyl, which is said to be admitted Kar'

dvTiTTddeiav. It admits also the spondee, and sometimes,

though very rarely, the proceleusmaticus (--- ^

^ ).

II. Systems of anapaestic verse are scanned by the dipo-

dia. They are generally dimeter acatalectic.

III. These, however, like other dimeters, have not the

last syllable common. A sr/napheia [ovvdcpeia) or principle

of continuous scansion prevails throughout them, so that

they run on, from beginning to end, as if they all formed

but one verse.

IV. The end of an anapaestic system is marked by a

dimeter acatalectic, or, as it is more commoidy termed, a

1. Tate, Introd. p. 13.'



ANAP^STIC VERSE. 79

paroemiac line, and the last syllable in this line is the only

one in this system which is excepted from the law of syna-

pheia, and which may be long or short indifferently.

V. The principal anapaestic measures are as follows :

1. Monometer Acatalectic^ or Base.

1



80 ANAP^STIC VERSE.

IV. The anapaestic dimeter admits indiscriminately the

dactyl and spondee for the anapaest. The scale is as fol-

lows :

1



ANAP^STIC VERSE. 81

6aljX(bv I

ode. rig \\ XevKfiv [ aWspa \\

Trdpd[j,£vI

djj,evdg.

\\. .'

i^v^Twv I

d' dX,6i6g \\ elg reXog|ovSelg. ||

^

5. An anapaest ought not to be preceded by adactyl, to

avoid too many short syllables occurring together. On

this subject, which is one of great awkwardness and

difficultyto metrical

scholars,the

followingrules

maybe laid down.'

(a.) The concurrence of dactyl with anapaest, in that

order, is never found within the same syzygy. And

hence the following line of Euripides [Alcest. 80),

as given in the common editions,

dOTLg dv evenol\\ TTorepov (jidijievrj,

is well corrected by Monk, who reads stiTOt for ev-

ilTOL.

(/3.)The concurrence of dactyl with anapeest, in that

order, is not very often found between one dimeter

and another, as in Euripides (Electr. 1320, seq.):

^vyyove (plXrdTe

did yap \ ^evyvva' 7)jmg Trarpiojv.

(y.)The combination is very rare where one syzygy

closes with a dactyl and the next begins with an

anapaest, as in the following {Electr. 1317) :

Sdpaei UdXXddog \\ oaldv '/j^eig.

IV. Thus far of the anapeestic dimeter, when the first

syzygy, as most usually it does, ends with a word. This,

however, is not always the case;and of such A'erses as

want that division, those are the most frequent, and the most

pleasing also, which have the first syzygy after ananapaest

1. Eurip. Androm. 1228 (1204).

2. U. Iph. A. 161 (159).

3. Tate, Introd.p. 15.—Sandford, Gr. Pros. p. 314.



82 ANAP^STIC VERSE.

(sometimes after a spondee) overflowing into the second,

with,the movement anapasstic throughout.' Thus,

Txrepvyodv kperiiol [

glv kpeaaoêvoL.

Kal ^vyxaipov |

acv duocoTTperrelg.

Here the last syllables of eperiiolotvand ^vyxaipovaiv

overflovi^ into the second syzygy, the first syzygy ending

after the penultimate syllables of each of these words.

V. In this species of verse one hiatus alone is permitted,

in the case of a final diphthong or long vowel so placed as

to form a short syllable. The following instances may

serve :^

Kat eXeLobdrai vaCov epsrai. {Pers. 39.)

TTodeovaaL i6e.lv

dpri^vytav. [lb. 548.)

oixsrai, dv6pu)v. (Îb. 60.)

Tcj Qrjaeida 6', ocfw 'Adrjvcov. (^Hecub. 123.)

VI. The synapheia {avvd(l)eta),that property of the an-

apaestic system which Bentley first demonstrated,' is nei-

ther more nor less than continuous scansion, that is, scan-

sion continued with strict exactness from the first syllable

to the very last, but not including the last itself, as that

syllable, and only that in the whole system, may be long

or short indifferently. Thus,

sir dpdfxdv EfiolKat (piXorrjra

GTrevdo)v GirevdovTi ttoO'riêc. (Prom. v. 199, seq.)

Here the last syllable of verse 199 becomes long, from the

short vowel a in (pLXorrira being united with the consonants

GTt at the beginning of verse 200. Had a single consonant,

or any pair of consonants like Kp, ttA, &c., followed in verse

200, the last syllable of verse 199 would have been short

in violation of the metre. Again,

w fieydXa Qejil,Kal norvt.' "ApTefxt,

XevGoed' a ndaxo) {Med. 161.)

1. Tate, p.16.

2. Hermann, Elrm. Doelr. Mctr. p. 237, ed. Glass-

3. Dissertation on the Epistles of Fkalaris, p. 150, seq., ed. Land.

1816.



ANAP^STIC VERSE. 83

If, after verse 161, ending with a sliort vowel, any vowel

whatever had followedin verse

162,that

would have vio-

lated the law of hiatus observed in these verses. And if a

double consonant, or any pair of consonants like kt, an,

6jj,, jxv, Sic, had followed in verse 162, the word "Aprsfu,

necessarily combined with those consonants, would have

formed a cretic or amphimacer (—-'—), and not the dac-

tyl required. But XevaaeO' follows, with the initial A, and

all is correct.'

VII. The law of synapheia, however, is occasionally vi-

olated; namely, sometimes in a change of speaker, as

Eurip. Med. 1368; Electr. 1333; Soph. CEd. Col. 139,

143, 170, 173, 1757; Antig. 931. It is violated sometimes,

also, at the end of a sentence, and likewise in exclamations,

as in jEsch. Agam. 1544.*^

VIII. The parcemiac verse has its scale as follows :

1 2



84 ANAPiESTIC VERSE.

iTrncjv t' eXarrjp libadd| V7]g. (Pers. 32.)

(3sXog TjXidLov aKfiipei | ev. [Agam. 374.)

iprj(f)(i> TToXecdg yvibadli \

aai. {Suppl. 8.)

Other examples may be found in the Sept. ad Theh. 832,

and Suppl. 983, but these arise, most probably, from some

corruption in the text."

XII. In the anapaestic dimeter, as has already been re-

marked, the first syzygy usually ends with a word ;but in

the paroemiac this is very seldom the case, and hence a

very common shape of this latter species of verse is found

in the following line :

exOpolg erdxapr [

d mmovda.

XIII. Theparcsmiac sometimes, though rarely, begins

with a dactyl ; thus,

ovK diTonovadv to yvvalKcbv.

But it comes most agreeably to the ear when it presents

the last three feet of a dactylic hexameter with an initial

syllable ;^ thus,

TcdvI fiol (l)o6spdv TO Txpoaepfrdv

eI x^polg enlxdpTd Trindvdd.

Or with two initial syllables, when an anapaest begins ; as,

(plXog I

IotI PedaloTepog aol.

XIV. With regard toposition,

the Attics observe the

same laws, as to a vowel before a mute and liquid, &;c., in

the anapaestic dimeter which prevail in the iambic trimeter.''

XV. The question whether the augment may be occa-

sionally rejected in regular anapaistics still remains unde-

cided.'' It is safer not to exercise this license in modem

versification.

1. Hermann, Elcm. Doc.tr. Mctr.p. 240, ed. Glasg.

2. Tate, Introd. p.18.—Sandford, Gr. Pros.

p.316.

3. Some instances, however, may be fo\md in the anapasstic dimeter,

where a short vowel at the end of a word is lengthened beforeTvp, tt/I,

&c., in the beginning of the next. Consult Erfurdt, ad Soph. Aj. 1120.

—Blomf. ad JEsch. Sept. c. Theh. lO.'Sa.

4. Elmsley {ad Eurip. Med. 1380) is in favour of the occasional re-



ANAPiESTIC VERSE. 85

XVI. In systems of anapaests the tragic writers neither

always employ

nor

always

discard the Doric dialect, at

least those peculiarities of it which are usual in the choral

parts or admitted into the senarius.


I. This metre, called Aristophanic, from the frequent

use of it

by Aristophanes,

consists of two dimeters, the last

of which is catalectic. Its scale is as follows :

1 2I

3I

4 5 6 7 8

Examples.

akV f\ I 6f\ xpr\v ||rt "klyuv \ vfidg \\ g6(I)6v Co

| vIkt] jj

OSTS TJjv I

61

ibnTG)vI ydarspd || rolg ovy | yevealv ||

Kar' ovk| eox^jv Jf

afie^fj IGag.

II. In the first three places, as will appear from the

scale, besides the

anapaest

and spondee, a

dactyl maybe

used;but it must be observed that a dactyl is admitted

much more sparingly into the second than into the first

place of the syzygy.'

III. A dactyl is also admitted into the fifth place, but is

always excluded from the fourth and sixth places.

IV. The two feet— —

^,^ ^ —

, in that order, nowhereoccur in the anapaestic tetrameter. The catalectic syllable

is never preceded by a spondee in the seventh place, which

should always be an anapaest. The proceleusmaticus is ex-

cluded from the verse.

V. The caesura always occurs after the fourth foot, which

must never end with an article or a preposition. Besides

jection of the augment, but Blomfield (ad ^sch. Pers. 912) controverts

this opinion. Sandford, Gr. Pros. p.320.

1. In the twelve hundred (or more) tetrameter anapaestics of Aristoph-

anes, only nineteen examples occur of a dactyl in the second place, the

only second place of a syzygy which it can occupy. Tate, Introd. p. 19.

H



86 DACTYLIC VERSE,

this main division, moreover, there should be likewise an-

other one after the first syzygy, which always gives an

agreeable finish to a verse. Thus,

aXXijS?] XP^F I

"^^ At'y£iv v[i,dg \\ Go<pbv, w viKrjaere rrjvdL

iv Toloi Xoyoig | avriXeyovreg- \\ [laXaKov d' evdwcrere

H7]6ev.

The following verses, faulty on this account,

^Vfj,6ovXotaLV airdoaig vjilv ;^p^<7Wjr/ai.icat yap skeI

fôi,

r]vdyKa<êv eTrrj Xeôvrag y' eg to -dsarpov TTapatrjvaL,

have been corrected, the one by Brunck, the other by Per-

son,' thus,

^vjj,6ov?iOiaLv Iirdaaig vpXv || xPVî^F'^'- '^^^ y^P ^^^^

iôi-

ijvdyKaêv |Xeôvrag e-nrj || irpbg to &eaTpov ixapatrivaL.

VI. In the anapaestic tetrameter, the very same hiatus of

a lo«ngvowel or diphthong sometimes occurs as in the dim-

eter.^ Thus,

ovt' ev SdmoLV Ttg yap vcpaiveiv edeXrjan, xpy<yôv ovTog ;

ovKOVv dTjnov TTJg llTO)xscag Usviav(j)a[iev

elvat ddeXcprjv.

IV. Of Dactylic Verse.


OldiTTO\

6d.^


Tig d' £77iI TVfidiog.

ov 6elGj Tjvopd.

Tavde yv |

vacKuv.

The pure dactylic dimeter consists of two dactyls, as in

the first example given ;the impure admits a spondee into

1. Suppl. ad Prcef. p. lix., seq.—Brunck, ad Aristoph. Ecclcs. 514.

3. Tate, Introd. p. 21.

3. This may also be scanned as a choriambic monometer.

OldiTvoSd I



DACTYLIC VERSE. 87

the first place, and sometimes into the second;

it is also

found

composedof two

spondees; as,

nelOibI fidXTidv. {Agam. 104.)

TzofiTTOXK; I

r' dpxov^. {lb. 122.)


ov t' emI /{.e^df-ie |

vd.

OLKTpov I

ydp TxoTuv I

C)d'.

4. Trimeter Acatalectic.

dvaat()lId<; [lev

v| 6pl^ reKog

|

ai MowI

oal tov e| pd)Td. \


(b TToXvI

aXavre(jit |

XolaX -dd|

vu)V.

Kolfil^ I

el (pXayfi \

Co Kpovl |6d^.

This measure, in its pure state, consists of three dactyls

and a syllable over. It admits a spondee into the first place,

and sometimes into the second, but never before the cata-

lectic syllable.

6. Tetrameter Acatalectic.

cd 6' spXg I

ovK eplq \

dXXd <pov |

w (povoq. j

OWiTTOI

6d d6fj,ov I

(bXtos\ KpdvOetq. |

aliidrl I

delvd)j aliidrl | Xvypd). |

I. Alcman composed whole strophes in this measure; as,

Mwcr', aye, KoAAto-rra, -^vyarep Acog,

apx' eparojv e7teu)v, em 6'Ifiepov

v[iv(j)Kal xo-pcevra ridet x^pov-

II. These tetrameters have no caesura. Among the Lat-

ins they were used by both tragic and comic writers. Thus

Attius, ap.Non. s. v.

"Expergite :"

Heu vigiles properate, expergite,

Pectora tarda sopore, exsurgite.



88 DACTYLIC VERSE,

And Terence, Andr. 4, 1, 1 :

Hdccine credibile aut mcmorabile.

7. Tetrameter Hypercatalectic.

ov6' vTTOI Txapdevl |

af tov v\

tto fiXecpd [ polq.

8. Pentameter Acatalectic}

7Tpu)Td [lev I evdoKifJ. |

ov orpdrl |dg dire

| (palvonsd'.

I. In its pure state, this measure consists of five dactyls.

It admits, however, a spondee into every place.

II. In the Eumenides of ^^schylus (v. 373, seq.)there is

a system of pentameters which closes with a trochaic dim-

eter catalectic; thus,

do^alI

t' dvdpGiv |

koljuaX'

vtt''\ aldepl \ clfivdi, \

TdKO[j,s I

val Kdrd| ydv fuvv \

dovalv d| rlixol \

finETep Ialg €(j)od \

olg fitXdv | ei\ji6alv | opx^o—

|

fiolq r' en| L(j)6dv || olg.

9. Pentameter Hypercatalectic.

(ioaKOfie. I

vol Xdyl \

vdv epl \ Kvpiovd j (j)ep^dTl j yev-

vav, K. T. A. [Agam. 119.)

10. Hexameter Acatalectic.

TTpog ae ysv |elddog

|

(b (piXog |w 6okI

j fiibrdrog [

'EA-

A pure dactylic hexameter consists of sixdactyls through-

out. An impure one admits the spondee into all places but

the fifth, and the spondee alone, excluding the dactyl, into

the sixth place, thus forming the ordinary hexameter of epic

verse, or, as it is often called, from its being employed to

celebrate the exploits of heroes, Heroic Verse.

1. Tlie elegiac pentameter will be considered after the hexameter,

since it is not properly a pentameter measure, but should be called merely

elegiac verse.



DACTYLIC VERSE. 89

11. Heroic Verse.""'

I. A heroic verse is composed of six feet, the last of

which must be a spondee, while the fifth is almost always

a dactyl. The first four may be either dactyls or spondees.

II. Sometimes a spondee is allowed to enter into the fifth

place, and the verse is then called spondaic. This is done

whenanything

of agrave, solemn,

oraffecting

nature is in-

tended to be expressed, or in order to denote astonishment,

consternation, vastness of size, &c.

III. This spondee in the fifth place, however, is admis-

sible under the following restrictions :' 1. It must not con-

sist of one entire word.^ 2. It must not end with the end of

a word, except that word be a monosyllable. 3. It must not

consist of two monosyllables.^

IV. A spondee in the third place of the verse may con-

sist of two monosyllables, but not of one entire word.

V. When a genitive in — olo is used, the syllable ol must

be the first of the foot.

VI. In the close of the verse a short syllable may be

lengthened. In other words, the last syllable of the verse

is common, and hence a trochee here becomes a spondee.

VII. A word cannot be divided between two lines in

Homeric verse, although Simonides and other writers of

epigrams have sometimes indulged in this license in the

case of proper names. Nor does Homeric poetry allow the

elision of a vowel at the end of one line before a vowel at

the beginning of the next. Moreover, punctuation, or a

pause in the sense, should not be admitted between the fifth

and sixth foot.

1. Sandfvrd, Gr. Pros. p. 2.58.

2. Hence, for(Irj/xov, ?jio, &c., which occasionally appear in the fifth

place,we should read (h/fion, r/oa, &c.

3. The later writers of hexameters admitted two monosyllables into

the fifth place (as—u& u <puva in Theocritus), but the practice is not

Homeric.

Hii



90 DACTYLIC VERSE.

Ofthe Caesuras in Heroic Verse.

I. The term caesura is used by grammarians in two ac-

ceptations : first, as applied to whole verses, and, secondly,

as applied to single feet.'

II. In the former acceptation, caesura means the division

of a verse into two portions or members, affording a little

pause or rest for the voice in some convenient part, wherethat pause may take place without injury to the sense or

harmony of the line.

III. In the second acceptation, caesura means the divis-

ion or separation which takes place in a foot, when that

foot is composed of syllables belonging to separate words.'

IV. These two kinds of caesura will now be considered

in order.

1. Caesura of the Verse.

I. The favourite caesura of the Homeric hexameter falls

after the first syllable of the third foot, or the fifth half foot,

and is hence denominated the penthemimeral ; as,

aXXa KaKb^q atpiti |1 Kparepbv (5' tm nvdov ereXXe.

II. Another principal caesura in a heroic verse is that

which falls after the first syllable of the fourth foot, or the

seventh half foot, and is hence called the hepthemimeral ; as,

p,riae yepov KOiXrjGLv tyw H napd vtjvgI /ct%£ico.

Both this and the previous caesura are sometimes found

in the same verse.

III. Another position of the caesura is after a trochee in

the third foot ; as in the opening line of the Odyssey:

avdpa fioisweTre Moved

\\ noXvTpoTTOV, bg ^dXa iroXXd.

1. Priscian uses the term in both acceptations :

" Casurcz vero ver-

sum et rhylhmum leviurem solent'perficcre,''''

&c.;and again,

" Per pe-

des in gninque dividitur hie versus casurasy (Prise, de xii. vers. Mn.

c. 1.—0;?.

vol. li., p. 276, 277, ed. Krehl.)



DACTYLIC VERSE. 91

But the trochee must either be an entire word, as in the

example just given (Movad), or must be formed from the

last two syllables of a word ;as in the following line, where

it is formed of the syllabledovde :

avrig 'inecTa nidovde||KvXLvdero Xdag dvatdrjg.

IV. The beauty of hexameter composition lies as much

in the variation of caesuras in the different lines as in the

variation of feet in the same line.

V. There are many other caesuras admitted into heroic

verse;but in the variety there is one which, on account of

its debilitating the strength and harmony of the numbers,

was rejected by the best poets. This caesura falls after a

trochee in the fourth foot ; as,

IlTjXevg &'f]v not enetra yvvalna || yafieaGerat avTog

ayxi fJ-dX', cjg ore rig re yvvaLKog || Iv^covoco.

VI. In passages of force or dignity the caesura sometimes

falls after the first syllable of the sixth foot; thus,

yalav b^ovKat novrov

opcopetd'

ovpavodev||

vv^.

VII. The bucolic caesura, so called from its prevalence

in bucolic or pastoral poetry, falls after the fourth foot,

which, in this case, is most commonly a dactyl. Thus,

cidv ri ro ipiOvpiojia Kat a TTcrvg ||

alrrdXerrjva,

'

aTTorl

ralg Trayalot fteXiaderar||

d<5v 6e Kat rv

rvpiadeg- fierd Udva ro devrepov ||ddXov drroia^.

This pause is often found in epic verse, and is generally

employed by the epic writers in order to strengthen and

amplify what is said.' Thus, in Homer (//. 4, 424), we have

TTOVTO)jJ^ev

rd-npojra Kopvoaerat,

\\

avrdpeneira

X^P^^ prjyvvjievov jieydXa fSpepei, \\ diKpl 6e r' dupag,

and in Dionysius Periegetes, v. 131,

Alyaiov TTOvroio TrXarvv nopov \\ev&a re KVfxa.

1. Hermann, Elem. Doctr. Metr.p. 214, ed. Glasg.



92 DACTYLIC VERSE.

It occurs, also, with the same effect in Latin verse; thus,

in Lucretius, 3, 920, and 6, 155, we find

Insatiahiliter dejlebimus ; || cpAernumque.

Denique scRpe gcli multusfragor , || atque ruina.

And in Virgil, Georg. 1, 356 :

Continuo ventis surgentibus, ||aut freta ponti.

Sometimes the epic poets would make the fourth foot a

spondee, and the most ancient of them occasionally admit-

ted even a trochee into that place which, by a pause after

it, becomes a spondee in pronunciation. Thus, we have

the following lines in Homer (//. 11, 36) and Ennius [Ann.

1, p. 22, ed. Hessel.) : -

rrid' tm

[lev TopyC) pXoGvpojmg \\ karecfyavGiro.

Omnis cura viris titer esset1| induperaior.

Theocritus, on the other hand, in the composition of his

lines, was careful to make the fourth foot a dactyl, so that,

the last two feet being cut off, there would remain a dactylic

tetrameter.' Thus,

ddv tII

TO ipWv I ploiid Koi]

d rclrvg |

—d TTOTi

Iralg ird

| yalol jtte j

XlaStrai|

—rvplad I

eg fisrd \

Ildvd to\ devTspov |

—

VIII. Wewill

now proceedto the second kind of

caesura.

2. CcBsura of the Foot.

I. This species of caesura is equally important with the

other, and equally necessary to the harmony and beauty

of versification. A verse in which it is neglected, and in

which the isolated feet seem to shun all society with each

1. Warton, de Poes. Bucol. {Theocril. vol. i., p xxxvi.) Valckenaer

was the first to mark the bucolic cassura in Theocritus. The first seven

idylls,with the tenth and eleventh, contain nine hundred and twenty-

seven lines, of which not less than seven hundred and eleven have this

caesura. Virgil's Eclogues consist of eight hundred and thirty lines, but

of these only two himdred and thirty-two conform to the bucolic model.



HEROIC VERSE. 93

otlier, is stiff and awkward in the extreme, and wholly de-

void of all poetic grace ; as the following examples from

the old Roman poets, Ennius and Lucilius, will clearly tes-

tify.

Sparsis \

hastis|

late| campus | splendet et

\

horret.

Has res\

ad te\ scriptas |

Luci|

misimus|

jEli.

II. On the other hand, the frequent recurrence of the

caesura of the foot, which, while it breaks the feet, tends to

link the words with each other, greatly contributes to the

flow and harmony of the verse. As in the following pas-

sage from Theocritus :

"^£2 ndv, Indv, air'

j

eaat Kar'| &pea \ fxaKpa,

Av[Kaicj,

aire Tvy' | dixcptiro | Xelg fiiya | MalvaXov j evd' eni \ vd-

GOV

rdv I.iii£IXdv, 'EAt

|Kag 6s XL

|

tts 'Vlov,|

alv:v re|aafxa

rrjvo Av |

Kaovi6|ao, to

|

Kai,[laiidp \

eaaiv d| yaoTov.

III. The caesura of which we are now treating may either

besyllabic, monosyllabic,

or trochaic.

IV. The syllabicccesura is when the first part of the foot,

that is, the part before the break, consists of a syllable be-

longing to a preceding word. Thus, in the lines of The-

ocritus just quoted, Xelg jisya in the second verse is an in-

stance of syllabic caesura, the syllable Xelg forming the first

part of the dactyl, being a syllable belonging to dfKptTroXslg

which precedes.

V. The monosyllabiccaesura is when the first part of the

foot consists of a monosyllable ;as ^Q. Yldv, in the com-

mencement of the passage just given from Theocritus, and

Ildv aiT\ the foot that succeeds.

VI. The trochaic ccBsura is when the first part of the

foot consists of a trochee; as, egol KaT\ and [laKpa Av, in

the line just referred to.

Two subjects remain to occupy our attention under the

head of heroic verse;the Digamma and the Ictus Metricus,

each of which will be considered in order.



94 HEROIC VERSE.

1. The Digamma.

I. The whole subject of the digamma rests on the fol-

lowmg remarkable fact. A certain number of words be-

ginning with a vowel, especially the pronoun ov, 61, s, and

also eldcj, totKa, elTrelv, ava^, "IXiog, olvog, olKog, epyov,

laog, eKaoTog, with their derivatives, have in Homer so

often thehiatus before

them, that, leavingthese

wordsout

of the account, the hiatus, which is now so frequent in Ho-

mer, becomes extremely rare, and in most of the remaining

cases can be easily and naturally accounted for. These

same words have also, in comparison with others, an apos-

trophe very seldom before them; and, moreover, the imme-

diately preceding long vowels and diphthongs are far less

frequently rendered short than before other words.'

n. From an attentive examination of the subject, the il-

lustrious Bentley was led to conclude, that the words before

which these deviations from the usual rules of prosody took

place, although beginning with a vowel, must have been

pronounced at least, if not written, as if beginning with a

consonant. He recollected, that some ancient grammarians

mentioned a letter as more particularly used by the iEoli-

ans or most ancient Greeks, and that its existence might

be traced in the changes which some Latin words, derived

from the vEolic Greek, had undergone ; as, olvog, vinum ;

Ig, vis; OLKog, vicus ; 7]p,

ver. The letter alluded to, which,

from its form, has the name of digamma or double gamma

(F), is yet to be seen in some ancient inscriptions and on

coins;and it supplies the data for resolving the cases of

metrical difficulty where the lengthening of a short syllable

uniformly takes place before particular words.ni. Let us examine some of the instances which are

found at the very opening of the Iliad : 'A~p'ei6i]g re dva^

dvdpojv (v. 7).—

'AyaiJ.e[j,vovi r'jvdave t?v/jw (v. 24).—'AttoA-

1. Buttmann, Au^f. Gr. Sprachl. p. 27.—Butlmann's Larger Gr.

Gr.p. 28, Robinson's transl.—Mallhy, Greek Grains, p. xi., seq.



HEROIC VERSE. 95

Xwvc avaKTt (v. 36).—6 6'

rjlevvktl eoiKcJg (v. 47).

—dap-

oipag fidXa, sIttk (v. 85). In all these cases, according to

the practice of the language in the days of Attic purity, the

short vowel ought to have been elided before ava^, i]v6ave,

&c. But if we write Fdva^, Yi]v6avs, &c., or fancy the

words pronounced wavaf, W7]vdave, wewoi/cwf , wsme, Sic,

the difficulty will in a great degree disappear.'

2. The Ictus Metricus?

I. There are, however, cases of syllables not merely at

the end, but in the beginning and middle of words, where

the digamma cannot operate, and which must be accounted

for in a different manner. Thus, at the end,

ovre &eoig, etTTSp ng erl vvv 6aivvrai eixppcov. {II. 15, 99.)

ol ~£ Kv6epvrjTac, ical %ov olifia vrjCJv. {II. 19, 43.)

eyx^^ spetdofxevu)-en yap %ov tXKea Xvypd. [lb. 49.)

At the beginning and end; as,

(plXe KaaiyvrjTe KOfiLGat te [j.e. . . .

(II. 5, 359.)

In the middle; as,

'

Kal rd [MEV eTTraxa Tidvra dtsfjioipdro dat^cdv. (Od. 14, 434.)

II. The question naturally arises, upon what principle

are such violations of quantity to be explained ? Evidently

on the following : In scanning any verse, the voice natural-

ly rests longer upon the place where a long syllable is ne-

cessary than where it may be dispensed with. In the he-

roic verse we lay greater stress upon the long syllable of the

dactyl, and pause more deliberately there than upon either of

the short ones. The same preference is naturally given to

the first syllable of the spondee, which is equally long as

1. The doctrine of the digamma, however, and its introduction into

the text of Homer, still requires illustration. For an able examination of

the whole subject,consult Thiersch, Gr. Gr. p. 295, Sandford's transl.

2. Maltby, Greek Gradus, p. xii., seq. Compare remarks on Arsis,

page 50 of this volume.



96 HEROIC VERSE.

in a dactyl, rather than to the second, which corresponds

to the short syllables. We cannot pretend to know any-

thing about the way in which the contemporaries of Ho-

mer pronounced poetry. But, where so much was left to

recitation, it is probable that the difference between long

and short syllables, or those which occupied respectively

the places of long and short, would be more marked than

ata subsequent age, when

refinementmight

moderate the

vehemence of intonation, and the readier access to writing

superseded the necessity of reciting. Certain, however, it

is, that, when Ave perceive short syllables lengthened, and

cannot have recourse to the aid of a digamma, we find that

they occupy the long place of the dactyl. We therefore

account for the temporary elongation by considering the

place which they occupy in the verse;and we call it the

effect of ictus mctricus, or arsis.

III. Upon this simple principle, then, the greater part of

those metrical phenomena which have so much perplexed

the commentators on Homer will be found to receive a sat-

isfactory explanation. Thus,

avrdp 'inscT' avToloL fteXog ej^^errev/cef e(j)CEcg. {II. 1, 51.)

Here the syllable Xog in l3eXog is made long, although

short in itself, because it occupies the first or long place of

thedactyl,

and therefore receives the ictus or stress of the

voice. For the same reason, the initial syllable of dtd be-

comes long in the first of the following verses, although it

is short (which is its natural quantity) in the second. Thus,

did fiev domSog rjXde (paeivrjg 66pLfj,ov ejxog,

Kal did-ddjpTjKog iroXvdaiddXov rjprjpeiaro. {II. 3, 357, seq.)

So, again, the first syllable of "Ape^* appears both long

and short in one and the same verse; as, ~Apeg, "Apeg,

^poToXoiyi {II. 5, 31.)

IV. In both these cases, the long and unusual pronuhcia-



ELEGIAC VERSE. 97

tion is in arsis, or on the long syllable of the dactyl ; while

the short and usual oneis

in thesis, or laid onone of the

short syllables of the dactyl.

10. Elegiac Pentameter.

I. This measure, although commonly called elegiac pen-

tameter, a name which we have here, in obedience to cus-

tom, allowed it to retain, is more correctly denominated ele-

giac verse}

II. The construction of this species of verse is as fol-

lows : The first two feet may be either dactyls or spon-

dees;then comes a long syllable,

to which succeed two

dactyls, followed by another long syllable. Thus,

Scale.

1



98 ELEGIAC VERSE.

1



DACTYLIC VERSE. 99

a spondee following a dactyl than a dactyl following a

spondee,as

decreasing numberssuit the measure better

than increasing ones. The difference will be perceptible

in the following lines :

TcoXXaKt rdv avrdv|| dlq [isridrjKe Koiiav.

TTe^rjrai Xnrapov \\ ofxaaaneva TzXoKafwv.

XL This species of verse is customarily subjoined to

the heroic hexameter, thus forming the most ancient kind

of strophes, having the name of sXeyeia. It has been once

used in tragedy by Euripides (^Androm. 103, seq.).On ac-

count of the equality of its members, the elegiac pentameter

cannot well be often repeated alone. Nor has it been so

repeated, except

in the

Epigr.

4 of Philip of Thessalonica

{Brunck, Anal. vol. ii., p. 212), and by Virgil in that spor-

tive effusion, sic vos non vohis.^

11. jEolic Verses.

I. iEolic verses are composed of pure dact}ils, except

the first

foot,

whichmay

be

any dissyllabic

one whatsoever.

In other words, they are dactylic verses with a base.^ The

scholiast on Hephcestion (p. 177, ed. Gaisf.)admits spon-

dees also instead of dactyls.

II. These verses are apparently to be divided into two

kinds;the one used by the Doric poets, whom the Attic

dramatic writers followed, and the other by the iEolic lyric

poets.

III. The Doric poetry excludes a pyrrhic from the base,

admitting only an iambus, trochee, or spondee ; and, after

the base, allowing a place to spondees, also, instead of dac-

tyls.The iEolians, on the other hand, put a pyrrhic also

in the base ; the rest of the feet they appear to have kept

pure dactyls.'

1. Hermann, Elem. Doctr. Metr. p. 227, ed. Giasg.

2. By" a base" metricians mean two syllables put before a verse or

metrical clause, and which are to be pronounced somewhat apart.An

anacrusis, on the other hand, is a prefixof a single syllable.

3. Hermann, Elan. Duclr. Melr. p. 228, ed. Glasg.



100 DACTYLIC VERSE.

IV. Hephsestion mentions the following kinds of Êolic

verses : 1 .

Thetrimeter

(which maybe

termed more prop-

erly the dimeter) catalectic on two syllables ; as,

&vp(x) I pw TTodeq ETTTopoyvioc,

TO, deI odjiOaXa Txevrebosia'

mavy | yoi-6s den' Eênovaoav.

2. The tetrameter (now properly trimeter) acatalectic ; as,

epog I

(J' avrefj,'

6?ivaineh)g dovel,

yXvKv j TTLnpov aiidxdvov opnsrov

'Ardi,I

Got 6'Efiedev fiev dm]')(deTO

(ppovTia I 6riv,em 6' 'AvSponeSav ttottj.

3. The pentameter (more properly tetrameter) catalectic

on two syllables ; as,

T£CJIo', G) (piXe yafi6pe, aaXwq eiKaado)

bpira I

Kt(3padiv(i) ae fidXiar' eiKaado).

4. The pentameter (more properly tetrameter) acatalec-

tic ; as,

ijpd I [j,av [xev eyw oedev, 'Ardl, ndXai TTOKa.

5. The hexameter (more properly pentameter) catalectic

on twosyllables,

which the ancient metricians call eno^

AIoXlkov. Thus,

iciXoI jiai

TLva rbv x^'Ptevra Meioyva icaXeaaat,

el XPÎ I ovf-tnoatag en' ovaoiv enol yeyevrjoOat.

V. jEschylus {Pers. 866, seq.) has many verses of this

kind, and some of them very long, but admitting spondees,

too, after the Doric manner.'

12. Logamdic Verses.

I. These verses are generally classed withdactylic.

They consist of two, three, or four dactyls, followed by any

number of trochees.

1. This is Hermann's opinion. Bumey and Gaisfovd make them

common dactylic verses. Hcrm. Elem. Dor.tr. Metr. p. 230, cd. Glasg.—Burn. Tent. Pers. p. 40.—Gaisf. ad Hcîhccst. p. 275,



DACTYLIC VERSE. 101

II. Logacedic verses {AoyaoLdiKo, fieTpa)are so called

from their appearing to hold a middle station between songand common speech ;

the dactylic measure being thelofty

language of poetry, while the trochaic approaches more

nearly to that of ordinary discourse.

III. The form most commonly used was two dactyls fol-

lowed by two trochees, which is the same with what is

called the minor aicaic, or dactylico-trochaic of the Hora-

tian stanza in Latin poetry. Thus,

Kal rig err'| laxarl |

alalv|olicelg

|

Kpalnvocpop |

ol 6i[i'

e| ireixipdv | avpal. |

IV. To this metre may also be referred what is called

choriambic dimeter catalectic. Thus,

Tjoalv dp I ndrevodg. Chor. dimeter catalectic.

TjoalvI dpfm \

revodg.| Logaoedic.

V. Burney' gives the following scheme of variations of

logaoedic verses.

- — Called also Adonic.

- ^ — ^ Choriambic dimeter catalectic.

Logaxdic.

VI. Logacedic metre is found interspersed, among other

kinds, through the lyric poets and the chorusses of the

scenic writers.

VII. Verses may often appear to be logacedic which in

reality have other numbers, chiefly antispastic and chori-

ambic, especially in the dramatic poets. These discover

themselves both by measures in the antistrophe foreign from

logacedic numbers, and by an association with other num-

bers, which shows that they are to be reckoned among

these rather than logacedic.

1. Tenlamcn. p. Lxvi.

12



102 CHORIAMBIC VERSE.

VIII. By prefixing a base to logacedic numbers we ob-

tain a Glyconic, Pherecratic, or Phalaecian hendecasyllabic.

Thus,

—^w[

— wj

— sÎ LogacBdic.

•'••'•I

— ^ ^ —I

^ —I

-^Glyconic hypercatalectic.

— v^ wI

— vÎ Logacedic.

•'•'•I — -' — — I

v.- Pherecratic.

_v^v^|_s_|_s^|_^| Logaoedic.

.'. .'.

J

— ^ wj

— wI

— v^j

— Î

Phalacian.

V. Of Choriamhic Verse.

I. Choriambic monometerhypercatalectic

consists of a

cboriambus and a syllable over. It is also called Adonic,

and is the same as an impure dactylic dimeter. Thus,

T^(5£ /cojuii^ I el<;. (Iph. A. 156.)

—Xdg OTToadv

|

dv.{Sept. Theb. 733.)

II. Choriambic dimeter catalectic is formed of a choriam-

bus and a bacchius, or an iambic syzygy catalectic. This

verse is called Aristophanic, as it is frequently found in

Aristophanes, mostly joined with dimeters acatalectic.

fioolv dpI [xdrevadg. (Êurip.

Orest. 988.)

lidpfidposaa \

dv alyXdv. {Soph. Antig. 610.)

Kalvov onibg| (pavrjasl. {Arist. Vesp. 526.)

III. Choriambic dimeter acatalectic is either pure or im-

pure. The first consists of two choriambi; as,

fxdvrlq exAayf |

IvTxpocpepdv. {Agam. 202.)

Ik, (ppevog, a\ KAalop-evdg. {Sept. Th. 926.)

An impure dimeter admits an antispastus into either place

for a choriambus. When it occurs in the first, the verse is

called by some metricians"Glyconeum Pohjschemutistum."

Another form of the impure choriambic dimeter consists

of a choriambus and diiambus, or the contrary. Thus,



CHORIAMBIC VERSE. 103

vifjIfiedovT \

ajilv

&e(bv.

yap fjde rd^ j Iq Trrepvycbv.

IV. Choriambic dimeter hypercatalectic is not often found.

The two following verses are from Sophocles, in the latter

of which the choriambus of the second place is represented

by the diiambus. As,

rdv 6 fxeydg | fivOog de^ \ el. {Ajax, 226.)

vvv yap efiol | p,iXet %op£v j

oal. {Ibid. 701.)

V. Choriambic trimeter catalectic consists of two chori-

ambi and a bacchius. The first foot, however, is often a

diiambus, as in Eurip. Med. 431.

ov 6' £K fievOIK.

I

(bv -ndrplCiv |e-nXsvadc;.

VI. Choriambic trimeter acatalectic consists of three cho-

riamb . As,

IwpV an' alax \ p^v dvdrllX\

ovd^ oq ecp' rj.

In the following example from Euripides, Iph. Aul. 1036,the long syllable in the first foot is resolved

;and we have

a proceleusmaticus with a long syllable.

rig dp' viilval jog did Ad)

|

tov Al6vog.

VII. Choriambic tetrameter catalectic consists of three

choriambi andabacchius

; as,

el av pIY av\ xtlg erepol |

oov nXeov ov| iieXovral.

This measure is called Sappliic by Servius. Besides the

tragedians, Anacreon always employs it, puttinga diiambus

in the second place ; as,

Ik TTordnov \ irdvepxoiial \ irdvrd ({yepov | od Xdinrpd.

VIII. Choriambic tetrameter acatalectic is used by Anac-

reon, a choriambus and diiambus being put promiscuously,

except that in the end there is almost always a diiambus.

Thus,



104 CHORIAMBIC VERSE.

TTplv fiEV e^G)v I Kspdeplov,| KaXvundr' ea(p \ TJKUfievd

Kal ^vXivovg \ darpdydXovg | ev ojol ical | iplXov mepl.

nroXXdjxev

ev| dovpl rldelg

| av)(evd ttoXX'\

d 6' ev rpo^G).

IX. Choriambic verses are met with beginning with an

anacrusis;as in iEschylus, Sept. Theb. 330.'

vtt'j dvdpog "A;\;at |

ov deodev| Trspdoixevdv | dTl[j,u)g.

Of which kind some metres of the ^olic lyrics appear to

be which by grammarians are accounted ionics a majore ;

as the following of Sappho [ap. Hephoest. p. 64, ed. Gaisf.) :

evI iidp(j}orepd |

MvdaldlKd\rdc, dirdXdg

| VvplvvC)^.

dI adporepdg | ovddjj,'

eir' d)| pdvvd oedev

| rvxolod.

X. The choriambics most in use are those with a base,

which ancient metricians erroneously ranked among anti-

spastic verses. But if they were antispastic, they could

never begin with a trochee or pyrrhic, and they would have

the last syllable of each antispastus doubtful.

XI. The shortest of these verses has one choriambus;

as in iEschylus, Suppl. 42.

vvv evI TTolovonolg.

Next to that is the hypercatalectic, commonly called Pher-

ecratic ; as in iEsch. Sept. Theb. 301.

Toiiiev I yap norl trvpy |

ovg.

Then the Glyconic,in the same, v. 325.

dovXeiI

dv'ijjd(pdpd |

onodd).

The most common is the ditneter hypercatalectic ;as in

Sophocles, Aj. 628.

ovd' olicTp Idg yoov op j

vldog drj |6ovg.

VI. Of Antispastic Verse.

I. An antispast is composed of an iambus and trochee

(- 1

--)•

1. Hermann, Elem. Doctr. Melr.p. 274, ed. Glasg.



ANTISPASTIC VERSE. 105

II. Several antispasti seldom follow one another, because

these numbers have a very disagreeable and uncouth move-ment

;as if one were to divide the following choriambic

verse, with a base, after the manner of the grammarians :

KdrdvdoKSt Kv\Oepfj d6p6g |

'^Adcbvlg. rl\

Ke delfiev ;

III. To soften this asperity, the poets increased the an-

tispastus by one syllable, from which arises a dochmius

(^-' —

)iassociated it with other numbers, and made

use of frequent resolutions.

IV. The antispast being composed, as has just been re-

marked, of an iambus and trochee, any variety of the iam-

bus is admitted into the first part of the foot, and any vari-

ety of the trochee into the second. Hence we get the fol-

lowing kinds of antispast :

1



lOG ANTISPASTIC VERSE.

IX. Nor is the dimeter frequent. jEsch. Agam. 1151

1161.

vofiov dvonov olI

d rig ôvdd.

ri 6' enlcpddd 6va| cpdrib /cAayya.

X. The other kinds of antispastic verse are extremely

various. A few may be here enumerated.

Dimeter Brachycatalectic.

efiol xpriv ^vfi I (popdv. {Eurip. Hec. 627.)

Dimeter Hypercatalectic.

endi xpfiv Trfj | jxovdv yevead |

al. {Hec. 628.)

KOJTTaTxefiTTO I fjbevdv

rdXalv|

dv.{Îb. 455.)

rdXalv' ovkIt|

t <fifitdTEv \

od).{lb. 901.)

Trimeter Acatalectic.

dXX' a fiolptd ]

Id rig dvjvdalg detvd.

{lb. 950.)

Trimeter Brachycatalectic.

rdXalvd rdX|

alval Kopal \ ^pvycbv. (lb. 1046.)

Trimeter Catalcctic.

ddvpool 6' oZ\

d vlv dpd[idvT |

e (idKâl. {Orest. 1502.)

XL Among the tragic writers chiefly, the antispastus is

often associated with other numbers, mostly iambic and tro-

chaic. Of these the iambic are not such as have been pre-

viously treated of, which proceed by syzygies or dipodias,

but of another kind allied to antispasts. This kind, because

they consist of shorter orders, and, therefore, admit a doubt-

ful syllable even into those places from which it is excluded

in syzygies (whence arises a broken and feeble movement),

are called Ischiorrhogic Iambics,

XII. These verses are found even without any antispas-

tus added. Thus, Soph. Electr. 504, seq.:'

1. Hermann, Elem. Doclr. Metr. p. 147, ed. Glasg. Hermann's ar-



ANTISPASTIC VERSE. 107

0) HeXoInog d

| TTpoadev

noXvTTOV [ og Inrr | eld

€)g ifio IXeg al

| dvrj

rdde yd. |

Cretic.

evTE yap |

6 ttovt\ladelg

MvprlXog|

eKol| jua0?/, k. t. A.

Dochmiac Verses.^

I. A dochmius consists of an antispast and a long sylla-

ble, thus,-' ^ —

; and, therefore, a simple dochmiac is

the same as antispastic monometer hypercatalectic.

&e(bvfj&edv.

II. Two of these feet or verses are continually united to-

gether in such a manner, and with such various combina-

tions of feet, that almost any two penthemimers put together

may claim the name of dochmiac dimeter.

III. A pure dochmiac dimeter is not of frequent occur-

rence. The following are three instances :

Pod xpifJ'TrTeTal \

-nordral(ipsfiu. (Sept. Th. 84.)

KVKXovvral (poCog|

6' dpeldv onXibv. {lb. 114.)

SlKd Kal -deoL|

olv ov ^v^-nlrvel. (Hec. 1013.)

IV. Impure forms of the dimeter dochmiac are varied

almost adinfinitum. Thus, the

following occur in the

chorus, ^sch. Sept. Th. 79, seq. ;

[iWelTal arpdrog | orpdroTTedov Xlircbv

pel TcoXvg oj6e Xeojg | ixpodpoiiog iTTnordg.

aWepid Kovlg| fie

neWel (pdvela'

dfj-dxerov diKdv\ vdarog oporvnov

10) &eol Seal r'|

opofievov KaKOV

rangeraent, however, of these verses is opposed by Wunder, Conspect.Metr. &c., ad loc.

1 . For a more detailed account of dochmiac verse, consult Seidler, dc

Ver.iibus Dochmiacis, Lips. 1812, 8vo.—Burneii Tenlamen de Metris

ahJEschylo in Choricis Cantihus adhihihs, p. xx., seq. {Introd.).

—Malt-

by, Observal. ad Morell. Gr. P. Ltx.p.

Ixx.



108 IONIC A MAJORE VERSE.

AXevoare- fiod 6'| virep rst^ewv.

Tig dpa pvaeral j rig dp' enapKeosl;

TTenXcov Kal orlcpldv |

ttot' eIiit] vvv, dfi

—(pi.

ov t' 'Apfjg <pev (pev, \ Kddnoii enuvvfiov

ev T£ fidx^lg fidKalp' \

dvdaod rrpo iroXeibg

lib reXeiol\

reXelai re ydg :

V. A dochmiac is sometimes connected with a cretic,

either pure or resolved; thus,

enrdTTvXov|eSog enlppvov {Sept. Th. 151.)

rdaSe irvp \ yocpvXdKeg ttoXiv. {lb. 154.)

VI, Pherecratic and Glyconic verses are commonly

ranked under antispastic, but they are more correctly to be

regarded as choriambic with a base.'

YII. Of Ionic a Majore Verse.

I. An Ionic verse a majore admits a trochaic syzygy pro-

miscuously with its proper foot{

-^^). It receives also

a secondpaeon (—

— ->

--^)

into the first

place,and a molos-

sus( ) into an even place of a trimeter whole or cata-

lectic.

II. Resolutions of the long syllables are allowed in all

possible varieties.


TTTOXJGOval p,v ] %wv. {Hec. 1048.)


xXu)palg vno\ PTJaaalg. {(Ed. Col. 673.)

Kal G(b(ppdvd I7TU)Xolg. [Phcen. 182.)


fi TidXXddog \

ev ttoXeI. {Hec. 465.)

6 QlGfiodE I rfjg og dv. {Arist. Eccles. 289.)

1. These two measures have already been touched upon at page 104.

They will again be considered separatelyat page 117.



IONIC A MAJORE VERSE. 109


Ti rol TTore\rag dnXdaTOV

Kolrdg epog \

w [xdrald

GTTevoel ddvd|

rov reXevrdv {Med. 152.)


vvv d' ovTog dv\

elral arvye j pw. {Aj. 1232.)


Ikov rd Kpdr \

lord ydg Itx\

avXd. {(Ed. Col. 669.)

7. Trimeter Acatalectic.

&vdro)V f3cd\

twTrdfiTcoXv y'

|SKTog drag. {Ant. 614.)

Tdv ovd' vTTVogI alpel Tzod' o

| -navroyripcog. {A7it. 60G.)

III. The most noted kind of Ionic verses a majore is the

Sotadic (so called from Sotades, a poet of Alexandria, who

frequently employed it in his writings), or tetrameter brachy-

catalectic.

IV. The tetrameter brachycatalectic was constructed for

recitation only, not for song.' In its pure state it consists

of three Ionics and a trochee. Two trochees are found in

any place, but for the most part in the third.

V. The most usual form of the verse is as follows :

avTog ydpe

\

(bviravToye

|

VTigo ndvrd

\

yevvCbv.

VI. It is seldom that all the feet are either Ionics; as,

dv xP^^o(pop Ifjg

rovTO rv\ XV? ^(^'^^'^ ^"^

I dpiid,

or trochees ; as,

C)g -nevfigdlX

\

(bv sx^lv koI\ -nXovolog irXe

\

dv Gx^lv.

VII. The following are examples of resolutions :

Ivd' ol fisvin'

IdKpalai irvp \

alg veKveg e\

keIvto

yfig ItcI ^e\ vfig opcpdvd \ relx^d npoXln | ovreg

1. Aristides QuintUianus, p. 32.

K



110 IONIC A MINORE VERSE.

'EXXddog lep \ ffgkuI [ivxov | ioTiiig tto,

\ TpQirig

TjBrjv T* epd | Trjv Kal KdXov ] rjAlov npoa | cjTrov.

VIII. If the three remaining paeons, or the second paeon

in any place but the first, or if an iambic syzygy or an epi-

Irite be found in the same verse with an Ionic foot, the

verse is then termed Epionic.

VIII. Of Ionic a Minore Verse.

I. An Ionic verse a minore admits an iambic syzygy pro-

miscuously with its proper foot [^-^

).It begins some-

times with the third psson (--'--—

v-),sometimes with a

molossus, which is admitted into the odd places. Resolu-

tions of thelong syllable

are also allowed.

II. Anepionic verse a minore is constituted by intermix-

ing with the Ionic foot a trochaic syzyg}% anepitrite,

a sec-

ond or fourth pteon, or the third in any place but the first.

1. Monometer Hypercatalectic.

[j,eXedg [id | rpog. (^Hec. 185.)

2. DimeterBrachycatalectic.

em rdvS' laa\vdelg. (lb. 1065.)


eXdrdg dKp ] OKOfiolg. (Phcen. 1540.)

ÂBdiidvTlSog\''EXXfjg. {Pers. 71.)

êddev yap |

Kdrdixolp'. {lb. 102.)

III. Timocreon is said to have composed an entire poemin this measure.

îKeXbg KOjxipdg dvrjp

TTOTt rdv fxarep' ecpa, k. t. X.


TrdpdKXlvova' \ erreKpavtv. (Agam. 721.)



P^<ONIC VERSE. Ill


fiovdd' alo)v|

a didôva|

a.


dledlcppeva |

£ MvprlXov | cpovov.


TO yS ixrjv êlv\

Id dovadg| Aoyo^ cbaTxep \ Xeyeral.

IX. Of PcBonic Verse.

I. A paeonic verse admits any foot of the same time as a

pseon ; viz., a cretic, a Jbacchius, or a tribrach and pyrrhic

jointly.

II. The construction of the verse is most perfect when

each metre ends with a word.


onoydndg | Kvpel. (Phcen. 137.)


XdXKodsTd I

t'tfiôXd. {lb. 113.)


dlolxofJied' , I olxof-iedd. {Orest. 179.)

6po[id6eg 0)\ Trrep6(()opol. {lb. 311.)


KardaooTpv \ %6f djxfidal | yopyog. {Phccn. 146.)


(SdXolfiL xpov I

Ci ^vyddd \ [leXeov. {lb. 169.)

X. Of Cretic Verse.

I. Cretic numbers belong, in strictness, to the trochaic,

and are nothing else but a catalectic trochaic dipodia, which

consists of arsis, thesis, and arsis again.



112 CRETIC VERSE.

II. Since this order is periodic, it is plain that the thesis

cannot bedoubtful,

but consists

alwaysand

necessarilyof

one short syllable only ;but that each arsis may be resolved,

"whence it comes to pass that both the first and the fourth

peson, and, moreover, even five short syllables, may be put

for the cretic. Thus,

III. It must also be remarked, that, when several cretic

feet are conjoined in one verse, no one coheres with an-

other in a periodic order;and the last syllable of the last

foot, as every final syllable, is doubtful, and cannot be re-

solved except in systems in which, since the numbers are

continued in one unbroken tenour, the last foot of the verses,

unless it is, at the same time, the last foot of the whole sys-

tem, is subject to the same law as each intermediate foot.

IV. The dimeters are very much used by both tragic and

comic poets, and are commonly conjoined in systems, so

that the last syllable of the verses is neither doubtful nor

admits a hiatus, and may be resolved. In these systems a

monometer, too, is assumed. Thus, in jEsch. Suppl. 425,

seq. :

(ppovrloov I

Kal yevov |irdvdtKoJ^

evaibfi^ I TTpo^tvog-

rdv (pvydSd \ nrj TrpoScjg

rdv EKddev|SKdoXalg

diioOsoig\ op[j,evdv.

V. The tetrameter, too, is frequent, having the caesura at

the end of the second foot. Thus, in Simmias, ap. HephcBst.

p. 74:

[idrep w I

TTOTvld\\KXvdl vvfi | (f)dv dtpdv,

^(bpl, KvI iidKTVTrQiv II 7/pav' dXl

|

(bvjMvxoiv.

VI. Alcman used the catalectic hexameter, whence the

following verse has the name of Alcmanian.



ANACREONTIC VERSE. 113

'A(f)podt 1

Ta fxevovk \ earl, [idpy \

og d' EpaJ?, |

old iralg,

I naladel,

dKp' £77' dvdI 7]

Kd6alIvojv, a

[ifj \ fiot -dlyfiq \

rw Kviialp

XI. Of Anacreontic Verse.

I. This species of verse is generally ranked under the

Ionic a minore class ;it belongs, however, more properly

to the Ionic a majore kind.

II. The poems which pass at the present day under the

name of Anacreon are not genuine, but are the productions

of persons who lived at a much later period,and some of

whom appear to have been quite ignorant.Hence the doubt

and difficultyto which they have given rise.

III. As a great part of these poems consist of pure iambi,

we ought to rank such, no doubt, with iambic rather than

Ionic numbers. As, for example, the following :

dtXaIXeyelv \ "ArpeZd \

ag.

IV. But of those which are really Ionic there appear to

be two kinds;one with a monosyllabic, the other with a

dissyllabic anacrusis.

V. The kind which has a monosyllabic anacrusis admits

of two forms only, of which the proper one is this :

and the other, which changes the dactyl of the Ionic foot

into an amphibrach, is as follows :

VI. The first of these forms, which is very like the

Pherecratic, is found constantly employed in one ode mere-

ly,the thirtieth

; as,

at1

Movaal rov "E| poSrd

6fj 1

odadi oTE^dv\oJal,

TU)I

KdXXel ndped |oJicdv, k. t. ?i.

K 2



114 ANACREONTIC VERSE.

In Other odes it is found intermingled with the second form,

which is much more usual.

VII. The second form is employed in the twenty-third,

twenty-sixth, and twenty-seventh odes. Thus,

6InXovTog elys | XP^^^''^

TOI ^rjv TTdpfije | -dyfirolg. (23, 1, seq.)

or'Ielg

fie Bdicxog|

eXdFj.'ev

I

dovalv at[le | pljxval. (26, 1, seq.)

VIII. We now come to that species of Anacreontics

which has adissyllabic anacrusis. It has two forms, as

follows :

The first of these is much less used than the second, and

we will therefore treat of the latter first in order.

IX. This latter form is employed in the 3d, 4th, 7th,

21st,, 28th, 44th, and 45th odes. Thus,

fiSao IvvKTLolg 7x60'

\ CJpalg

crpecps I

ral or' dpKTog]

jjdij. (3, 1, ^e^".)

emI fivpalvaZg rep \ elvalg

emIXG)Tlvalg re

\rrolalg. (4, 1, seq.)

dye I ^C)ypd(f>C)V dp \ lore

ypd(f)e I ^(I)ypd(j)U)v dp |

lore. (28, 1, seq.)

X. When, in this species of Anacreontics, the anacrusis

consists of one syllable, that syllable must necessarily be

long, as arising from the contraction of two short ones. In-

stances ofthis, however,

are notfrequent. Thus,

KwI fiov fiSTelGi I x^^P(^'^- (6, 16.)

TTij I yrj peovad \ ireWovg. (22, 6.)

1. We have given Barnes's emendation, based on that ofScaliger.

The common reading is orav 6 Bukxoc eaeWri.



ANACREONTIC VERSE. 115

XL Sometimes the first long syllableis found resolved.

Thus,

Gv 6sI (fiXio^

el ye \wpywv. (43, 8.)

X<ii I

TTOcra (pepovalv |

vXdi. {lb. 7.)

and occasionally also the second ; as,

lJ,Edv I u)[iev d6pd ye \Awvrsf. (6, 3.)

ide I ndg yepdvog 56 | evel. (37, 6.)

XII. Of the middle iambi the first has sometimes a long

anacrusis, but oftener in the tragedians and comedians.

Thus,

dnoj plTTTOVTal fiep \ Ifivdi. (39, 5.)

The second more unfrequently ; as in Sophocles, jEZ. 1058,

and Euripides, Cycl.497.

(ppovl I fjwTdrovg oi\Hvovg.

emI 6s[ivialg

re\^dvdov.

XIII. The species of Ionics which we have just been con

sidering underthe

preceding paragraphis found intermin-

gled with that referred to in paragraph IX., in the following

odes of Anacreon ;the 5th, 6th, 22d, 29th, 36th, 37th, 39th,

41st, 42d, 51st, 52d, 53d, 54th, 56th, 57th, and in fragments

13, 17, and 21.

XIV. We come now to the first of the two species men-

tioned in paragraph VIII., namely, that consisting of a dis-

syllabic anacrusis, with an Ionic a majore and two syllables

over; as,

--I -I--XV. These are often formed into systems by the tragic

writers, with a monometer occasionally appended, and end-

ing with a verse of iambic form. The final doubtful sylla-

ble is excluded, as in anapaestics. Thus we have the fol-

lowing in the Supplices of iEschylus, v. 1025, seq.:^

1. Burney erroneously makes these lines Ionic a min&re. {Tent.

Suppl.w. 1013, p. 72.)



116 ANACREONTIC VERSE.

ItsI juav aarvd

|vdKTog

fidKdp I dg deovg ydvd\

ivregTToXC

\ ovxovg re Kai|

ol^fivft'

"Epd I

olvovI

TTepZ I

valovral ndX|

aiov

iiTTOIde^dads 6' on

\

dSot

fieXog- Ialvog 6s ttoA

|

Iv riiv-

ds lieI Xdaydv s^s \ tw, ]u^(5'

erlI

NeiAov|

Trpo I x^^*^ I

'^^^'^I /^^^ ^i"^ I

otS".

XV. Another kind of Anacreontic verse employed by the

tragic writers is that in which anaclasis, or the conjunction

of a third paeon (~--^ —

-) and second epitrite (- )

prevails. Thus,

XII. Of Galliambic Verse.

I. Galliambic verse is composed of two Anacreontics, of

which the last is catalectic;in this form :

II. The caesura always falls at the end of the first An-

acreontic, and is observed with great care. The following

are two lines of this measure, given by Hephagstion :

TaXAI

alfifirpog op |

eh'jg || (piXo | OvpaoL Spofid \6sg.

dig1

EVTsd irdrd\ yelral \\

Koi\ xdXiisd npord j

Xd.

III. The following Galliambics are given by Diogenes

Laertius (8, ad.fin.).

H. Stephens scanned them errone-

ously as hexameters;and Salmasius, in his eagerness to

emend them, only corrupted them the more. Porson re-

stored them to their true numbers. We have marked in

each the place of the caesural pause, that the melody may

be more perceptible.



GLYCONIC VERSE. 117

sv MeficpEL Aoyof eorl|| irpof^adelv Tfjv iSirjv

TE,v6o^6vTTore

jwlpav\\

napdrov

KaXXiicepcj

ravpov, Kovdev sXe^ev 11 (3ot yap nodev Xdyog ;

(f)voigovK e6(>JKe

jttof;;^;^ 1|XdXov "Amdt orofia,

Trapd 6' avrbv XexpiOi; ordg || eXixp^rjaaro OToXrjV,

TTpo(l)av(ogTovro dtddoiiuv

\\ aTrodvorj iSiorrjV

oaov ovTTdi- 6tb Kal ol\\ Taxe('>g ^Xde jJ-opog,

dsKaKig TTEvr' f-irl rpiaoalg \\ eaidovri -nXeiddag.

XIII. Of Glyconic Verse.

I. The first, and, at the same time, most simple and ele-

gant form of Glyconicsis a base followed by a logacedic

order, consisting of a dactyl and trochee, and terminating

with an arsis. Thus,

II. This kind of verses form systems, for the most part,

which are customarily concluded by the catalectic verse

called Pherecratic. Thus,

a6' k j yw x^P^*^ alfxdT \ fj

pdg (3p6 I x^^^^ KSKXeliiev |

a

TTEfiTro I fialKara yal \

dg. {Androm. 502, seq.)

III. The logacedicorder was subsequently changed into

a choriambus and iambus, by which the last syllable but

one was made doubtful; as,

•'••'I I"-Thus we have in Euripides, HippoL 741, the following:

rdg 7] I XEKTpo(j)deLg | avydg,

IV. The logacedic order having been divided into a cho-

riambus and iambus, it was thought fit to

vary

the numbers

by transposition, so that the iambus, being placed before

the choriambus, was changed into a spondee or trochee, be-

cause an arsis ought to follow the base. Thus,

•'•••I

- -I

- - - -

Kal Txevr) ijiidvd' | ov^Wldg.



118 GLYCONIC VERSE.

V. And again, another transposition also was made,

thoughnot of frequent occurrence, the choriarabus taking

the first place,and the base and trochee being changed into

an iambic syzygy. As,

VI. The Pherecratic verse, in which the choriambus is

not followed

by

an iambus that

may

be transposed, admits

only two forms :

Of which the last is uncommon, and used, for the most

part, only in some compound verses.

VII. The primitive species of Glyconics, which ends in

an iambus, receives among dramatic poets,at least in the

later tragedy, even a spondee in the end, so that in anti-

strophics a spondee may answer to an iambus. Thus, in

Sophocles, Philoct. 1128, 1151, we have

w ro^ov (f)LXoV,0)

(pilXibV.

rdv npoadev jSeAewv aXKdv.

VIII. A pyrrhic is excluded from the base among the

dramatic poets and in the graver lyric poetry. The rest of

the dissyllabic feet are used promiscuously by the dramatic

writers, so that any one may answer to any one. The tri-

brach is most used by the later tragedy, as in Euripides,

Ph(£n. 210.

Tvplov I olSnd XTnovg^|

eddv.

The tragedians of the same age sometimes allowed them-

selves an anapaest also ; as in Sophocles, Philoct. 1098 :

Ti 7t6t avI fxol

TO Kdr'fj \ fidp.

or a dactyj ;as in

Iph.Taur. 1144 :

'

TTdpdevog \evSoKincbv | ydnQ>v.



GLYCONIC VERSE. 119

IX. The choriambus is not imfrequently resolved, espe-

cially

in the later

tragedy. Thus,the first

syllablein

Soph. (Ed. Col. 186, 205 :

rerpofpev [

dcblXov dTvo I arvyelv.

rig (x)vI TToXvTzovog dyfj |

rlv' dv.

And in a Pherecratic; as, Eurip. Hel. 1502, 1519 :

tiuTTer I o^ievog Idux \ £i

podld I

TToXid 'ddXdaa|dg.

So also in the last syllable ; as, Hel. 1505;Here. Fur. 781 :

/3dT£I IlXeidddg vno

| {.leadg.

lofifjv' I

u)ori(f)dv6(pdp |

Idv.

X. In this other form of Glyconics,

•'••'I 33-1----

the order which follows the base may have both a resolu-

tion of the arsis and the last syllable doubtful. Whence, in-

stead of a trochee, sometimes a spondee is put, sometimes a

tribrach, and these very often; sometimes, but more sel-

dom, an anapzest also, as in Orest. 812, and Iph. Aul. 1041 :

oiKTpo I

rdrd &olv\ dfrnrd Koi.

UisI plSeg ev

|

datTC deojv.

XT. Sometimes both the long syllables of the choriambus

are resolved ; as in Eurip. Bacch. 410, 427 :

eKela'[ dye [le, | BpojxiS Bponls.

GO(l)dvI

d' dne^s \ rrpdrndd (ppsvd re.

XII. As dochmiac verses have other numbers, resem-

bling them or parts of them, both intermingled and coupled

with them, so with Glyconics, also, a vast multitude of

verses are found joined which are either like them or con-

sist of Glyconics themselves, with some part taken away

or added. These verses have usually this in common, that

they contain a choriambus joined with a different foot.



120 GLYCONIC VERSE.

XIII. The forms which are about the most in use are

these :

First,the

shortest,

_ s^ v^ —j

3 — and •'. .'.

j

—-'•-' —

Thus, in Soph. CEd. Col. 128, 160, and Eurip. Suppl 960,

968:

dg Tp£jUOjtiev | Xeyelv.

peviidrl avv| Tp^^eL

dvaal\

Qtv 6' o (iloq.

ovt' evITolg (j)di[Mevolg.

XIV. Next, with an anacrusis put instead of a base, as

in Soph. CEd. T. 467 :

(JI pa vlv dtXX

I

ddu)V

LITI

TTibv odevapu)I rlpov

(f)v I yd TTodd vG)| fidv.

XV. There are other forms longer than a Glyconic. Of

these the first is that of the hypercatalectic Glyconic.

Thus,

.'. .'.

I

- w w _[

^ r 3 and .'..'.

I

- 3I

_ s^ .- -I

3

The following examples are from Soph. CEd. Col. 133, 165,

and Eurip. Hel. 1317 :

livT I eg rdds vvv[ rtv fjnelv.

KXveigI

cj TToXviioxd' \

dXdrd.

opet I

a TTOTI

£ 6p6ndSl |

kcjAw.

XVI. Another kind often joined with Glyconics is the

following :

— ^wi* >—'

IS.-- N«/ — s_^

EKTomogjovdelg o Trdvrcjv. (CEd. Col. 119.)

XVII. Another kind is this :



GLYCONIC VERSE. 121

KaX^ioTj

a>v on6p |

dv Alodev| arepeloal. (Electr. 736.

KTeiveig \ KXeZvoJvI

avyyeverelp' | dSiXcpoJv. (76. 741.)

XVIII. The longest of the verses allied to the Glyconic

is the Phalaecian hendecasyllabic. Thus,

at T£I

valsTs KdXX\

IttojXov idp |

dv.

The more usual, but less correct way of scanning this meas-

ure, is as follows :

al re|

valersj

KdXXl|

ttcjAov| eSpdv.

XIX. Glyconics are sometimes augmented in the begin-

ning. Hence we have the following forms :

3_3|_^^_|3_and--3|-3|_^^_

Te-yyel 6' vtt| ocppval ndy \

KXavrolg. (Antig. 831.)

syKXfipov I

oiiTEI vvjxcpldlog. {lb. 814.)

XX. Another kind has a trochee inserted between the

base and the other parts of the Glyconic. Thus,

e[j,7Tal^ I

ovadj XelfidKog ij \

dovalc;. {Bacch. 865.)

TTddTJ I jtiot yew |

alibv[ fiev ndrepojv. {Cycl. 41.)

XXI. Another kind consists of a Pherecratic verse, with

a molossus or cretic. Thus,

TTEvdogI yap fieydX<l)g |

rod'| opudral. (Med. 183.)

raKOvI dvpofxevd \

aov|

svverdv. {lb. 159.)

XXII. Sometimes a bacchius is put before a Glyconic.

Thus,

L



122 PRIAPEIAN VERSE.

epcJrCov, | epcjr |tbv 6' dnenav \

oev w ] -jwot.

yevolndv, |

Iv' v\

Xdev eneOT\

I novr|

-ov.

XXIII. A verse is often found among Glyconics com-

posed of a cretic and choriambus; as in Eurip. Hel. 1356 :

fidrpog opy |dg evenei.

Pdre oe[j,v |ai XdplTig.

XIV. Of Priapeian Verse.

I. The Priapeian verse consists of a Glyconic and Pher-

ecratic joined in one. Thus,

II. Of these forms it is probable that one Avas for the

most part used to the exclusion of the rest;as by Anac-

reon :

TjpiOT I 7]ad plv Irp |

lov||Xenrov

\ fxlKpov and\ KAdg

olvovI

6' I^IthovI

Kddov\\vvv 6' d6p \

€)g Spoeaa \

dv

xpdXXo) I -nrjKTldd tt) \ (ptXfj || KOfid^ \

g)v irdid dtp \ 7J.

III. The caesura is everywhere carefully observed. This

metre appears to have been asynartete ;and hence the hi-

atus in the following line given by the scholiast on Theoc'ritus :

dv (pepo \ \ilv ndpd Trjg \

deov\\dv EKd

\

Xeaadro rrjv \

a.

XV. Of Eupolidean Verse.

I. The Eupolidean verse, which is peculiar to the comic

poets, consists of a Glyconic verse having a choriambus at

the end, and another like member, in which is a cretic in-

stead of a choriambus.

II. In the base are found a trochee, iambus, spondee, and

sometimes a tribrach. Thus,



CRATINEAN VERSE, ETC. 123

w i9eI d)jLte I

vol Kdrepoj || npog v\ fidg e

| XevOepcbg.

epvdpov Ie^ dap \

ov Txdxv rolg 11Traldl

|olg Iv

| ^v ysAwf,

XVI. Of Cratinean Verse.

I. The Cratinean verse differs from the Eupolidean in the

first portion only, in which it has a choriambus and an iam-

bic dipodia. Thus,

"ndvrd (pdprjr \

d ttuvt\

aroXfj, \ TjTa |

rcode\

rw x^P^-

II. The caesura, as in the line here given, is often neg-

lected.

XVII. Of Polyschematistic Verse.

I. This name is applied to verses v^rhose composition is

so irregular and variable that they cannot be classed with

propriety under any particular head. In other words, poly-

schematistic verses are those which consist of entirely ir-

regular feet. Thus,

OldXtrodd\ (iporojv ov6e

\

vd fxaKapl^ \

to. {(Ed. T. 1195.)

XVIII. Of Prosodiac Verse.

This appellation is given to a verse in which choriam-

bics are mixed with Ionics or paeons. Thus,


vfjfidrd &' i11Ito iTs.6(b. {Orest. 1431.)


fioXTTdv6' d-no

|

Kal xppoTTol |

(bv. [Hec. 905.)

fidoTOV vTTtp I

rtXXovr eold\

G)v.(^Orest. 833.)


Xalveolg| ~Aii(plov6g \ opydvolg. {Phcen. 114.)



124 ASYNARTETB VERSES.


fjieydXd 6i[rig Svvdixlg \

61' dXdarop \

(bv. {Orest. 1562.)

XIX. Of Asynartete Verses.

I. This name is given to those verses which consist of

two different measures united into one line.

II.

The namedenotes that the union is not a close one

(^aavvdpTrjTog,i. e.,

"not jointed together"), and, in fact,

the last syllable of the first member of the line may be ei-

ther long or short, just as if it were the final syllable of a

separate line. On this same principle, too, a hiatus is al-

lowed between the two measures. Thus,

delvdI

delvd\\nenov

|ddfisv.

Troch. syz.+Iamb. syz.'

alXivovI

alXXvov H dpxdv \

&dvdTov. Dact. dim.+Anap.

mon.

emdeiiv |

lov u)g \\ Treaol^' |eg evv

|

dv. Anap. mon.-[-

lamb. penth.

III. The metre of Archilochus is this, in which he uni-

formly observed the caesura :

"Epdaiiov I id?] Xdp j

IXds|| XPW^ I

"^^^ 7^ I

^olov.

IV. Another measure employed by the same poet, and

imitated by Horace {Od. 1, 4), is as follows :

OVK td' 6I jwwf ^dXX

Ielg and

\

Xov XP^^' II K,5,p(pe \

ral

ydp I rjdTJ.

V. Another asynartete verse of Archilochus, which Hor-

ace has imitated in epode 11, is as follows :

dXXdi^'

5I Xvai[j,e \ Xfjg ||

w' ralp \

£ ddfiv \

d ral\TTodog.

1. A verse of this kind, in which a trochaic is followed by an iambic

syzygy, or vice versa, is termed periodicus.



'W\^%'^W'VW\^^^^%ÂA'\A'V\'WV\WW\A/V\Kn^%/«VW\VW\'VW^^VW%^«^/%<^\^/%'V%A/«

PART III,

CHORAL SONGS.

(WW^WV^^/WW%/VWW%^^VWWW^V«^'\^^'VW%V\Â^W\WVX%<%i%'V«^'«^'V%î'VWW«

L2



CHORAL SCANNING'

OF THE

PROMETHEUS VINCTUS.

Vss. 114-119.

Antispastic System.

IT I r V ff

. A, a, Ea, ea.

2. Ttg dx<o ITig oSfid \ TTpoaenTd \ fi' dcpsyyrjg,

3. 'deoaovrog rj | fipoTslog rj | KeKpdfievfj ;

4. iKero Tspiiovl |

6v em rrdyov,

5. TTOVoJv inG)V I -deajpog, fj |

rl dij&eX(i)V

;

6. opdre Siofj, \ ojttjv fieSva

| TTorfiovd^eov.

1. Extra metrum.^

2. Bacchic tetrameter.

3. Antispastic trimeter.

4. Antispastic dimeter.



Vss. 120-127.

AnapvEstic Measure.

1. rov Alog| ^x^pov, ||

rov nda|

I Oeolg II

2. 6r dnexO \ dag \\ eXdovd' j onoaoZ ||

3. T^v Alug I avXfjv \\ eloolxv \

evalv\\

1. We have included under this general head not only anapaestics,

but partsof the play, also, not uttered by the chorus, but where the

measure employed is of a choral nature;as in the piece first given.

2. Exclamations, not included in any measure.



128 CHORAL SCANNING

4. did TTJv I

Xlav\\ (jylXorfj \

rd PporQv \\

5. (j)ev (pEv I rl ttot' av||

Kivddlo[i. | a kXvQ) ||

6. TTeXdg ol|

(bvibv|| aldrip [

6' eXdcppalg ||

7. nrepvycov | pmalg \\vnoav

\ plêl ||

8. Trav/xot j (f)66epdv \\

to npooepTT |

6v. (Parcemiac )

Vss.128-138 (Leipsic ed. 128-135).

Strophe/3'.

1. MfjSev (pod?'] I 6fjg- (plXld

2. yap T/cJe rd^ |tj* TTrepvycJv

3. doalg d^lXX |atf 7Tpoas6d

4. rovds Trdyov, | ndrpuydg5. lioylg ndpelTT |

ovaa cppevag'

6. KpalTTvd(f)op \

ol 6sfi'

e\ TTsiiijjdv | avpar

7. KTVTTOv ydp d| ;\;w ;:t;aAi;6of

8. dixiêv dvrp \

(bv fivôv, Sk 6'

9. e-nXfj^s jiov |

10. rav dsjjiepoJTr |

iv attJcJ" crv-

11. i9^v d' ftTTfiIdtAof o;^; |

w Trrlp j

cjroi.

1. Glyconic polyschematistic.

2. The same measure.


4. Choriambic dimeter catalectic.


6. Logaoedic.



9. Antispastic monometer.

10. Choriambic dimeter acatalectic.

11. Logaoedic.



OF THE PROMETHEUS VINCTUS. 129

Vss. 139-146 (Leipsic ed. 136-143).

Anap^stic Measure.

1. At alI

al at||

2. TTJg-noXv

\

rlnvov \ Trjdvog \ iKjovd ||

3. Tov mpl I

-ndodv &'\\elXlaa

| ofievov 11

4. %0ov' dKolfi I 7/TCJ II pevyLdrl \iralSeg \\

5. TTdrpog w |

Ktdvov-\\ depxOfjr' \

eoldead' 11

6. olo)I dsan(o II Trpoorropn \

drog ||

7. rrjods (pap \ dyyog \\ aKdneXolg \

ev dKpolg \\

8. (ppovpdv I d^rj \\Xov ox'tJo \

w. (Faroemiac.)

Vss. 147-157 (Leipsic ed. 144-151).

Antistrophe j3',

corresponding line for line with Strophe ^'

1. AevocFO) IIpo/u.?] I

6ev cj)o6spd6'

2. efiolaivoca

\olg opXx^ri

3. Txpoafiê -nXfip \ fig SdKpvoJv

4. oov dtiidoela

\idovor}

6. nerpalg irpoaav \ alvofievov

6. rala6' ddd\ iidvrode. |

rolalj Xvfialg

7. viol yap olj dKovofiol

8. Kpdrova' "OXvfin j

ov veoxfJ-olg

9. 6e dfj voiiolg \

10. Têvg dderu)g\ Kpdrvvel rd

11. jrplv de tteX| upcd \

vvv a\

lorol.

Vss. 158-164 (Leipsic ed. 152-158).

Anap^stic Measure.

1. Ei ydp I fi'vTTO yfiv, 1| vtpdev r'

|

aldov||

2. tot) rt/cpo 1 6eyp.ovog \\ elg dnSp j

dvrov|j

3. Tdprdpov \7~iKtv, \\ dsajîolg |

dXvTolg \\

4. dypt(bg |TreAaadf, H w?- jur/ |

re i9eof, 1|



130 CHORAL SCANNING

6.iirJTE Tig

IdX?idg ||

roZod' ens| yrjdel- ||

6. vvv 6' aidI iplov || kIvvjii' \

6

rdXag||

7. exOpolg \ emxdpr ||a irenovd

|

a.(Paroemiac.)

Vss. 165-173 (Leipsic ed. 159-166).

Strophe y\

1.

Tig(ijd£

rXfjo|

iKdpdlog2. i9ewv ord)

|

Ta(5' emxdpfj ;

3. Ti^- ov^{ivacr;^ (

dXd KdKolg

4. reolai, di^d | ye Atof ;6 d' £7ri

| Korcog del

5.&s[j,ev6g [ dyvd^nr ||

di' vo|

oi',

6. Sdnvdrai | ovpdvi |

dv

7. yevvdv |ovde

| A?/^-

8. £iTrpiv dv

I ^ Kopecr [ ?] /cedp, | ^ TrdAd| jua

rm9. Tdv 6vod

I

Adjrov gA| ^ 7 If

| dp^dv.


2. The same measure.3. The same measure.


5. Trochaic dimeter catalectic.

6. Dactylic dimeter hypercatalectic.

7. Trochaic monometer hypercatalectic.

8. Dactylic pentameter.

9. Logacedic.

Vss. 174-184 (Leipsic ed. 167-177).

ANAPiESTic Measure.

1. "H[xfjv \

er'£[iov, || Kaltrep \ Kpdrepalg \\

2. iv yvl IoTTedalg \\ aiKi^

\ ofievov ||

3. XP^^dv Ilêl II ndfcdpcJv j npvrdvig ||

4. delâi\

to vedv\\ (3ovXev[i' | vcp' otov

||

5. OKJJTTTpov J Ttjwdf 11t' dTToaiÂ

I

dTal||




6. Kalfi'

ovI

Tt fxeXl II yXCJacrolg \ireldovq |I

7. eTzdolI

dalalv|1

-deXêl\

orepedgt'

||

8. ovnor' an\elXdg || Tcrfi^d<; \

rod' eyo) ||

9. Kdrdiifiv I

vGU)|| irplv dv e^ | dyplcbv \\

10. Seoficbv I x^ô,<^V II Tôlvdg |

re rlvtlv||

11. T^ffd' ai/cIia^ || edeXfjO \ rj. (Paroeraiac.)

Vss. 185-193 (Leipsic ed. 178-185).

Antistrophe y',

corresponding line for line with Strophe y'.

1. 2t;/j,ev &pdavg |

re Kal mnpalg

2. dvalalv ovd | ev emxdXdg,3. ayav d' eXevG

[ epdaTOjielg'

4. fjuaf de (ppevdg \ fjpldlae did| ropog (f)66og'

5. 6e6td d' ajuî |aai^" Ti;;^;ai^,

6. TTd nore[

rcJvde ttov|

wv

7.;;^p^

ae| repfid \

tceX-

8. aavr' g(7id|

eiv aKix \ 'rJTa ydp | fiOed, |

/cai/ceap

9. dndpd | fxvOov 1% \

£l upov |

oii Tra^^".

Vss. 194-200 (Leipsic ed. 186-193).

Anap^stic Measure.

1. Oid', OTiI rpdxvg II Kat Trap' S

\

avru)\\

2. TO dlKalI

ov sxôv || Zsvg- aAA'| e/xTraf [|

3. [idXdKO I yvcbficbv \\

4. earat|rrdS', ordv

\\ ravr^ | palod^- I|

5. T^v d' arep | dp-vov || oropeodg | opyfjv, ||

6. efc ap^ I /iov Ijttot ||/cat (plXoT

| ^ra Ij

7. OTTevdibv|

(nreudovT|I

t ttoO' f]^ \

el. (Parcemiac.)



132 CHORAL SCANNING

Vss. 285-305 (Leipsic ed. 277-297).

Anapaestic Measure.

1. OvK aIKovaalg ||

eneOo)|v^dg \\

2. Tovro, Upofi I TjOev. ||

3. Kal vvvj EXd(t>p(b \\ ttoSI Kpal-nv \

oavrov H

4. -ddKovj TTpoXiTTOvo' , II aWepd |

&' dyvov \\

5. TTOpOV 01I0)V(bV, I O/Cptd I

£(T(7^ |1

6. xôvX Trjd I

e ueAw'll rovg oovg

j

dg novovg ||

7. %p^C<^ I

dmTTavTli 6g dKova

]

c(.(ParcBmiac.)

8.TjKU)

I ddXixfjg il repiid ksXj

£v9oy||

9.dldfielil) I dfxivdg H upof <7£, ITpu// | ^0£v, ||

10. TOV TXTEpvy I WK?/ i|T0I'(5' Ot

|

ibVOV|j

11.yvwiii] j arofUMV \\ drep ev

|

dvvojv||

12. rai^- aai^-|

dg Tvjât^, || ladl, ovv| dAyoi- ||

13. TO, re yap | [le, 6oK(b, \\ ^vyysveg |ovribg \\

14. eodvdyK \dêl, \\ %wpic ]

re yevovg \\

15. ov/c fiCTI

Iv dro)\\ iielôvd | fiolpdv \\

16. velixalfi,', \ rj aol.\\

17. yvGioel |

de Ta(5' wa|| ervfi',

ovS|

£fidrriv |I

18. x^plro I yXCjooelv H £Vtiitor | 0£p£ yap ||

19. OTJualv', I0, rl XP^ II

<ôi^^^|t* | "updoaelv ||

20. oi) yap |

ttot'£p£t^, || ibg '9.

|

Kidvov\\

21. ^tAo^" tiarI

l (3e6al || orepog \

aol. (Paroemiac.)

Vss. 405-413 (Leipsic ed. 397-405).

Strophe 6\

1. l,Tev(o oe rag| ovXofilvdg

2.

rvxdg, Upoi^fj| 0£i}, ddKpval-

3. GTdKTOV 6' an' oaa|

wv pddlvibv

4. peof, Tcapel |

av vorlolg

5. ereyê ndy \ alg- afxeydp-

6. rd ydp rdde|Z£vf ISlolg

7. vofiolg Kpdrvv|cjv, vnepf]-




8. ^avov dSolg\

rolol Trdpog

9. delKvvotvalXfJ'dv.

|









9. Dochmiac monometer.

Vss. 414-422 (Leipsic ed. 406-414).

Antistrophe 6\

corresponding line for line with Strophe 6'.

1. UpoTTdad d'rj \ 6rj

orovdiv

2. AeAdKe;\;wp |

a, iieydXo-

3. axiil^ovdr' dpx \ al6TTps.-nfi^

4. orevovol rdv|

adv ^vvofial-

5. fxovcJvre

rlfi |dv, ottoooZ t'

"

6. sTrotKov dyv \dg "Aaldg

7. eSog vsfiovT jal, fieydXo-

8. OTovolai oolg| 7T7jjxdoi

ovy-9. Kd[x.voval &vrjrol. |

Vss. 423-427 (Leipsic ed. 415-419).

Strophe e.

1. KoXxid 1og re

\\ ydg ev|

oTkoI\\

2. TrdpdSv I

ol fidx ^ dg d\ rpearoi ||

3. Kttt iKvdIrjg oil 1| iXof |

ol ydg ||

4. eaxdrov rot:\

dvdficj)t

Mal-

5. CiTLV exova |

I Xliivdv.

1. Choriambic dimeter.

M



134 CHORAL SCANNING

1. Trochaic dimeter acatalectic.

2. Tlie same measure.




Vss. 428-432 (Leipsic ed. 420-424).

Antistrophe £,

corresponding Hne for line with Strophe e.

1. "Apadl Idg t' dp |

elov|dvdog, ||

2. vipl I Kpfjfjivdv II1?' ol TToX

I land ||

3. KavKda|

ov TveX\dg vejj. |

ovrai, ||

4. ddlog arpdr | 6f, o^vnpojp

5. of(76 Ppifiibv I

£Valxfi'alg-

Vss. 433-444 (Leipsic ed. 425-435).

Antispastic System.

1. Movov 6?] npoad \ iv dXXov sv | ttovoIoTv 6d^-2. evr' aKdfi \

dvrdde\rolg

3. Tlrdvd Xv/ialg \ eloldo^dv -d^ecbv,

4. "ArXdvO', 6g al\

ev vTrepocpov

5. adevog Kpdralov |

6. OVpdvl I

ov T£ TTO/lI

ov

7. vCiTololv V7T0IfSdard^el.

8. jQoa de TTOVT|log iiXvdo)v

\ ^vfi-

9. TTl-nrdiV, orevel\fivdog, KeXalv

\og d'

10. dldog VTTO\ Pptjiel fivxog \ ydg,

11. TTdyal &' dyvopp \

vrdyv Trora/idJv [

arev-

12. ovolvI dXyog || olKrpov. |



3. Docftmiac dimeter.





5. Doclimiac monometer.


7. Antispastic dimeter catalectic.

8. Antispastic dimeter hj^ercatalectic




12. Trochaic dimeter brachycatalectic.

Vss. 535-546 (Leipsiced. 527-535).

Strophe $-'.

1. MfjSdfi' I

TTdvrd vifi \

djv

2. -delr'ifi

I a yvd- \

3.\ia Kpdrog \

dvrlna\

Xov Ztvg,

4.[iTid'

£I

Xlvvv-II

5. aaliiii?£

|ovg oal

\alg &olv-

6. alg TTOTiIvloaons. \

vd

7. (iov(povI olg, -nap'

||

8. QKedvI

old rrdrp \og

9. dablGTOv rropov,

10.fiTid'

dXirI olid Aoy [ olg-

11. a/lAaI [lol

rod'|| ejtijwsv |

ol, kol||

12.iirjTTor' I

g/cra/c|| e«].


2. Trochaic monometer.

3. Dactylic trimeter.






9. Doclimiac monometer.




136 CHORAL SCANNING

11. Trochaic dimeter.


Vss. 547-558 (Leipsic ed. 536-548.)

Antistrophe g-%

corresponding line for line with Strophe f'.

1. Hdv rl I ddpadXe\ alg

2. rov jiaKp |

ov teIv-||

3. elv j3cdv \eXtxXgl,

| (pdval^

4. &V110V I

dXdalv-||

5. ovadv EVI evcppoavv [ aif

•

(pploo-

6. Q 6e G£\ depKOfiEv | j)

7. iivpl Iolq fioxd- II

8. oig didI Kvalofiev |

ov.

9 * * * * * * I

10. Z^va yap |

ov Tpop^e \u>v,

11. sv 161\

a yvwjti H ^ oed\

el &vdT-\\

12. ovgay

| av,

Upon\\ fjdev. \

Vss. 559-567 (Leipsic ed. 546-553).

Strophe ^'.

1. $ep' OTTw^-I d^dplg || %ap<? w

| (plXog eln-||

2. e TToi) I Tif cAkII

d3. rlf £05 I fiepluiv ||

4. ap^l jIg' ov6'

II idepxO \ ^5"

5. oAtyo I dpdvlrjv ||

6. aKtI

/cvv loII ovetp |

ov a||to

<J)ojt |

wv

7. dXdovI

* * *II yevof ejtt | 7T£7Todl(7[J,- \\

^

8. ivov ovI

TTore rav |1 Alog dpfi [ovldv ||

9. &vdTO)vI Tcdpe^ ||

ta|

al /3oi;/l ||at.

1. A line is wanting here to answer to the corresponding one in the

strophe.

2. A trisyllabic word is wanting in this line. Blomfieldsuggests

fiEpoTvuv ; Burney uXaiJg, changing at the same time the precedinga?i,adv into oAauv.



OP THE PROMETHEUS VINCTUS. 137

1. Anapeestic dimeter.

2. Iambic monometer hypercatalectic.

3. Anapaestic monometer.

4. Iambic dimeter catalectic.

5. Anapaestic monometer.

6. Iambic trimeter catalectic.

7.

Anapaesticdimeter.


9. Iambic dimeter hypercatalectic.

Vss. 568-576 (Leipsic ed. 554-561).

Antistrophe^',

corresponding line for line with Strophe ^'.

1. Ejud^ov Irdde, odg || TxpoaWovq'

|oXodg ||

2. Tv^dg, I Updiifj \\ 6ev-

3. TOdldiicp I

idlovII

4. ds[xol I [xeXog || TTpoaeirr |

d

5. rod', eKsZv\

o 6' o, t'dfj,- ||

6. (pi Xovrp I

d teal\\ Xexog [

gov v\\ fieval \

ovv

7. lordI

tI ydncjv, \\ore rdv

j ofiond- ||

8. rplov edv\ olg d

\\ ydyeg "H|

olovdv\\

9. mdu)VI ddfidpr ||

a koIv| oXeKrp \\ ov.

Vss. 577-581 (Leipsic ed. 562-566)

AnapjEstic Measure.

1. Tig y-ri, |

tZ yevog, \\rlvd 0(5

|

Xevaaelv \\

2. Tovde ;^aA |Ivolg \\

iv Trerplv |

olalv||

3.%etjtia(^ I

onSvov; \\

rlvogd

\

nXdnldg||

4. TTolv alg\

oXIkeI; || arjfifjv \

ov, onrj \\

5. yrjg rj \ fioyepd || nenXdvTJ \ (xal. (Parcemiac.)

M2



138 CHORAL SCANNING

Vss. 582-607 (Leipsic ed. 567-588).

Antispastic System.

1. *A a, ea ea-

2. XP^^^ "^ ^^1^^ I

'''S^Xalvav olarpog,

3. eld(::)Xov 'Apy |

ov yfjyevovg, \

dXev' w da,\ (potovâl

4. rovfj,vplu)7T I

ov elaopojg |

a (Sovrdv.

5. 6e TTopevETal | doXlov oixfj,' e%wv,

6. ov ovds K&r|

ddvovrd yal ]

d Ksvdel.

7. dXXdfie

rdv\

rdXalvdv

8. e^ evepu>v nepcjv \Kvvfjyerel,

9. nXdvd re vrjar \

Iv dvd rdv ixdpd \

Xldv ipafiiôv,

10. V7T0 6s KfiporrXdcr | 6g orodel 6ovd$

11. dx^Tdg I

12. vTTvddordv voixov. J

13. Id) i(o,I

nol Txol, Txd ttcj,

14. ttG) TTcJ-nfi fj.' dy \

ovolv rTjXe \ irXdyKTolixXdvol.

15. rl TTorejit',

w|Kpovle rral,

16. rl TToreralod' ev

\

e^sv^dg evpCov

17. diidprovodv \

ev irrjiidvalalv

18. e "e.

19. olorpfiXdrib61

\ 6el\idTl6elXaldv

20. -ndpdico'novu)6e

;| relpslg nvpl (pXeôv,

21.rj xôvl icdXvipov, \ rj

ttovtIoIgIv

22. 6dKeol 6dg Pop \ dv, iirj6e [lol

23. (t)6ovTiofig evy \ iidrCJv dvd^.

24. d6fjv jLteiroXv

\TtXdyicTOL

-nXdvai

25. yeyvfivdud \alv, ov6' £%cj

26. ftd0£tv OTTTJ 7T7J j fiovd^- dXv^Q.

1. Extra metrum.

2. Dochmiac dimeter.

3. Antispastictetrameter catalectic.

4. Antispastictrimeter catalectic.





6. Antispastic trimetercatalectic.


8. Dochmiac and antispastic.

9. Antispastictrimeter.


1 1 . Cretic monometer.



14. Antispastictrimeter.

15. Cretic dimeter.

16. Antispasticand dochmiac


18. Extra metrum.









Vss. 613-629 (Leipsiced.

594-609).

Antispastic System.

1. Uodev eiiovav rrd

\ Tpog ovojj, dirvelg

2. etTO fxol I

3. TO, iioyepa, rig wv,]rig apd \i\

(o rdXdg,

4. rdv rdXal\ TTCJpov Cod'

5. ervfid 'iTpdodopelg \

6. -SedoavTov\

6S voaov ajvofidadg

7. a ixdpalv \

el|U£ XP'- 1

^^^"' '^^^'

8. Tpolg (polrdXeololv.

\

. fe- f.



140 CHORAL SCANNING

10. OKjpT7Jfj,aTu)V6e

| VTJoriaLv alKial^

11. XdSpoaovTog rjX ]

dov smtcorol\

aiv[iridtolv } ddiielod

12. dvodalfiovcov |

6e rlveg, ol, e e, ot'

13. eyu) [xoyov |

alv aAAafiol

' 14. Topwf rtK\if\p6v, I

b rl\i ETid\i\itvu

15. nddelv rXnrj XPV' I

'''^ (pdpfidKOV

16. voaov, delôv, el\ irep oladd -Bpoel,

17.

^pdê

rdjdv^TTrAavcJ

| rrdpOevu).


2. Cretic monometer.

3. Doclimiac dimeter.

4. Cretic dimeter.


6. Antispastic and dochmiac.

7. Cretic trimeter.


9. Extra metrum.


11. Antispastic tetrameter catalectic.

12. Antispastic and dochmiac.



15. Dochmiac and antispastic.


17. Cretic trimeter.

Vss. 706-718 (Leipsic ed. 688-694).

Antispastic System.

1. "Ea ea.

2. direxS <j)£v- \

3. ovtzot' ovttot'] rjv-

4. x^'^ êvovg fioX \

el-

5. adal koyovg \




6. eg aKO|

dvsfj, ||

dv

7. ov6' Cjde 6va \ Oedrd, Kol | dvaolara8. TTTifidrd, Xvixdrd |

9. delfiaT' djxcp- |

10. rJKel KevTpC) ipv [ %£tv ipvxdv efidv

11. 10)t(x),

\

12. fiotpd, I fiolpd, TTecpplK,' |£l<;-

13. Idovad npa^ |cv ~lovg.

1. Extra metrum.

2. Cretic measure.

3. Trochaic monoraeter hypercatalectic.




7. Antispastic trimeter catalectic.





12. Pherecratic, commencing with trochee.

13. Antispastic dimeter catalectic.

Vss. 898-908 (Leipsic ed. 876-885).

Anap^stic Measure.

1. "EAeAev,]eXeXev, \\

2. vnofi'

av| o(f)dKeXdg ||

Kal(ppevo | nXrjyslg H

3.

fidvlalIddXTTOva', ||

olorpovj

d'

dp6lg||

4. %pfei I fi' dnvpog. ||

5. Kpddld I

6e(j}66(b \\ <ppevd XdKT

|l^el. \\

6. rpoxodlv j

eirat||d' onjmd' e

\ Xlydjjv, |J

7. e^ai|

de Spojiov \\ (pepofial, \ Xvaafjg \\

8. TTvevfidTL I p-dpyu), \\ yXoJoafjg | dKpdrTJg- j|



142 CHORAL SCANNING

9. '&oXepol I

Si Xoyol 11 Tralovg\

elicf] \\

10. GTvyvfjg I irpog kv II fj^dolvdr

\ fjg. (Paroemiac.)

Vss. 909-918 (Leipsiced. 886-892).

Strophe tj.

1. "H oocfidg, I rj a6(pog \ fiv, og

2. TrpwTO^ 1

ev yvwjU- |1

3. a rod' e\

ddardae\

Koi ylCiGa-

4. a dUI fivdoXoy \ Tjaev,

5. cjg TO1 KTiSeva- \\

6. al Kdd' 81

avTov dp \

larev-

7. si fidKp 1

w- Kal 11 p]T£ I

TOJv ttXovt- II

8. TO) diai dpvTTTOfiev,

\ (bv,

9.jtt^re I

Twv yev- \\

10. r-a /ieya ] Xvvdfxev \

cov

11. ovrd1 ^epi'J) II

rav e| pdarev 11

ffat.











11. Trochaic dimeter hypercatalectic.




Vss. 919-929(Leipsic

ed. 893-899).

Antistropherj,

corresponding line for line with Stropherj.

1. M^TTore I fiTinoTe | fi'w

[lol-

2. pal*

I

* * V3.

*Xe^s I

G)v Atog |

evvd-^

4. TEipdv 16I

oiode ttSX|

ovadv

5.|U^(J£ I

nXddel-\\

6. ^v yajue |

rd rlvl|

Twv i$

7. ovpdv I

ov* rdp6 |1w yap | dorep- \\

8. ydvopd | rrdpOevl |

av

9. eicrop | wf' ta-1|

10. ovg fieyd \ ddTrroiis \

vdv.

11. dvanXd\ volg "Hp l dg dX

\

drelII dg'

Vss. 930-938 (Leipsic ed. 900-905).

Epode.

1. "Ejuot 6' orlfiev | ofidXog o yduog

2. d(^o66g, ov|

3. dedtft'I jW^de |1 Kpelaaov- |

4. wv i9eI

(Jv £p II (x)g

^

5. d(pvKTOV ofifj, I

a TTpoodepKolro jtt'.

6. dTToXefiog odi\ y' 6

TToXEfj-og, dnopd

7. TTopliiog- ov6' e;^w |rig dv ytvolimv

8. rdv Atog ydp \ ovx' opd

9. fiTJTtvOTTd

I (pvyolj-i'dv.




1. Four syllables wanting : ~—|

2. A syllable wanting.



144 CHORAL SCANNING


5. Antispastic and dochraiac.

6. The same measures.




Vss. 1075-1128 (Leipsic ed. 1039-1092).

Anap^stic Measure.

1. 'ElSoTLI

Toliiol II

rdad' dyy \eXidg \\

2. 66' edu)Ivêv, || -rrdaxelv |

de KaKtbg ||

3. EÔpov vn'I Ex9pu)v, \\

ovdev d\ELKeg. ||

4. Tzpog ravr', \ ett' e/xoI \\ plTrread )d) fiiv ||

5. TTvpog dfj.(p I 7iKF]g \\ j3darpvxog, \ aWfjp 6'\\

6. EpeOl^ I

Eodd)II f3pdvTfj, \ acpdKeXd) t'

||

7. dypldiv I dvEfidtv \\ ^66vd 6' ek\ TrvdfiEVOJV ||

8. avralg\ plâlg || nvEvfid Kpdd \

alvol, \\

9. KVfld 6eI

TTOVTOV\\ TpdÊl \ podld) |i

10. ^vyxiô I

eIev||rd)v r' ov

\ pdvlibv ||

1 1 . darpd)v Idtodovg, || sg te keX

|

aZvov|I

12. Tdprdpov [ dpdfiv || pii/jei [

£ defmg \\

13. rovjiov, d\ vdyK7]g || OTsppalg \

dlvalg ||

14. TTdi'TojgI ejUe y' ov

||-ddvaToja

\

eI.(Paroemiac.)

15. TolddsI

[levTol\\to)v

(ppsvo|

nXfjKrdjv\\

16. jSovXevjj, I

ar' Itt^ ||t' scrriv a/c

|

ovaal.|[

17. Ti yap eXX|

etTrei|| ju^ ndpd \

nacEtv; \\

18. £1nfid' I aTi;;:^;'^^ ||

rl -xdXd j fidvlcjv ; ||

19. aAA' ovvI vfj.£jg \\ y' ai

tt^^w | oavvatg \\

20. ^vyKdfiv j

ovaal\\ ralg rovd

|e, ronojv

\\

21. /i£Ta TToiI ;:^;a)p£tT' || e/c t6Jv(5 | e doiog' \\

22.//?/ (f)pEvdg I -DjUdJv || ?/Ai0i ] ibafi ||

23. (SpdvT'Fjg| fivKfjfj,' \\ dTEpdfj,v |

ov.(Paroemiac.)

24. "AAA6 TtI ^d)vel ||

aai rrapa | [ivdov fi' \\

25. 6 Tt KalI TTetcrfit^" ||

ov yap | (J^ttow

||




26. TOVTO ye | rXfirov |1 ndpsav| pdg enog \\

27. 7T(bg HE KeX[evelg || KdKdrrJT' \

daKslv\\

28. fierd rov6'|

6 rl XPV II T^daxelv |

IBeXdi ll

29. TOT?-?- yep I TTpodordg \\ nlaelv | s-iiddov |1

30. KOV/C £CTTI

i i^OCTOf, ||

31. T^(T(5' ^v I

Tiv' dnenr\\vad [xaXX \

ov.(Paroemiac.)

32. "A/IA' ovvI [.i£jj,viiad' , \\ dyoj \ TrpoXeyd' |

33. jti^fJe Trpog | ar^f||

i^^pa | delaal\\

34.fiefiipfjad' |

£rvx'>']v, 11 jw^de rror'

| elnrjO' \\

35. w^ Zei;f| i}jUtt5" || elg dirpo \

onrov\\

36.nijfi'

ela|

eOdXev\\ iif] St^t', |

avral 6'||

37.{^jua^- I

avrdg- \\ eldvl|

at yap, ||

38. Koy/c e^| al(l)vfjg, \\

ov6e Xddp | alcjg, \\

39. et^" aTrep | dvTOV || dlicrvov| ar/y^- ||

40. efiTrXixd \ fjoiad' \\vn' dvol

|dg. (Paroemiac.)

41. Kalfifjv I epyw ||

kovk em| iJbvdu) \\

42. %0wv oeadX|

evrar||

43. (ipvxld I

d'?/;\;aJ || Txdpdiiv \

ndral||

44. j3pdvrf]g, |eXiKeg II

d' eKXdf^n |

ovai|j

45. OTepoTTrjg, | ^drTvpol, || OTpojj,6oi |

de kovIv||

46. elXlaa|

ovar|| GKlprd \

6'dveficov |

47. Ttvevfidrd \ndvrojv, || etc: oA/L

| ^Aa ||

48. ordatv dv|

tIttvovv\\ dnoSeiK

| vvfievd- ||

49. ^vrsrd| pdfcral \\

6' aWfjp |

Tzovrih.||

50. Toldd'I

err'fjwot

|| pt-rr^ j

Alodev||

51. Tev;^;©*;^ [

a (l>6bdv || <7T£t;;t;et | (fydvepuig ||

52. wjLtTJ I rpof ejti^^ H oeddg, w

|

irdvTdv||

53. ai^jjp I

Kolvov\\ (f)dog elX

| laaibv, ||

54. eaopdg \ ju' wf e/c||dt/ca

rraa;^ |

d». (Paroemiac.)

N



CHORAL SCANNING

OP THE

AJAX FLAGELLIFER.

Vss. 134-171.

Anap^stic Measure.

1. TeXdfxCiv I le nal,||

Trig dfuf) [ Ipvrov||

2. 'LdXafuv |6g e-i^wv |1 jSdOpov dyx \ ^dXov, \\

3. Gefiev Ev

\ npdaadvr' || Imxcup |

w. (Paroemiac.)

4. 2e d' orav| TrXfjyfj \] Awg rj \ ^dp,evf]g \\

5. Xdyog eK\

Advdcov|| Kdwodpovg | em6fj, ||

6. p,iydv OKV|

6v£;^;63, ||

KaiTte(()66 | 7j|Wai, ||

7.TTrfivfji; I

wf OjUjU. || a TreAst|

d(;. (Parcemiac.)

8. ~^g KoiI T^f vi}v

|1 (pdljxevfjg ( vvurog \\

9. ixeydXol | &opv6ol \\ Kdrixovo' \ fjfidg \\

10. £7Tt (JvCTIK.Xeld, il

(Te TOV tTTTT| Ojt-tav^ II

11.XeIh<I>v' I

ETTi^dvr', IIoXeoal

|

Advdcbv\\

12. jQdra Kal|Aemv, ||

13. ^Trep I 66plXr]7: || rof er' ^v | Xolmj, ||

14. ktsIvovt'I

ald(bv||

i atd^p |

w. (Paroemiac.)

15. ToZ'oC'crd|

t Aoyovf || ipWvpovg \

TrXdaaQv\\

16.fitf wr I

d (pSpel \\irdolv "06

|vGoevg \\

17. «ai acpodpd |

neldel-\\ ntpl ydp |

croi' vi;v|1

18. EVTxeloT I d Atyei,||

kol Trdg | o kXvcjv\\

19. roi) /Lef|dvrog \\ X^^P^^ \ P'dXXov ||

20. rolg aolg\ dx^olv || KdOv6pl^ \

G)v. (Paroemiac.)

21. Twv yap \ fieydXcbv \\ iljvxd)v \Islg \\

22. oiin dvapt, | dpror ||

Kdrd 6' dvjrcg £jUou ||



CHORAL SCANNING OF THE AJAX FLAQELLIFER. 147

23. TolavTI

a Xeycov, \\ovtc dv

\

tteWoI- 11

24. Trpo^- yap \ rov ix^vd' \\ 5 ({)ddvog | spirel' 11

25. Kalrol\ ofilKpol \\ ^eydXibv \ xCyplg \\

26. G(pdXepdv | rcvpyov |1 pvad TreA|

ovral-\\

27. juera yap \ fieydXibv \(ialoq a \ plar' dv, 11

28. Kal [ilydi; \ opdoW \\vtto luap \ oripibv- \\

29. dXX' ovI

dvvdrov \\ rovg dvo\fJTOvg \\

30. TOVToJvI yvwiidg \\ npodlddoK \

stv. (Parcemiac.)

31. "Ttto rocI

ovTibv\\ dvdpcov |

d6pv6el H

32. x' W^^? I

ovdev\\ adsvojxev \\ -npog ravr'

\\

33. drrdXe^\

daOal\

aov %(op |Ig dvd^. \\

34. dXX' ore| yap di] \\

ro aovofjifi' \

dTzeSpdv, \\

35.

-ndrdyova\

Iv, are\\

Trrfivibv\

dyeXal-\\

36. fieydv al\ yvmov 6'

\\v-noSsla

jdvrs.g H

37. rdx' av ef| alcpvfjg, \]

el ov (pdv \ eZ7]g 11

38. aly^ \ -nrri^el Hdv dcpQv |

ol. (Parocmiac.)

Vss. 172-181 (Leipsic ed. 172-182).

Strophe a.

1. "H. pa oe\ TavpoTTO \

Xd Alog| "Aprep^,

2. u) iieydX \

d (pdrlg |

w

3. i^drep aloxvv |dg efidg

4.

wpj

iidae-rravda

\

fiovg

em\

jSovg dye|Xaldg

5.rj I

TTOv rlvog vl|Kdg dicdpno) \

rov %aptv

6.fj pd kXv

I

ru)V evd\ pQ)V

7. ipevad I

elad dCitpolg \

elr' eXd|4>^fi6Xt \

alg

•

8.•^ I x^^'^^^'^P"'^ I

^^ '''^^ ^"^1

'^"'^''I^^

9.fioiid) I

dv £%wv fiivI

ov ddpug \ evvvx^ \olg

10. [idxdvalg £ | rladro \ XQibdv.

1. Dactylic tetrameter.

2. Dactylic trimeter catalectic.

3. Epitriticand cretic raonometers



148 CHORAL SCANNING

4. lambelegus hypercatalectic'

5. Epitriticdimeter with anacrusis, and cretic.


7. lambelegus.



10. Epitritic monometer and Adonic.^

Vss. 182-191 (Leipsic ed. 183-193).

Antistrophe a.

1. Ov TToreI yap (ppevo \

6ev y' er:' d\ plarepd,

2. TTal TeXd| fiojvd^ e6

\dg

3. roaoov, tv ttoTixv | alg ttltvcov

4. ^ j

Kol ydp dv i9ei|

d voaog-|

dX.^ dnip |

vKol

5. KalIZevg KdKdv Koi

\^olbog 'Apyel |

wv (pdrlv

6. el 6' VTTOI (idXXofie |

vol

7. kXetttI

oval [ivdovg \

ol jieyd |

Xol fidalX\ fig

8. ^ Irdg doibrov

| I^lavcpl |

6dv ysve |dg,

9.jtt^, I fifj fi', dvd^, ed',

I

0)6' e<pdX | olg kXIoIjatf

10.o/i/i' e:\;(ov,

KaK|

dv (pdrlv dpfj.

Vss. 192-198 (Leipsic ed. 194-200).

Epode.

1. ~AXX' dvdIe^ eSpdv \

cjv|

oToi)| fidnpal || wvt

2. GTTJpl^ I

£i TTOTfi|

Tttd'| djlbv j

iOJ|| OXoXxj

3. arav] ovpdvXdv \ (pXeyCbv.

4.e;:t^P I

^'^ ^'^/3pi^?

wcJ'|

a| rdpdrjrd

5. opudral ev| evdvlfi \

olg fidaa\alg

1. The lambelegus is ranked under concrete numbers, and consists of

a second epitriticmonometer with an anacrusis, and a dactyhc dimeter

hypercatalectic.Hrrm. Elem. Doclr. Mclr. p. 425, scq., Glasg. ed.

2. The last syllable of the epitriteis doubtful, or, in other words, ad-

mits a short for a long, but only when it is followed either by other

numbers, as dactylic or cretic, or by another member formed ofepitrites.

Compare the ninth verse of the antistrophe that follows.



OF THE AJAX FLAGELLIFER. 149

6. TTdvTCJV Kdyxaôvr |

o)v yXdyaaalg

7. PapvaXyfir'- ifiol |

6' dxog eordKlv.

1 . Dactylic dimeter hyperc. and Iambic dim. brach..

2. The same measures.

3. Glyconic.

4. Glyconic catalectic, with molossus following.'

5. Epitritic monometer and dactylic dim. hyperc.

6. Dochmiac dimeter catalectic.^

7. Dochmiac and antispast.

Vss. 199-218 (Leipsic ed. 201-220).

ANAPiESTic Measure.

1. Nao?- dp I wyoi H riqc;Ai

|dvroq, \\

2. yevld^ | ^^dvlibv \\dn' "Epsx^ | elSdv, |1

3.e;\;6juev | arovdxd^ ||

ol Kfjd | ofievol \\

4. Tov TeXdj ^cjvog \\ rriXodiv |

oIkov.||

5. vvv ydp j delvog, || [J^Sydg, w | iMOKpdrfig ||

6. KldgI doXepGi ||

7. Kelral\ êijuwy ||

i vogT] \ adg. (Parcemiac.)

8. Tt d' ivTjXX I

dKral\\ rrjg d

\ fiSpldg ||

9. oî)^ ^(J j

e fidpdg; \\

10. Trat TOVI ^pvyiov ||

av TeXev\rdvrdg, \\

11. Xey\ ETTel\

os Xexog \\ dovpldX |

drov||

12. GTep^dg \ ave%et || -Bovplog | Aiaf {|

13. ojcrr' oi}/c]

av at(5p || Ig tmel-n|

oi(:. (Paroemiac.)

14. Ilcj^ (J?/r I

d XeyC) |1 Xoyov dpp| Tjrov ; ||

15. davdro)| yap icrov

|| nddog sk|

Treiiafit.1|

16.

ixdvtdI

yapaAovf || -/jfiev

6\ KXelvog ||

17. vvKTepog |Ataf ||

dneXcj\ dfjd?]. \\

18. Tolavr'\

dv tdolg || aKT]vT]g \

ivdov||

1."

Catalectico (Glyconeo) interdum molossus adjicitur." {Herm.Elem. Doctr. Metr.

p. 361, ei. Glasg.)

2. Compare JEsch. Pers. 978, fj kuI tov Tlepauv ; and 678, Truaa 79eg, (^Burn. Tent.

p. .xxiii., n. xiii.; p. xv., n. siii.)

N2



150 CHORAL SCANNING

19. xelpodd I

liCTa\\ ocpayV alfi \ o6dp'rj. 11

20. KelvolI

XRV^^VPII^^ '^'

«^'^P|og.

(Parcemiac.)

Vss. 219-227 (Leipsic ed. 221-232).

Strophe (3\

1. OldvI Edfj II X,(badg

j dvdpog \\

2. aldoTTog | dyyeAl | av3. drAa

|tov, ov8

||e <j)evKT \

dv,

4. Twv fieydX \

G)v Advd|

(JJv vtto| KXii^ofiev | av,

5. rdv o fisydg | jivdog de^|

et.

6.Oijwoi, I (poSovn 11

ai toTrpoaepTT |

ov 7Tepl(j)dVT ] of

7. ddveiTIat, TTdpdTrXrjicr \ w %fpt crvy |

ndrdKrdg

8. KeXalv\olg ^(f)eo |

iv fiord,|

/cat'

9. PoTTJp Ia^" tTTTT

IIOVW

| jU-Olif.

1. Iambic and trochaic monometers.

2.

Dactylicdimeter

hypercatalectic.3. Iambic dimeter catalectic.

4. Dactylic pentameter catalectic.

5. Choriambic dimeter hypercatalectic.

6. Iambic monometer and choriambic trimeter cat.^

7. Choriambic trimeter cat., preceded by an iambus.

8. Dactylic dimeter hyperc, preceded by an iambus.


Vss. 228-239 (Leipsic ed. 233-244).

Anap^stic Measure.

1. £2fiol- I

KEldev, IIKtldlv dp \ rjfiZv \\

2. deandyr |

tv dycjv \\ ri^vde\ Txolfivdv'

1. This and the succeeding line may be united into onelogaoedic,

consisting of a base, twodactyls, and four trochees.

2. Compare the remarks of Hermann on the choriambic catalexis,

Ekm. Doctr. Meir. p. 267, ei. Glasg.



OF THE AJAX FLAGELLIPER. 151

3. b)V TTJv ] fieveao)

\\ ocpd^' enl| yaldg, \\

4. ra 6e irXevp|

otconQv\\

61^' dvepp|

rjyvv\\

5. 6vo 6' dpY \iTToddg \\ Kplovq \

dveXoJv||

6.. Tov fiev I Ke^dXrjv \\kol yXuioa |

dv diipdv H

7. pl-nrel \ -depladg \\tov 6' opO |

ov dvcb\\

8. KLovcI dFjGdg II

9. fieydv Inrr\ 6deT7]V || pvrfip \

a Xd6(bv\\

10. TralslI Xiyvpd ll ndarly \

I SlTrXfj ||

11. KUKa dsvvId^(x)V \\ prjiidd'

a| dalfiCiv \\

12. Kovdelg\ dvSpibv || t6l6d^ \\

ev.(Paroemiac.)

Vss. 240-248 (Leipsic ed. 245-256).

Antistrofhe j3\

1. ~Qpd I

Tiv'fj II 6?] Kap I

d Kd- ||'

2. Xvfifidal \ Kpvipdfie |

vov

3. TTodolvI

KXdndv \\ dpead |at,

4.7y&66v

I elpeal |a^ i^vyov | £(^djU£ |

x'ov

5. TTOVTonopio |

rat [iWelv |

at.

6. ToiafIepe(7(7 ||

ovcrtv dTrelX)af diKpdreJg

| "Arpeldal

7. Kdd'fjfi I

a)vTrecpodJifi |

at XWoXsvor[

ov ap?/

8. I'vT^aAy |

etvjttera |

Toi)(5£ twtt|£tf,

9. TOV atff'I

dirXd|| to^* tcr;;^; |

et.

Vss. 325, 328, 331 (Leipsic ed. 333, 336, 339).

Antispastics.

325. fw not not. I

328. IG)fiol fiol. j

331. tw Trat Trat.|




1. Hermann's arrangement. Compare, however, the remarks of

Wunder,ad loc.



152 CHORAL SCANNING

Vss. 340-344 (Leipsic ed. 348-353).

Strophe y' .

1. twI

2. 0iAoi vavbaral,\ fiovot efiojv ^IXdJv,

3. novol t'efifisvovT |

eg opdGi vd[ji,G),

4. Ideod\

£fj,'

olIIov dpr j

Ikvjj, \\

d (polv |tag \\ vno

I

^dXTJgII

5. dn(pl6p6nov kvkXelt|

at.

1. Iambus.'

2. Dochmiac dimeter.*^

3. The same measure.'

4. Iambic tetrameter.

5. Dochmiac monometer hypercatalectic.

Vss. 347-351 (Leipsic ed. 356-361).

Antistrophe y'.

1. iQ \

2. yevog vdldg\ dpojyov rixvdg,

3. dXiov 6g ene6dg\

eXtaaQv TrXdrdv*

4. ere Tol,\

os rol|| novdv j dedopic \\

dttoIjj, |

evCiV|1

endpic I

eaovr''||

5. aA/lttjtie avvddl^ |

ov.

Vss. 354-356 (Leipsic ed. 364-366).

Strophe e.

1. opdg rdv d^pdovv, |

rov tvKdpdlov,

2. Tov £V daiolg\ drpearov ndxcblg,

3. ev d(f)o6oLg fxe &TJpa | I delvov x^pdg ;

1. A single iambus, followed by a dochmiac verse, is of frequent oc-

currence in the tragic choruses. Consult Seidler, de Vers. Dochm. p.

115.

2. Respecting the hiatus after the shortened final syllable infiovoT,

consult Hermann, Elem. DorJr. Melr. p. 158, ed. Glasg.

3. Seidler, de Vers. Dochm.p.

15.

4. In the fust foot of this line two long are resolved into four short.







Vss. 362-366 (Leipsic ed. 372-376).'

Strophe g-\

1. cj dvoI nopog, og \\ %epi fiev \

2. ixedfjK ]

d rovg \\dXdar

\opdg, II

3. sv 6' eXiKEOO\

I j3ova|

I kol||

4. KXvTolgI

7Teoo)v\\ alnoXlolg,

\

5. epsfiv I

ovatjti ||

edei;<T|

d.

1. Anapaestic dimeter brachycatalectic.

2. Iambic dimeter.

3. Choriambic and Iambic monometer.

4. Iambic and Choriambic monometer.

5. Iambicdimeter catalectic.

Vss. 369-371 (Leipsic ed. 379-381).

Antistrophe £.

1. tw rrdvd' opojv, |

dndvrcov r' del

2. KdKcJv opydvov, | reicvov Adpriov,

3. KaKomveardrdv\

r' dXfuid orpaTOv.

Vss. 377-381 (Leipsic ed. 387-391).

Antistrophe $-'.

1. w Zev,I npoyovCiV \\ rrpondrcJjp, |

2. TTWf dvI

-6?^ai/Lt ||

vXcor|drov, ||

3. exdpov dXTji-i |

d Toi;^'|

re (5?a-ll

1. Line 360 (Leipsic ed. 370) is an antispastic monometer, al al al

alI

liice lines 325, 328, 33L



154 CHORAL SCANNING

4. odpx&g \

oXeaa\dg (idalXeig,

5. reXog\ -ddvolii \\

I Kavr\og.

Vss. 384-400 (Leipsic ed. 394-409).

Strophe ^'.

1. IwI

2. OKOTog ejiov <pdog \

'

3. epitog a) (pdevv |OTarov, wf ejxol

4. eXead',|

eXeod ||e

ju' olKfjropd

5. sXeodI

£n'-

ovTI

e yap

6. iêwv ygvof, oi;0| dfiepicov^

7. er' a^|log || (^Xenslv \

rlv' elg \\ova

\

aiv dvdp

(birCdv?

8. dXXdI jti'

5 AtII og

9. aXKi^d &£og 6-|

10. Xedplov at|/ciêt

11. TTOi TifI

ovv (pvy II ^

12. irol fioX 1

(Jv [lev \\o)

13. £i rdI //ev 00(v ||

el(f)cX |

oi

14. TolaS'ofj, I

ow TTgAII dg

15. ficjpalg I

d' dypalg || TTpooKelfi \edd

\\

16. Tidf deI orpdrog ||

(JmaAr|6f av

|| jue

17. %£(pi 00V I

evoL

1. Iambus.



4. Iambic monometer and dochmius.

6. Iambic dimeter brachycatalectic.


1. Respecting the short syllablemade long here at the end of the doch-

miiis, consult Seidler, de Vers. Dochm. p.85.

2. The word 'êuv forms one long syllable here.

3. Qui in fine trimetri addilus est pes, numero videtur trochaus se-

manlus esse." Herm. ad (Ed. R. 1318.




7. Iambic trimeter and Semantus trochee.

8. Trochaic monometerhypercatalectic.

9. Dochmiac monometer.'

10. Glyconic without a base.^





15. Iambic dimeter.

16. Iambic dimeter hypercatalectic.

17. Adonic.

Vss. 403-419 (Leipsic ed. 412-427).

Antistrophe ^'.

1. lojI

2. TTopol dXlppodol I

3. TrdpdXd t' dvrpd, Kal\ veiioq eizdiCTldv

4. TToXvvj

TToXvv|| ^£ 6dpov re

dfj

5. Kdrel\ %£t d[j,<p \\

X TpoZ- |

6. dv ^povov dXXI

ovK stI[x'

ovk

7. st'dfiTT I

vodg || exovr|

d tovt||o tI^ \ (ppovQv \\

larcj

8. d) l/cffiI fidvdpL II

ot

9. yecToveg poal |

10. ev(ppdveg "Apy|

elol^

11. OVK et'I dvdpd II ixfj

12. rovd' Id\ tjt'

ett\\ og

13. Eîp I

ecj jêy Ijolov

|

ov-'

1. Compare Hermann, ad loc. We have given his reading, although

Wunder maintains that the first syllable of oXidpiov cannot be thrown

back to the

preceding

line. The latter editor makesoXsdpLov

aiKl^cl a

dactyl (the long being resolved into two short) and molossus. Hermann,

on the contrary, makes the dochmius end in two short, resolved from one

long.

2. Compare Herm. Elcm. Docir. Metr. p. 361, cd Glasg.

3. We must read têpiu here as a trisyllable. Porson and Elmsley

prefer kêpu at once, but the Attic rille does not hold good in lyric verse.

Compare Hermann, ad loc.



156 CHORAL SCANNING

14. rlvd Tpot I

d orpdr \\ov'

15.

SepxdfjI

xdovog||

iioXovr'\

diro \\

16. "EAAav|

icJd^- ||rdvvv

|

d' dri/i 1| ibg

17. w(êTrpo | /cetjiiat.

Vss. 589-598 (Leipsic ed. 596-608).

Strophe77.

1. '^Si kXeiv]

d lidXdiug \

gu fiev \

nov^

2. vai.jetf dXtnXdyic \

rog| ev6aliiQ)v^

3. TrdcTj

iv ireplcpdvT \og al

\

el

4. eyw I

d' orX,dfi \\

o)v iraX\alog d0' ov

| xpoôg

5. ~I6alI

dnii^fiv ||

oAe<ju |

w^r dirolv|

d ju^v |

(bv

6. dv I fipWuog al \ ev \ evvuiid

7. %p6va) I rpvxonevog

8. Kdicdvj

eATTfd' 2%a;v

9. £Tijite

ttot' dvvaelv|

^

10. Tov dnoTpondv d|idÂ j

oi' d||ddv.®

r,ii4

1. Glyconic hypercatalectic.

2. Glyconic catalectic, with raolossus following.

3. Glyconic hypercatalectic.

4. Iambic monometer and Glyconic.

5. Iambic monometer and Glyconic hypercatalectic,

6. Glyconic catalectic, with molossus following.

7. Iambus and choriambus.


1. The diphthong ot in the word Tpo'tav is shortened before the suc-

ceeding vowel, and the first foot becomes a tribrach, answering to the

trochee in the corresponding line of the strophe. Compare Spitzner,

Gr. Pros. p. 7.

2. Herm. Elem. Docir. Metr. p. 362, ed. Glasg.3. Compare line 195.

4. We have adopted the reading recommended by Hermann.

5. We have adopted the arrangement of Hermann. Compare .^schy-

lus, Pers. 1055, dvV uvV avid] ; Again. 1162, tIto61 rSpQv aydvl, &c.

G." Versus

antispasto incipit, quern sequitur penthemimeTes iambi-

cum." Herm. ad loc.





10.

Antispastic

monometer and iambic monom.hypercat

Vss. 599-608 (Leipsic ed. 609-621).

AntistropheT].

1. KatjUOi I dvodepdiTEVT \

og Al\dg

2. ^vv I eoTtv e<pedp \ dg \ ib fiol fiol

3. &eLI

a fidvcd |^vv avX

|dg

4. 6v l^\ enefiip \\

o) nptv | dfjnore &ovp |

Icb

5. Kpdrovvr'|

ev ~Ap ||el- vvv

|

6' av (ppevog ol|

66C)r|«»

6. 0iA Iotf /xeya "nlvd

|of | evpijral

7. ra Trptv J

d' epyd x^polv

8. fieylar | af dperdg

9. diplXd Trap' d(plXolg |

10. fiTTSff' ETTsae iieX j

got5"

[ "ArpeZtJ |1 ai^*.

Vss. 609-617 (Leipsic ed. 622-633).

Strophe i?'.

1. ~H TTOvI

TTcAoiIIa

[xev | evrpo(f)6g d| jwepa

2. XevKU)I

de y?/p lla judr | rjp

vlv ordv|

vooovvt|

a

3.(ppevd[j,o j pwf aK

|| oi}(7^ |

4. alXlvovj

alXlvov

5. ov6' o'lKTp I aj" yodv opv \Wog drj \

dovg

6. ^OBL I dvajiopog dXV \o^vrovovg

| [iev Qtddg

7. &pr]vi]a \

el x^porrXJiKr \

ol 6'

8. £v orepv |

oiat Treaoiivr|

al

9. dovTTol, Kal TToXt\dg d

\ fivyfid | x^lrdg.

1. Iambic monometer and Glyconic.

2. Iambic monometer and Glyconic hypercatalectic.


4. Dactylic dimeter.'

1 . This veree may also be ecanned as an iambus and chonambus.

o



158 CHORAL SCANNING

5. Choriambic dimeter hypercatalectic, with base.

6. Choriambic trimeter catalectic, with base.

7. Choriambic . aonometer hypercatalectic, with base.'


9. Phalaecian hendecasyllabic.

Vss. 618-626 (Leipsic ed. 634-645).

Antistrophe i9'.

1. KpeloaCiv I yap aS H a Kevdfi \

o)v 6 v6aG)V|| jxaTdv

2. 6g eK\ Trdrpo) \\ ag i]k \

HJv yev^dg | dplar |Of

3. TToXvnov[

(x)v ~A\\ ;t;ait5x' |

4. OVK ST II Gvvrpocpolg

5.

opyalg\

sfiuedog dXk\\

tKrog o\ilX|

€1

6. c5 TXd\i I

dv ndrip ol\

dv as nevel |

TTvdeod|

at

7. TTaidbg| 6vO(p6pov dr

\

dv

8. dv ovTTI

w rig eOpsip \

ev

9. al(bv I Aid/crtJ|

av a| repOe |

rovde.

Vss. 674-686 (Leipsic ed. 694-706).

Strophe L

1. ecjypl^ I spwT II I, Txepl | xdpfjg H d' dvenr| Ojuav. ll

2. tcj, tw, ndv, Ildv,I

3. w IXdv,I

Hdv dXlnXdyicr |

e KvX-

4.

Aavi I dg ^lovoicr | iiTTOv

5. TTSTpai. Id^ dTTo

(Jefp |ddog

6. 0dv I 7]d',w

I

i9ewv xopoTTol Idvd|'

7. oITTCog [lot I

'Niiaid KvCboa|

top;^;-

8.rifj^dr' |

avrodd| ^ ^vv

|

wv i| di/>^f

9. wv ydp e| juot jueA [

el ^op \

svaal

10. ) iKdpToJv 6' VTTspITTeAdyewv fioXibv |

avd^|

"AttoAX

11.) dv

12. 6IAdXtog ev

\yvdOTog

13.e/iot 1 ^vvel \ rjg \

6t\

d navr|of ev

\\ (pp(iiv.

1. Called also a Pherecratic verse.




1. Iambic trimeter.


3. Glyconic.


5. The same measure.^

6. Glyconic, increased by a syllable before the base.'


8. Phalaecian hendecasyllabic.

9. LogaoBdic.

10, 11. Doclimiac dimeter and iambic monom. hyperc.

12. Glyconic.

13. Two iambic monometers hypercatalectic, the second

with anacrusis.

Vss. 687-699 (Leipsic ed. 706-718).

Antistrophe i.

1. eXvaI

ev alv|16v a%df |

ott' ohh H aribv\ "^ApTjg ||

2. Icj, IQ- vvv av, |

3. vvv, 0)I

TiEv Txapa XevK|

6v ev-

4. diiep {

ov neXdaal\ <pad(;

5. dou)vI

ioKvdXQv[

vewv

6. or'IAiag | XadiTTovog

|

ndXlv

7. deI

cov 6' av|

TcdvOvrd-deofi |

t' ef-

8. fivva', I evvojj,i |

a crgfi[

wv jwey [

lara

9. ndvd' 6jisy \

d<; xpov \og fxdp |

alvsl

10. > Kovdsv dvavdrjrdv \ (pdrl^alp,'dv ev

\

re y' e|'|

1 1 . 3• deXTTT II wv

12. AfIa?- fierdveyv \ (boOfj

13. -Bvnov I

r' "ArpsicJ II aif| jwey |

aAwvjj revet|

/cewv.

1. Consult Seidler, de Vers. Dochm.p.

35. The second vowel in

the verse is shortened before the one that succeeds.

2. In this and the three following verses Hermann gives a different

arrangement. The mode adopted above, however, is sanctioned by Seid-

ler {ep.ad Loheck).

3. Consult Hermann, Elem. Metr. Doclr.p. 358, sej., ed. Glasg.



160 CHORAL SCANNING

Verse

847. TTOVOg ITTOV(i> 11 TTOVOV

\ (pEpsl. \\

848. 7Ta, TTa,\

849. TTO, yap |

ovK £&\\dv ey \

oj

850. Kov6Elg \

Irdar\\drat

\ jxe ovun ||ddElv

\ Tonog ||

851. idovI

852. dovTTOVI

av kXv|iw Tiv

]

a

853.?/j(idJv I y£ vd

Ij 05- /cotv|

ottXovv \\ OfuX \

lav.

854. rl ovvdfj |

855. rrdv ear| I6^t H at TrAevp j

ov ean \\ epov |

veuvjj

856. e^eii"ovv

|

857. TTOVOVI ye ixXfid 1| of «ov(5

|

Iv slg \\ oiplv \

nXeov[

858. dXX' ov6'\ ifiol \\ 67] t7\v \ dcji' tjX \\ lov

|j3oAa>v 1

859. KeXevd|

6v a||

v^povd

|

djiov\\

dfiXol \ (pdvelg.II

847. Iambic dimeter.

848. Spondee (as part of an iambicline).'


850. Iambic trimeter.

851. Iambic monometer brachycatalectic.



854. Bacchic monometer.


856. Bacchic monometer.857. Iambic trimeter.



Vss. 860-868(Leipsic

ed.

879-890).

Strophe cd.

1. Tig dv 67]rd fiol, \rig dv (plXdirovodv

2. dXldddv i^ I

^'^ dvTxvovg dypdg

1. Or, in other words, iambic monometer brachycatalectic.




3=7] Tig 6

I Xvumd \

6CSv\

&e(jv7] pvTCJv

4.

Bdandptj

(ov

izordiiibv tdplg5. Tov Q

I [iddu II nov I

el 7x661\ TrXd^o^evov Xevaaojv

6. dnvolI oxf^rXld ydp

7.ejj,e ye rov paKptov \

dXdrdv 7tovu)V

8. ovplG) I pfj TreXdaal dpopu)

9. dX?<.'djj,evfjvdv dvdp \

dprj \

Xevoelv \\ ottov.\

1. Dochmiac dimeter.*

2. Antispastic and doclimiac monometers.

3. Dactylic dimeter hypercat. and dochmiac monom.^

4. Dactylic and dochmiac monometers.

5.

lambico-dactylic

and dochmiac monometers.

6. Cretic dimeter.


8. Cretic and dochmiac monometers.^

9. Dochmiac monometer and Ischiorrhogic iambic.''

Verse

869. ICOfiol

uolI

871. IC) rXfjfiibv I

875. Ti 6' eOTLv|

878. 0)p,oX ep,6jv

voardv|

879. 0)I pol Kdrs

j Trecpvev dv\d^

880. rovde avvv| avrdv w rdXdg

881. d) rdXal\ (pp(oi> yvvai |

886. cJ pol epdg drag\olog dp' acpdxdfjg

887. d(ppdicrdg (plXdv\

888. ey \

C) 8' 6 Trdvrd\Kdxpog 6

|

-ndvr' dlSp |Iq

889. Kdrfj I peXi) \\ad ird

\

tto,

1. Seidlcr, de Vers. Dochm. p. 13.

2. Id. p.145.

3. Id. p. 123, 127.

4." Versus 874 (859) iambico finitur ex eo genere, quod apte ischior-

rkogiami appellari posse in elcmentis doctrines metrica dixi." {Herm.,

ad loc.)

02



162 CHORAL SCANNING

890. KtlraX 6] dvarpdne |

Xog

891. 6vaI oJvvfiog

|Aldg.





879. Dactylic trimeter catalectic, with anacrusis.

880. Cretic and dochmiac monometer.

881. Cretic dimeter.

886. Dochmiac dimeter.^


888. lambelegus.''



891. Adonic, with anacrusis.

Vss. 902-910 (Leipsic ed. 925-936).

Antistrophe td.

1. efxeXXeg rdXdg\ iiêXXeg %p6va)

2. GTspeo(ppC)V dp' Ie^dvvoelv KdKdv

3. [xolpdv dI TTelpeat |

u)V|

ttovcov roldfiol

4. Trdvvv^d \

Kal (pdsddvr'* *'

5. dvsar \ evdi^ \\ eg \ ibôcppov' | exdodon' ArpelSalq

6. ovXiC)I

Gvv nddel

7. fieydg dp' rivsKelv

\ 6g dpxoiv ^povog

1." Monuit Seidlerus hunc versum conjungi posse cum seguenti in

unum hexamclrum heroicum. At recte me moniiit Hermannus, non so-

lere tragicos versum ilium ita nude ejusmodi numeris adjungerc, quotessunt qui atiteccdunt et sequunlur," {Wunder, ad too.)

2. In the common text, verse 883 (Lcips. 905) reads as follows, tlvoq

Kof dp' inpaÊ jetpi dvdfiopoc, and is an iambic trimeter. Hermann,

however, gives spê for lirpaê,and makes the line consist of an iambic

monometer hypercatalectic and iambic dimeter brachycatalectic.

3. Consult page 148, note ].

4. Two syllables wanting to complete the line. Hermann reads upa.

Elmsley prefers ava^.




9.* * * * oTxXuiv

I

ekelt'I dyu)V | nepl. |

'

Verse

911. fw[lol fiol I

913. l(bfiol fjiol I

917. ^vvav6G)|

920. o)/[iO(, dvaXyfijibv |

821. dtaI

crwv e0po | fiodg dv|

cvdov

922. epyov 'Arp |

stda^' rC)6' dx^l

923. dAA' dnslpy \

ol &edg

928. ^ pa KeXalvibTTdv| dvnov e(pv6pl^ecg

929. 7ToXvT?idg dvrjp |

930. ye | Aa de roiffi | [lalvoiie. \ volg dx^ \ olv931. TToXvv

I yeXo)T ||a 0ev | 0ev

932. ^vv Tfi dnrA|

ol (3doiX| ^5*

933. kXvIovref "Arp (

eldai.

The scanning of these verses, from 911 to 933, corre-

sponds, line for line, to that of verses 869-891.

Vss. 1136-1140 (Leipsic ed. 1162-1167).

Anap^stic Measure.

1. saral| fieydXrig || eptdog |

rig dyOiv ||

2. dXX^ u)gI

dvvdaal1| TevKps rdx \

vvdg ||

3. anevadv|KolXrjv \\ Kdnerov

|

rlv' Idelv\\

4. Twd' evdI

a (iporolg ||rov dei

| jj-vfjordv \\

5. rdcpov ev\ poJevr \\

a Kdde^\

el. (Paroemiac.)

1. Four syllables wanting at the beginning of the line. Brunck re-

ceives into the text the supplement given by Triclinius, namely, 'A^t^-

Muc ;but Musgrave, with more probability, suggests •KpvcodiTuv, which

is approved of by Hermann.



164 CHORAL SCANNING

Vss, 1158-1164 (Leipsic ed. 1185-1191).

Strophe i/3'.

1. Tig dpd Ivedrog || eg Txore

\ Xi]-

2. ^el TToXvnXdyKT|

djv ereibv| dpldfiog

3. Tav dI

TTavCTov||atev

e//ot

4. (Jop I

vaaovTcbv| noxOiov^

5. aI

ravendyiov

|

ava

6. ravIevpdySf] \ Tpoldv

7. SvgI

rdvov oveZd I or EAAavwv.



3. Trochaic and choriambic monometers.

4. Glyconic.




Vss. 1165-1170 (Leipsic ed. 1192-1198).

Antistrofhe tj3'.

1. 6(pe.Xl \ npoTepov || aWepd \

Svv-

2. at fieydv fj |

rov TrdXvKolv|

ov dddv

3. Kelvog | dvrjp \\ og arvyepdv

4. £Idel^ev onXuv

|

"EAAa-

6. GLI

Kolvov "Apy'iv |

icj

6. 7T0VI

oi TrpoyovoZ |

novibv

7. Kfeti'I Of yap t-rrepa |

sv dvdpconovg.

1. A molossus here takes the

place

of the choriambus, and so also in

verse 6. Compare Hermann, Elcm. Doclr. Mctr.p. 360, ed. Glasg.




Vss. 1171-1182 (Leipsic ed. 1199-1210).

Strophety'.

1. eicelvI og ov 11 re arecpdvibv

2. ovre (iddelj

dv kvXIkcov

3. veliiev eiiol | repiptv ofilX |

£t

4. ovj

re yXvKvv avX|

tji' oroSov

5. dvanopog ovr'(

cfvi';^iav

6. repiptv lav|

eiv

7. epwTwv I

8. £pwr I

wv 6' dnenav|

trev wjuot

9.Keijti I

ai 6' dutplnv |o^- ovrwf

10. dI

£i TTVKLvaig|

dpooolg11. reyyo^evog | KOfidg

12. Xvypdg | fivrjfidrd Tpol \ dg.

1. Iambic monometer and choriambus.


3. Choriambic dimeter hypercatalectic.

4. Choriambic dimeter, with anacrusis.


6. Choriambic monometer hypercatalectic.


8.

Glyconic hypercatalectic,with base.

9. The same measure, with anacrusis.


11. Choriambic monometer and iambus.

12. Pherecratic.

Vss. 1183-1194 (Leipsic ed. 1211-1222).

Antistrophe cy\

1. Kal TTplv I

uev ovv \\ evvvxiov

3. deliidrdg Tp | juot irpoOoXd



166 CHORAL SCANNING OF THE AJAX FLAGELLIFER.

3. Koi l3eXeu)v | ôvplog AT|dg

4. vvvI

6' ovrog dvelr|

al arvyep(b

5. dalfiovc rigj fiol rig ir' ovv

6.rep-ipig e-ntOT

|

al

7. yivoljidv |

8. tV -yAI

aev eirear|

t ttovtov

9. TTpo I pXrjfi' dXluXvar|

ov dKpdv

10. L'TTj

TvXdKd liOVV|

iOV

11. TCf itpcf IOTTW^

12. npoaelTT | ot/itv "Aâ]valg.

Vss. 1374-1392 (Leipsic ed. 1402-1420).

Anapaestic Measure.1. dXtg fi I 6fj yap |1 izoXvg Ik

\

rerdral

2. xpo'iôgdXX'

I

oljiev \\ KolXrjv \

Kdnerov\\

3. %£p(7i rd^ I

vvETs 11TOt d'

i;i/> |

I6drdv\\

4. rptTTod' diJ,(p I CTTvpov \\ Xovrpdv |

6aiu)V\\

5. &ead' enl| Kalpov ll juta

6' sk|aXlaldg ||

6. dvdpcjv I i/l^ IITov yTratr

|

mdlov Ij

7. KOGflOV I (pepsTd) II

8. Trai av (5s| ndrpog \\ y' oaov lax \

velg ||

9. (ptXoriir [

tiîyoJv, || nXsvpdg |

<7i;ve/iot ||

10. Tdad' enl| Kov(pl^'- \\

erl yap | depfxal \\

1 1 .

Gvplyy\

egdvo)

||

^vocoa\

I

fieXdv||

12. [xevogdXX'

| dye Trdf, || (plXog da|rtf dv^p ||

13. (prjal Trap |elval, \\

aovadu)\j3dTU) ||

14. T(x>v dvdp I

I TTovcJvIITW Trdvr'

\ dyddil) \\

15. KovdevlI

TTW Ao) ll ovi &vfir \

ibv.(Paroemiac.)

16. AidvIrog or'

fjv \\rore (pdv |

w. (Paroemiac.)

17. fi TToXX I d PpoTolg 11 ecrriv id | ovalv ||

18. yvajvat | nplv idelv\\6' ovdelg

\ jiavTlg ||

19. rG)v [xeXX |ovtcov, \\

6 rl irpd^ |

£i. (Parosmiac.)



CHORAL SCANNING

OF THE

(EDIPUS TYRANNUS.

I. Vss. 151-158.

Strophe a.

1. "i2 MogI

dSve\ nfjg (pdrl, |

rig TroreJrag ttoXv

|

Xpvaov

2. IlvdcjvIog dyX \ dag

\eddg ||

3. Qfi6dg ;|

lK.re.Td\ nal (p66ep \

dv (ppevd, \ delfjidTl |

TrdXXcJv,

4. I\ rjls I

AdXle|Haldv,

5.dfi(f)l

aol1 d^ofie |

vog rlfiol \ rj veov,

6.7] nepl I rsXXofie \

valg d| palg ivdXlv

7. e^dvvIoelg XP^^^-

8. sinefiol, |

w %pv(7£ Jaf reKVov \ 'lEXTcidog,

| dudpore |

1. Dactylic hexameter.

2. Iambic dimeter acatalectic.


4. Dactylic trimeter, with anacrusis.



7. Dactylic dimeter.




168 CHORAL SCANNING

I. Vss. 159-166.

Antistrophe a.

1. Ilpwra oe\ KeKXd[j,e \

vog dvyd | rip AZog| an^por"^

"AIddvd,

2. yala \ oxov ||t' a(JfA0 |

edv||

3. 'KpTEidv I

a kvkXo|

evr' ayo | paf -dpovov |

ev/c-

AeaI

-^doasl

4. KoiI

$ot6ov e|Kd6oXov,

|

tw

5. rplaaol a\ Xe^tfiop |

ol'7Tp6(l)d j v^rt jttor,

6. el TTore|

/cat upors \ pdg a\rdg vnep-

7. opvvfie jvdg ttoXu

8. Tjvvodr' jiKTonl

|

cv (pXoya \ Tzrmdrog, |

eAQere|

/cat wv.

II. Vss. 167-175.

Strophe j3'.

1. "S2 TTOTTOi,I dvapldp. II

a yap [ 0ep(D ||

2. 7TrjiJ,drd- |

I'ocrei||de

juoi | Trpondg || OToXog, ov6'j

ertj]

3. (ppovTidog I eyô^-,

4. w Ttf aIXe^sTol,

I

ovre yap | iKjovd

5. kAv*| rag- x^^vog \

avêrai,\

ovre toj

koIoIv

6. t^ I

tII

(i)v Kdfxd I

tG)v dve| ôvat yv |

valKeg

7. a/LAovI

<5' av dXX\\w ixpoald j

oif, OTrep | evnTepov

I opvlv,

8. Kpelaaov a\ j-ialfiaKe j

tov nvpog \ opfievov

9. dKTdvJ Trpof

earr|| epov |

Têov.'


2. Verse resembling an iambic trimeter.^

1. We must pronounce i?Eoi5 as onesyllable, by synseresis, in order

that the verse may correspond with the last line of the antistrophe. Com-

pare Person, ad Orcst. 393 :

" Veteres Atlici hanc vocem (i?eof) libenter

in sermone contraxisse videntur ; nomina enim a i?eof incipientia pro-

nunciarunt, QovyEvidTj^, OovKvSidric," &c.

2. Compare Hermann, ad loc. :"

Versiim efficiunlsimilcm trimetro

iambico, nisi quod qumtus pes anap<Estus ett."



OF THE CEDIPUS TYRANNUS. 169

3. Dactylic dimeter, or Adonic.

4. Dactylictetrameter.

5. Dactylic tetrameter, with anacrusis.

6. Iambic monometer catalectic, with dactylic tetram.

7. Iambic monometer acatalectic, with dactylic tetram.



II. Vss. 176-184 (Leipsic ed. 179-189).

Antistrophe /3'.

1. o)v TToXTg I dvdpWn \\ og bXk\

vral||

2. vfiXed I

6e ylvlBX |Ia, Trpog j

iredQ|| ^dvarij | (()0po) ||

3. KelToi dvIolKTtbg

4. ev 6' dXo\ xol ttoXl

\

at r' em\ pLdrepeg

5. d/cI

rdv irdpa | (3(I)jii.6v |

dXXodev|

dXXal

6. XvypG)V \ TTOV 11ojv lur

\ fjpeg in|

larovd\ xovolv

7. naldvj

de Xdiirr ||el orovo

|

eaad re| yfjpvg 6[i \

avXog'

8. U)V vnep, \

w XP^^^ I

^ ''^^y^ | T£p Alog,

9. fivwI

TTd7Te[j,ip II

6v o/Lkj

dv.

III. Vss. 185-197 (Leipsic ed. 190-202).

Strophe y'.

1. ''Aped I

T£ TovII fxdXepov |

2. 05- vvv 1 dxdXic II 05- acTTTj

idwv|1

3. (pXeyel j jue Trept || 66?] |to^" avr || Id^

|

wv

4. 7raAia<Tj

vtov\\ dpdfifi j fid voJr

\\laal

\ irdrpag |]

5. dnovI pov eIt'

II ef fieydv

6. ddXdfiov I 'AfKpt II Tplrfjg \

7. slt'IIf Tov arr

|oêvov

\ 6p[iOV

8. QpTJKt I

ov kAuIIJwi'a

|

9. TeAfiiI yap ei

||tI vv^

\ dî) \\

10. tovt' err'\ Tjîdp [j epx^T |

a^'

P



170 CHORAL SCANNING

11. Tov w TavTTvpcl) I opiov^

12. dorpd I

TTdv Kpdr \\ fj veil \

dv Zev 1|

13. TTdrep vno reoj| cpdloov Kepavvcb.



3. Iambic trimeter catalectic.

4. Iambic trimeter acatalectic.

5. Iambic monometer and cretic.

6. Trochaic dimeterbrachycatalectic.

7. Dactylic trimeter, with anacrusis.




11. Antispastic monometer brachycatalectic.

12. Trochaic dimeter acatalectic.


III. Vss. 198-210 (Leipsic ed. 203-215).

Antistrophey'.

1. AviceVIdvd^ ||

rd re ad.|

2.;]^pv<T0(7Tp I d(p(bv II

dn' dyK \

vXiov \\

3. jSeAea | d'eXolfi' \\

dv ddd \ ^dr' ev\\

ddrelad | al

4. dpu) I yd npoa ||rddevr

\

d rag 1|re ixvp j (popovg. ||

5. 'Aprei^t \6dg alyX || dq ^vv dig

6. AvkV dp I

id 61||doael

j

7. rbvI xp^'^oiu I rpdv re kI

| icXtIokCo

8. rdad' enj

(bvv\\ jiov ydg \

9. olvcJTTI

d Bd/c_^ IIov ev

\

Xov\\

10. Malvdd\

dvofi ||

oaroXj

ov

11. TTeXdadrjvai \(pXeyovr'

1. We have adopted, in this and the two succeeding verses, the ar-

rangement of Hermann, as given by Erfurdt, ad loc.



OF THE (EDIPUS TYRANNUS. 171

12.* *

I oyAa IIWTTt

|

TxevKa H'

13. £7rt rov dTxorl\ [lov

sv deolg -dsov.

IV. Vss. 458-466 (Leipsic ed. 463-472).

Strophe 6\

1. Tig ovI

rtv a||deanle

\

Treed| AeX<pig |

eIttej Tterpd

2.

dppfjr'I

app^T|

wv reAe[

oavrd\

(fiolvl|

aZat|

3. wI pa I'iv aeAA

]

ddcjv ^

4. iTTI

n(x)V odevapG) | repov

5.(f)V I ya TToda vw

| fidv

6. fivoTrAo^- I yap en' av\\rov eirsvOp \

(baKel. \\

7. TTvpl Kal I GTepoTTalg \\

6 Acog \ yeverdg\\

8. 6eivI

at 6'dp,'

enovr|

at

9. Kijpeg \

dvdnXd\\ ktitoX.

1. Iambic monometer, with a logaoedic.

2.

Spondaicdimeter, with a logacedic.

3. Glyconic.


5. Glyconic catalectic, or Pherecratic.

6. Anapaestic dimeter.


8. Glyconic catalectic.


IV. Vss. 467-475 (Leipsic ed. 473-482).

Antistrophe 6'.

1. eXdiMip I£ yap || rov vt(po

j evrog \ dprl |(jg (pdv \

etaa

1. A word of two syllables wanting, according to Hermann's arrange-

ment.

2. The two spondees which begin this measure are very probably se-

mantus trochees.



172 CHORAL SCANNING

2.^ajtta I Hapvaoa |

ov rov a\ d^Aov | dvdpd \

Travr'

3. (j)OiT Io yap vn' dyp ]

iav

4. vXI

av ava t' dvrp |

a «at

5. Trerp | d^" wf ravp |og^

6.iJ-eXeog | [xeXecj \\

ttoSi xW \

£vu)V\\

7. rdfiEOOjj, I ^dXd ydg \\ dTvovdocf) |

t^cjv ||

8. juavT I

eld rd 6' al\

el

9. ^(bvrdI nepliro 11 rdrat.

V. Vss. 476-484 (Leipsic ed. 483-497).

Strophe e.

1. 6elvdfiev ovv,

|

delvdrdpdao

\

elGd(pog

ol[

wvo-0erdf.

2. oi;T£ (Jd/coi}vr',|

ovr' dirocpdaK \

ovd'- 6 rl Xe^ \

w

d' dnopcj

3. TTSTOfxal I

d' eXmalv, ovt'|

evddd' opuiv, |

our' omad

4. Tt ydp ?/ IAdfiddKicJat^,

| ^

5. TGJ IIoAvfio?)1 VECKog £Kelr\ |

oi;T£ irdpol | 0ev ttot*

eywy'

6. ovre rdvvv|

ttw

7. ijidOov I Tipo^ OToi)|1

* * * *| d?y

bdadvCi^

8. eTTi rdv|

emdd \\ ^lov (pdrlv elfi' |

Ol6L7T6dd

9. KatddKL|dat^ erri

| Kovpog ddrj |

Awv T9dvdTdiv.

1. Choriambic tetrameter.


3. An anapaest,with a choriambic trimeter.

4. An anapaest,with a choriambic monometer hypercat.

5. Choriambic tetrameter.•

»

6. Choriambic monometer hypercatalectic.

1. Consult Hermann, Elem. Doctr. Metr.p. 359, ed. Glasg.

2. A word is wanting here to complete the measure, and make the

line answer to the corresponding one of the anlistrophe. Hermann sug-

gests ;i;/3r/rj'r(/ZEi'or.



OP THE CEDIPUS TYRANNUS. 173

7. Anapaestic monometer and choriambic dimeter.

8. Tlie same measure.

9. Dactylic dimeter and choriambic dimeter.

V. Vss. 485-493 (Leipsic ed. 498-511).

Antistrophe £.

1. dAA* 6 fiev ovv \ 2,tvq, o r' "Atto/I/L | wv ^vverol, |

Kal ra fiporibv.

2. eldoreg dvSp |

wv 6' ore fidvr |Ig ttXeov

t] | ycj ^e-

perai

3. Kplolg ovK.I

eartv dXfj | drjg aocpla |

6' dv od(f)idv

4. Trdpd^elil) |

elev dvfjp- |

aAA'

5. ovttot' lydy \dv nptv Idolfi' | opdov sTTog,

| [xeixcpo-

fievtbv

G. av Kardcpal | ^v

7. (pdvepd \ yap en av|rw TTTspoeoa' | ^/I0e Kopa

8. TTore /cat| aocpor d)(pd \\ tj, fidadvh)

|

&' FjSvTTdXlg

9. TO) an' e\ jidg (ppevoc |

ovttot' ocpXfi |

eel Kdaldv.

VI. Vss. 630-636 (Leipsic ed. 649-657).

Strophe g-\

1 . TTidI

oi) t^sAt/ Icd^- (ppovrj |

ad^ r' drdf,| Xlaaofial.

2. Ti (ToiI

iJeAetf||

6f]r'el

\

Kddd)\\

3. TovI

ovre nplv | vfj-nlov,]

vyv t' evop/c |

<j fxeydv

4. KaralSj

e(Tat.||

5. oiaS' oyvI

d %p^^ II ei? ;old

\

a. (ppd^ \\

edrj \

tZ

(jifjg 11

6. TOV evdyr] (l>tXdv \ nfinoT' ev alTtd

7. ovv d(l)dvel XoyCJ \ dTljj,dv fidXelv

1. Cretic tetrameter, with anacrusis.

2. Iambic dimeter.

3. Cretic tetrameter, with anacrusis.

P2



174 CHORAL SCANNING

4. Iambic monometer.

5. Iambic trimeter.



VII. Vss. 639-645 (Leipsic ed. 660-668).

Strophe ^'.

1. ov rovI

TTavrCiV|

i^ewv|

-deov Trpo/iov dXlov

2. ETvel dOlog, dcpiXoq, \

6 rl Trvfidrdv

3. oXoliidv (ppovT] I

civ el rdvd' s^^

4. dXXdji'

aI 6va[j.dp(bg^

5. yd (pdlvovad rpvx \

et

6. Koi rdd' \ el ndK|1 olt; Kdic |

d7. TTpoad-ipel rolg

\

-ndXal|

rd upog \\ 0(j)U)V.

1. Ischiorrhogic iambi, with dochmius.

2. A dochmiac and cretic monometer.^


4. Cretic dimeter.

5. Dochmiac monometer hypercatalectic.


7. Antispast and iambic monometer hypercatalectic.

VI, Vss. 655-661 (Leipsic ed. 678-686).

Antistrophe g-'.

1 . yv I

val rl [ilXX |elg ko[iI^ \

elv Soficjv |

tov6' eao)

2. fiddov \

od y' 7] \\ rig fj\rvxri- II

3. 66kI fialg dyv |

wg Xoycjv |fjXde, ddnr

|

el 6e Kal

4. TO nfi 'v I dliiov II

1. We have adopted Hermann's emendation, fi'u ^vafiopug, in place

of the common reading, fioi. Sva/iSpc.),and have rejected ipv^uv, which the

common text gives in the succeeding line.

2. The dochmius is here resolved into eightshctrt syllables {Seidier,

de Vers. Dochm. p. 6.3, scq.),and the cretic into five.



OF THE (EDIPUS TYRANNUS. 175

5. aju0otv I

utt' avT\\olv val

\ %i koX 11 rig fiv \ Xoyo^ U

6. aXl^ Eiioly' dXlg \ ydg -npo-novovulvdg

7. (palveral,evd' eXtj^ \

Iv avrov fievelv.

VII. Vss. 664-670 (Leipsic ed. 689-697).

Antistrophe ^\

1. w 'vdÎelnov

\ fiev ovx \ a-ad^ fiovov ladl 6e

2. TTdpdfppovtfôv, dnopov j

em (ppovifid

3. 7T£(pdvdal n'dv el

\

oe vda(()lôi.ial

4. ogr' £[idv | ydv (plXdv

5. ev TTOvolg dXv|

ov-

6. odv Kdr'\ opOov \\ ovpla \

dg

7. rdvvv t' evTTOinr \6g el

\

dvval||

o.

VIII. Vss. 836-845 (Leipsiced. 863-872).

Strophe77.

1. et HOC I ^vvel|| ?/ ^sp

|

ovrt||

2. jLiotparav ei)

|

oeTrrov dyveZ \

dv Xoydv

3. 'ipy I

cJv T£ -ndv-cjv, |

wvv6|[i |

ol npo \\Kelvral

\

4. vil}iTTddeg, \ ovpdvl |

dv SV

5. aWepd \

reKvcb 11divr

\eg ojv

\ "OXyfin 11 og

6. Trar| ^p jtiovof

ov|

(5e vlv

7. i9vaIra (pvolg dv | IpcJi'

8. erlKT\

ev ov\\de

9.jU?jv

TroT£ Aa[

6d Kdrdnolii \

dael

10. [leydgev -ov

\rolg '&e6g \

ovde\ yfipdOK \

si.

1. Iambic dimeterand trochaic dimeter.

2. Epitriticdimeter and cretic monometer.

3. Epitritic monometer, with anacrusis, and trochaic

dimeter brachycatalectic.

4. First paeon, dactyl and trochee.

5. Two iambic monometers hypercatalectic.



176 CHORAL SCANNING

6. Glyconic.


8. Iambic monometer hypercatalectic.

9. Choriambic dimeter, with a spondee.

10, Ionic a minora and logacsdic, with spondaic ending.

VIII. Vss. 846-855 (Leipsic ed. 873-882).

Antistrofhei].

1. vj3plg [ (pvTBv Iel rv

\ pdvvov

2. v(3pLg el ttoAA|

ibv vnepTrXfjad \ f] fidrav

3. a\ fi^ 'mKalpd \ nrjde | GvfKpep |

ovrd

4. dKpordrov | eladvad | do' eg

5. dnoTOI fxov

(b\\ pov |

oiv elg| avdya ||

dv

6. evd'I

ov TTodl XPV I ^?it^<^

7.;^;p77 I

ral- to KaXOig\

6' eôv

8. TToXelI TvdXalafi \\ a

9. jU^TTore Av|

aai iêov ai| TOVfxal

10. T9edv oii A^l | w ttotI| Trpoard \

rdv lax I

<^^*

IX. Vss. 856-868 (Leipsic ed. 883-896).

Strophe &'.

1. el 6e\Tig vnep || OTrra

| x^P^^'^ II

2. ^ Xoy I

<5 TTop IIeveT

\

al

3. di/cIdg d<po6 \ rjTog, |

ovde|

4. Salfiov I

wv £(5|| ^ aid

j

wv

5. /ta/cI

d viv eA|

oIto| fiolpd j

6. dvoTTOTji I

ov %a/3 iliv %Ai(J |

of

7. elI /^^

TO Kepddg | icepddv |

et dt/c|ciwf

8. Kai[

TiovdoETTTcovI epê-al

9.7/ I

Twv ddlKTOJVI«ê

I

raijttar | ai^cJv

j

10. Tig eTtI

ttot' ev\\toIoS dv

| 7]p T?i;/i ||ov 6eX

j ^

11. IpÊTal xjjvx j Sf diivvelv



I

OP THE (EDIPUS TYRANNUS. 177

12. el yap al rol\

aids npaêlg | rl[uaZ

13. Tt I del fJê X^P I£^£i^';



3. Logaoedic, with anacrusis.


5. Logaoedic, with anacrusis.


7. Epitritic monometer, with anacrusis, and trochaic


8. Epitritic monometer, with anacrusis, and cretic.

9. Epitritic monometer, Avith anacrusis, and trochaic


10. Iambic monometer and trochaic dimeter catalectic.

11. Epitritic dimeter.

12. Epitritic dimeter, with cretic.

13. Adonic, with anacrusis.

IX. Vss. 869-881 (Leipsic ed. 897-910).

Antistrophe I?'.

1. oiiK erI

I rov a, H Oiktov| elfu ||

2. ydg en'| o^cpdX \\

ov oed|

uv

3. ovd'Ieg rov "A

|

6alat[

vdov|

4. ov6eI

Tdv "O/L|| vnnl \

dv

5. elI 117]

rdde\ x^^po \

deiKrd

6. irdalv| dpiio ||

ael Ppor |olg

7. dA/l'I

cj Kpdrvvcbv | elnep ( opd' aK|ovelq

8. Tiev, I Travr' dvdaaibv, | j«^ Aa^g9. oe,

I

Tdv re trdv d\

Odvdrdv\

alSv( dpxdv

10. (pdlvovT ]d ydp ||

Adi|

ov irdX||atd

|

rd

11. -Biacpdr' eâl\ povalv rj6^

12. Kovddixov rl\ [xalg "AttoXXcjv

| eficpdviig

13. Ip I pei (Je rd|

deed.



178 CHORAL SCANNING

X. Vss. 1057-1067(Leipsic

ed.

1086-1097).Strophe i.

1. eltrep lyd \ ^avTlg | etjut ||

2. Kal Kara yvwjtt | rjv IdpTg |

3. ov Tov ~0XI v\nx6v an

| elpojv

4. G) KWalpcJv, j

ovK eael

5. rdv avp j

tov\\ ndvaeXilvdv

6.IJ,7]

ov ae ye |

Kal nxdrpl |

cDrav|

OldXtrov

7. Kttt Tpofpov KalI nrJTsp' av^elv

8. Kai x^pevFMd I

at Trpof ^jUwv

9. a)?"fiTTi

I ^pa 0£p I

ov

10. raTOtf

I

Sjuoif||

rvpdvv\

olg11. Z

I Tjls j4>oi6£,

(

col de|

ravr' dp \

ear' el| rj.

''

> Epitritic monometer and dactylic tetrameter.

1. Choriambic monometer and trochaic monometer.

2.

3.

4. Epitritic monometer and cretic.

5. Iambic monometer and epitrite.


7. Epitritic dimeter.




11. Logaoedic, with anacrusis and catalecticsyllable.

X. Vss. 1068-1078 (Leipsic ed. 1098-1109).

Antistrophe c.

1. Tig oe, TEKvov,Irig a' e

\

tIkte||

2. Twv fidKpaloJv I

(bv dpd \}

3. Ilavd^ op I

eaalbd\

rd ttov >

4. TTpdamXdadua*, | rjae ye



OF THE OEDIPUS TYRANNUS. 179

6. rig &vydT7]p, |Ad$tov ;

tw'

6. yap TrAa/cef | dypovo | nol^-nda | at (plXal

7. eld' Kv/lAa|vat; dvdaaojv

8. eW BdKxsl |of êog val-

9. wv £77 dKp I

a)v ope |

wv

10.evpfifi I

a de^ ||ar' e/c

|

rov

11. Nv//0 I

dv "EAtI

/cwv?(JI

(jv alg \

irXuard\ av^-

TToi^ I ei.

XI. Vss. 1155-1165 (Leipsic ed. 1186-1195).

Strophe id.

1. 'I I

w ysveal \ jSporoiv

2. (jjg V\ ndg lad Kal

\

to[xrj-

3. dev û)\adq Ivdpldp, j

w

4. TtfI ydp, rig dvfip \

irXeov

5. rag ev\ dalnovldg | (j)spei

6.7/

TOCrj

OVTOV OGOVI

doKslv

7. Kal 66Îdvr' dnoKXl \

val

8. TO aovI

TOi ndpddelyii' | e^cjv

9. Tov (TovI dalfiovd, rov

|

cov d>

10. rXdiiOV IOidtTTodd,

| jSporuv

11. ovI

(Jevd ixdKdpl^ |

a).

1. Glyconic.

2. Glyconic, with a spondee in the base.

3. Pherecratic.

4. Glyconic.


6. Glyconic, with a trochee in the base.

7. Pherecratic.

8. Glyconic, with an iambus in the base.

1 . The choriambus in this line answers to the iambic syzygy in the

corresponding verse of the chorus. Compare Hermann, Elem. Doclr.

Metr. p. 160, ed. Lips.—Id. Epic. p.160.



180 CHORAL SCANNING


10. Glyconic, with a trochee in the base.

11. Pherecratic'

XI. Vss. 1166-1176 (Leipsic ed. 1196-1203).

Antistrophe id.

1. 0(7[ Ttg Kad' vTvep \

66Xdv

2. roêv|odg sKparrj | odg rov

3. TTavr' ev| dalfiovog 6X6

|

ov

4. wIZev, Kara [lev | (pdlodg

5. TCbVyafj.ijj \ (bvvxd ndpO |

evog

6.

XPV^ ^Î

ôv ddvdrC)v|

6'

ifid

7. X^P9' I "^^pyog dveor|ag

8. £^ oyI

Kal ddalXevg\

KaXel

9.tiibg, I

/cat ra neylar' |

eri-

10. p-ddrjg, Iratf fisydXala |

Tv ev

11. 6^ I

balalv dvdoa|

wv.

XII. Vss, 1177-1187 (Leipsic ed. 1204-1212).

Strophei/3'.

1. rdvvvI

(5' a/coi)|| tlv,

| rlf d0A|

IG)|1 rspo^" [

2.Tif

ev[

TTOvola11

tv,|

xifa

|

ralg dyp\

lalg3. ^vvol 1 KOf aA/l

11 dyd |jSioi;

|

4. tw KXelvovI

Ot(JtI

7T0V/cap ||

d

6. (0 pey Idf Xlfi \\ ^v

6. avTO^"I ripKEG H ev

7. "naWlI

/cat udrp 1|I

8. &dXd^fi I TToAw 11 Treaeiv

9. TTtJf TTore,]TToJg ttoO'

|

at ndrp |

wat a'j

10. dXoKeg\ (pepelv, \\ rdXdg \

11. oly' edyvdoQi] \

odv eg\

roaov||8s.

1. The first syllable of the choriambus is resolved into two short.



OF THE CEDIPUS TYRANNUS. 181

1. Iambic monometer hypercat. and dimeter bracli,

2. Iambic monom. hypercat. and ischiorrbogic iambi.

3. Iambic dimeter.

4. Antispastic monom. and trochaic monom. hypercat.





9. Logaoedic.


11. Antispastic monom. and iambic monom. hypercat.

XII. Vss. 1188-1198 (Leipsic ed. 1213-1222).

Antistrophe ij3\

1. e(f)evp \

e g' a\\Kovd'

|

o ndvd'| opuv \\ xpovog \

2. Mko,IdiKd^W el

\ ydiiov a\ ycjuov || TrdXaZ

j

'

3. TEKVovvrI

a nal||tekvov

\ fievov. ||

4. Id Adl I elov \ tekvov \\

*

5. eldsIo\ elds

\

*

6. ju^TTor' I

e16o|| juav

7. dvpofi I

al yap ||ojr

8. iTEpldXX IIdKX li

l(^vI

9. EK arofid |

rwv to\

6' opdov |

eItteIv|

10. dvETTvevI

ad t' Ik||asdiv

|

] 1 . Kal KdTEKolfMTja I

d rov| fiov o^fi \

a.

XIII. Vss. 1272-1282 (Leipsic ed. 1297-1306).

Anaplastics.

1. d> 6eIvI

6v tdelv|| ndOog dv

| dpCJnolg ||

2. (D 6eIvI

OTdrdv||Travrwv

|

do' SyCJ ||

3. -npooEKvpa' | v/tJ/J- || rtf a\ u| rXd^ibv \\

1. We have adopted Hermann's reading in this and the conespondingline of the strophe.

Q



182 CHORAL SCANNING

4. 7Tpoae6fj \ fidvid ; || rig ottt] \ Sfjadg \\

5.iieliôvd I 6aLH<I)V \\

rC)v[xd |

K.lorC)V||

6. Tcpog afi I

6va6al|| jiovl jwlp |

d (Paroemiac.)

7. (pev <pev \

6voTdv\||dXX' ov6'

\

ealdelv\\

8. dvvdfial |o', edeXcJv \\

iroXX' dvep j

iodal||

9. TToAAa 7TVI6eadal, \\

-rroXXd 6' ddp \ fjoal \\

10. ToldvI (f)pT.K7]v II -ndpex^lg \ jJôl. (Paroemiac.)

XIV. Vss. 1283-1287 (Leipsic ed. 1307-1311).

Anapêstics.

1. at al,I

al al, \\

2. (pev, (pev- \

dvord ll vog lyd>. |

irol ydg ||

3. (pepoixal \ rXdîbv ; \\ ird fiol \ (pdoyyd ||

4. dldTTlrlI

ral rdg \\did)

| (I)6pdd7iv V

5. Id) 6al[idv 1

tv' E^fiXXov.;2

XV. Vss. 1290-1293 (Leipsic ed. 1313-1316).

Strophe ly'.

\. Id)\

GKOTOV IP

2. ve(()dg l[iov d-noTpoTTOV \ EmirXofievov dcpdrov*

3. dddfxdrov re nal| dvoovplarov

ov

4. oijuoi. I

'

1. Iambic monometer


1. A proceleusmaticusin the first place.

On the admissibihty of this

foot into anapsestic measure, consult Hermann, Eiem. Doctr. Mctr. p.

243, ei. Glasg. ,

2. We haveadopted

Hermann's arrangement." Ex mea descnptione

versus uUimus constat duobus dochrmacts, quo genere versuum sape clau-

duntur systemala, usque prcemisso procclcusmalico."Herm. ad loc.

3. With regard to the iambic monometer preceding the dochmiac

measure, consult Seidler, dc Vers. Dochm. p. 116, seq.

4. Respecting the resolution of the dochmius into eight short sylla-

bles, consult Seidler, de V. D p.63.

5. Regarded by some as a semantus trochee.





4. Extra metrum.

XV. Vss. 1297-1300 (Leipsic ed. 1321-1324).

Antistrophe vy' '

1. tcjj ({)iXdg II

2. av iiev iiiog emnoXog | erl fidvifiog erX yap3. VTTOnevelg fie

rov|rvcpXdv Kfjdevcov

4. 0e{) (f)ev. I

XVI. Vss. 1305-1310 (Leipsic ed. 1329-1334).

Strophe t6\

1. "Atto/I/Lwv Tad'rjv \

"AttoA/L|u)v, w

| (ptiAoi \

2. KdXdI

rdd' sfid \

reXoJv|

KaKd rdd'ifid Traded

\

3. enala\

e 6' av|| rox£ip \

vlv ov|| rig dXX

| eycj

rXdnCiv I

4. Tt yap edelfi' opdv |

5. OT(x)I y' opwv II

TLfirj \

dsvrjv ||

Tdelvj yAv/cv. ||

6. ^v ravO',\onQg \\ nep Kal

\

av(j)fjg. \\

1. Dochmiac monometer and ischiorrhogic iambi.

2. Ischiorrhogic iambi and dochmiac monometer.

3. Iambic trimeter and semantus trochee.


5. Iambic trimeter.

6. Iambic dimeter.

XVII. Vss. 1311-1317 (Leipsic ed. 1337-1343).

Strophe le.

1. TtI drJT' EfJiol I

pXertrov rj |

2. arepicrov \ rj npoa || Tjyop |

ov

3. et' ear'\

dKov11elv

\ tjSov j

a <ptX \\ ol



184 CHORAL SCANNING

4. dndytr' sicrdmov|

otI rdxloTo, fie

5.

dndyeT'cj

(plXol|

rovoXedpov fieydv

6. Tov KdrdpaTOTdrov |

ert 6e Kal deolg

7. i^dpordrdv fipoTcJv. |

1. Cretic dimeter, with anacrusis.'


3. Iambic monom. hyperc. and trochaic mon. hyperc.

4. Dochmiac dimeter.^


6. The same measure.''


XVI. Vss. 1320-1325 (Leipsic ed. 1349-1354).

Antistrofhe td\''

1. oXoW oorlg rjv |og an' dyp | ld<;

\neddg \

2. voiiddog \

EmTTod| lag

|

sXdte(i'

dno re (povov |

3. eppv I TO KdvII

eawa | ev ovd || ev elg | x^P^^

TTpdaauiv |

4. Tore ydp dv ddvibv|

5. ovK?jv I (l)tXol II

Giv ovd'I cjitoi II

roaovd'| aj^ôf

.Ji

6. dêXdyr\

I Kd\\ fj-ol

tovt'|

dvijv. \\

XVII. Vss. 1326-1332 (Leipsic ed. 1357-1363).

Antistrofhe le.

1. OVK ovv ndrpog| y' dv (pov evg

2. fiXdov I

oi)(JeII vvficfu, \

og

3. (3pdTolg j t/cA?] II

0^v | wv £ | Ôv (ztt ||

o

4. vvv d' aêo^ juei' ein' |

dvoaldv 6s nalg

6. ofioyevfig 6'd(f>'

CJv| avrog ecbvv rdXdg

1. Seidler, rfe Fcrîiu* Dochmiacis, p.144.

2. 7A2<i., p.58.

3. Compare Hermann, ad loc.




6. el 6e tX npeadyrspov | e(pv kukov kcLkov

7. tovt' eXdx' OldtTrovc.[

XVIII. Vss. 1490-1496 (Leipsic ed. 1524-1530).

Trochaic Tetrameters Catalectic.

1. 0) TTdrp I dq Qfi6 \\ fjg ev\

oIkoI\\ Xevaaer',

|

0161\\

TTovg odI

e

2. 6g rd\

kXeIv' alv\\ lyfidr' \ rjdfj, \\

kol Kpdr | lorog \\

7]V dvI Tjp

3. oarlg|

ov ^/jX ||cj ttoA

|

ltuv\\Kat tvx |

aig in||

4. elg 6a\

dv kXvSj|ibvd

\

delvfig|1

avfKbop \

dgeA

||

ffXy I

6ev

5. dare\ -Byfirov \\ dvr', e

\ Kelv7]V \\ ttjv reXjevral

|)

dv 16I

elv

6. Tj^ep I

dv en|| laKon

| ovvrd, || ju^dev | d.lfiif || £iv

Trpiv I

dv

7.repfid |

tov 61 ||

oO Trep | dafj, \\ [irj6ev \ dXyelv \\ ovTrad

I

wv.

Q2



^V^^i^^^^^^W^V»^^^^N#^MM*#'^^tfW^^^'^^^>^»^<*^^*>»»»>»'#'^^^<^^^^^i*W^^^*^^*>»^^^»i^^^^^^<^»

PART IV.

INDO-GERMANIC ANALOGIES.

^^^^^^^^rf^^^^^'*^<»#'^^^^^>»^»^*»«»«<^»<*' rf*^^^#<»^*»^^^»^'**rf^»'**»'^'>^*^*^*^^^*'^»i^^r^^»^^^l^Nr*^^^



INDO-GERMANIC ANALOGIES.

I. OF LANGUAGE IN GENERAL.

I. The farther comparative philology carries back its researches into

the earlier periods of the history of language, the more convinced do we

become that all the spoken idioms of the globe have originatedfrom one

common source, and, consequently, that all the members of our race

may trace their descent from one common parentage.

II. The idea of a

primitive language

for our species, though often

made a subject of ridicule by the superficial and half-learned inquirer,

rests on too firm a basis to be shaken, and connects itself too closely with

the earliest traditions of our race, as recorded in the sacred writings, to

leave any doubt of its truth on the mind of the philologist.

III. What this primitive language may have been is, of course, all un-

certainty, and each investigator is here left to the conclusions of his own

judgment. It would seem, however, that a very large portion ofthis

early vocabulary consisted of terms which sought to imitate, by their

sounds, the various movements of the natural world, such as the noise of

thunder, the roaring of the tempest, the gentle or rapid flow of waters,

and the different cries of the animal creation.

IV. The simple narrative of Scripture, which represents the Deity as

bringing into the presence of our first parent the numerous creatures

that peopled his new domains, in order that the progenitor of our race

might give each its appropriate name, is only another way of stating that

the germe of language is a faculty inherent in the soul, and that the ap-

pellations given by Adam to the various members of the animal kingdom

consisted simply of imitations of their peculiar cries, or of attempts to

express, in strong though inartificial terms, some striking peculiarity of

structure.

V. Following up this idea, we will come naturally to the conclusion

that, in the ir/ancy of our species, a close sympathy, founded on immu-

table laws, must have united the visible to the intellectual world, and

that the result of this sympathy manifested itself in avariety of simple

but expressive sounds, which, by gradual combinations and progressive

improvement, formed eventually the splendid fabric of language.



190 OF LANGUAGE IN GENERAL.

VI. The earliest spoken idiom of our race was necessarily analogous

to the sensations which gave it birth. Melodious sounds were employed

to e.xpress soft and gentle emotions;sounds of a rough or harsh nature

served to indicate what was painful or unpleasing ; beauty, activity, and

strength were each depicted, as it were, by different intonations, and

thus each syllable became a kind of musical note, the peculiar force of

which we are still, in many cases, able to perceive, though so many ages

have intervened.'

VII. Topretend

to

analyze, however,at the

present day,all these

accordances of the soul of man with external nature;

to endeavour to

shjw how each rapid perception of form, of movement, and of colour,

affected in different ways the internal sense, and was then enunciated

by someparticular sound, is a task which presents insuperable difficul-

ties, and bids defiance to the most ingenious hypotheses.

VIII. The utmost that we can ascertain respecting the earlier move-

ments of language is simply this : that primitive words must have been

comparatively few in number, and all of them monosyllabic ;that each

element of thesesyllables, designating as it did some principal object,

was soon applied, in various combinations, to a series of other objects

analogous to the first, which last served in their turn as types for new

analogies ;and that thus, by a progressive march, the same sounds be-

came applied to a multitude ofthings, always more and more removed

from each other, and the affiliation of which, though real, became con-

tinually less apparent.

IX. Guided by that instinct of comparison or assimilation so inherent

in the human mind, thought, though infinite in its essence, submitted,

nevertheless, to the restrictive forms of language, and yielded itself

to general laws, which arranged in the same class all things that were

susceptible ofpartial approximation. Hence we see, in the most ancient

languages, and those that are nearest the infancy of our species, the ideas

of height and depth, of hollowness and convexity, oflight and heat, of

cold and gloom, expressed by one and the same sound, as being of one

and the sameorigin.

X. The rapid increase of the human family, and the corresponding in-

crease of their relations and wants;the modification of material

objects

by the inventive spirit of man, and his subjugation of the domain of na-

ture, in order to adapt it more immediately to his use, all tended to the

gradual but sure development of what had at first been little better than

the union of a few simple sounds;and language, departing in this way

more and more from its monosyllabic, changed at last into what may be

called a polysyllabic, character.

1. Eichoff, Parallile des Langues, <fcc., p. 4, seq.



OF LANGUAGE IN GENERAL. 191

XI. The division of the human family, by their necessary dispersion

in

quest

of new and more distant abodes, soon

brought

about other and

more important changes. Separated from each other by wide intervals,

by mountains, rivers, and seas, intervals which great terrestrial revolu-

tions contributed from time to time to increase, the various tribes that

had migrated from home wrought out each their peculiar idiom under

influences of the most opposite character. Melodious in the temperate

regions of the globe, languid under the fires of the tropics, strong and

rough amid the snows and ice of the north, language was employedunder these different characters to depict respectively the contemplative

life of the shepherd, the listless inactivity of the tenant of southern

climes, and the menacing cries of hardy and warlike tribes; and, in this

way, what were at first intonations common to all, became, under each of

these three distinct influences, as different as were the characters of the

ditferent tribes or races that employed them.

XII. Amid the various movements of our race, some tribes, in re-

moving from the common centre of civilization, fell into barbarism;while

others, more fortunate, attained, in process of time, to a high degree of

culture. Among the former, continually agitated and divided as they

were by intestine wars, language, which had already begun to degenerate,

broke off into a multitude of idioms, as vague andfluctuating as they

were strange and incoherent. Among civilized communities, on the

other hand, which, by reason of a fertile soil and peaceable possession,

had it in their power to lead an intellectual life, and to make themselves

acquainted with sciences and arts, language became more and more pol-

ished, and, extending itself in a constant and uniform manner, knew no

other limits save the frontiers of the race. Hence we perceive that the

idioms of Europe have all a common physiognomy, whereas those of the

aboriginesof our own

countrydiffer almost

continuallyin the case of

each petty tribe.

XIII. The conclusions, then, which wc are authorized to draw from

a careful examination of this most interesting subject are manifestly the

following: 1. There was originally but one'single language ;

2. What

are called languages are, in fact, only different dialects of this primitive

tongue ;3. The form of words varies, but their essence undergoes no

1." Si se comparan hoy la.s muchas lenguas que hay esparcidas por la superficie

del glovo, se veri que todas eilas desciendeii de una KOla, y que guardan tal herman-

da y analogia en su estruclura, qui; no seran otra co.sa que la nusma lengua priini-

tiva variada, cambiada, enriquecida"

{Zama(ola.)—"\\ rOsulte de cos priiicipes,

que parnii les hordes les inoiiis oivillsees, il est irnpossildc d'en irouver une seule

doMt le vocabulaire ne prestnte un certain nnmbre di: inots egalement usites dans les

dialecles les plusconnus Mais les'

iniiumerr/: ling-um di.'< i miUimfF. infer se, tta vt

nuihx mackiiiis ad com,nunem ortghiem retrahi possint,' voila ce qu'on cherchi'rait

en vain sur notre globe." (Mcriaii, Principes de I'Etude coiiiparative des Langues,

p. 3, in notis.)



192 OF ROOTS.

change ;4. The essence of words is in the roots, and in the elements

which

compose

these roots.

II. OF ROOTS.

I. In every word composed of several syllables, asingle one alone of

these comprises the fundamental idea of the word, and is termed the

radical syllable. The others are merely accessory, and serve to modify

the meaning of the primitive one.

II. All roots are monosyllabic, and consist generally of three letters,

a consonant, a vowel, and a consonant.

III. "With regard to what are erroneously styled dissyllabic roots, it

will be well to bear constantly in mind the judicious observation of Ade-

lung :'"Every word, without exception, may be reduced to a monosyl-

lable root, and ought to be so reduced if we wish to follow the path

which nature has traced out for us. If the grammarians, who laboured

on the Semitic tongues, misled by a blind regard for rabbinical authority,

still hold to the doctrine of dissyllabic roots, this error only shows the

proneness of man towards everything complicated and intricate, at the

expense ofsimplicity and the clearest indications of nature."

IV. For example, to carry out the idea of Adelung, why are we to re-

gard katal as a root in Hebrew, when we have in Latin cced-o, and in

English

cut ?

Whycall karab,

galal,

or marar radicals whenthey

can

be traced respectively to kar, gal, and mar 1 He who should doubt

whether the roots just mentioned be really so or not, would doubt, in like

manner, whether the syllables ctxd in cmio, car in caro, cap in capio, mar

in mare, kv2. in kv/uu, eDi, in e12,£u, be radicals, and would end by with-

holding his assent from the clearest and most positive principles.2

V. A similar error is sometimes committed even by those who inves-

tigate the Sanscrit language. Thus, in many of the elementary works

published by them, we find such roots as bri or bhri, djna, kram, srip,

stou, tri, trip, trou, &c. Now these are, in fact, only lengthened forms,

including a contracted root, or one that has lost its vowel. The root of

bri is bar, ber, &;c., and the contraction has given bri. This radical may

be traced in the Greektpep-u, the Latin

fcr-o, and the English"

to bear.'^

The root of djna is ken or gheii, the consonant g being pronounced like

dj,as in many English words

;and this root may be traced in the Greek

yiv-uoKu and in the English ken. The root of kram is kar, lengthened

into karam, and then contracted into kram. The root ofsrip is sar, ser,

&c., preserved in the Latin serp-o, the Greek'ipn-cj,

and the Latin rep-o,

1. Mithridates, vol. i., p. 301, .leq.

2. Miriati,p. 10. Compare Klaproth sur les Racines des Langues Semitiques,

appended to Mferian's work.



OF ALPHABETICAL ARRANGEMENT. 193

belonging to the same source. The root of stou is sat, sot, sout, &c.,

whence the Persian soutou or south-ou, and the Latin suad-co. And so,

in like manner, of the rest.'

III. OF ALPHABETICAL ARRANGEMENT.

I. The numerous points of resemblance that e.xist between different

languages would be rendered still more apparent and striking,were we

not often arrested in our inquiries by the change of consonants belonging

to the same series, and which are often employed the one for the other.

II. In the European alphabets the utmost confusion prevails.The

series of consonants is nowhere apparent in them, and there is nothing

by which we can perceive the relations wlrich consonants produced by

the same organ respectivelybear to each other, and the propriety

which

exists for their being mutually interchanged.This propriety gives rise

to an almost infinite number of variations, to which we find it extremely

difficult to accustom ourselves, fromthe

irregular dispositionof our own

alphabeticcharacters.

III. The alphabet of the Sanscrit tongue is in this respectmuch more

philosophically arranged, though still even its dispositionis far from be-

ing perfect.

IV. The order in which the Sanscrit letters are arranged is as fol-

lows :

First Series. Long and short vowels and diphthongs.

Second Series. Guttural consonants and their modifications.

k. k'h. g. gh. ng.

Third Series. Palatals, which have an analogy with the prece-

ding:

tch. tchh.

dj. djh. ny.

Fourth Series. Consonants which the grammarians designate

by the name of cerebrals.^

t. th. d. dh. n.

Fifth Series. Dentals.

t. th. d. dh. n.

Sixth Series. Labials.

p. ph. b. bh. m.

1. HUrian, p. 20, seq.

2. The cerebrals are pronounced by turning and applying the tip of the tongue far

back against the palate, which i)ru(lucing a hollow sound, as if proceeding from the

bead, is distinguished by the term murddkanya or cerebral. {Wtlkms, Sanscrit

Grammar, p. 8.)̂

R



194 OF ALPHABETICAL ARRANGEMENT.

Seventh Series. Semivowels.

y. r. 1. V.

Eighth Series. Sibilants and aspirates.

j.ch. s. h. X.

V. This arrangement would be more regular if the sibilant and aspi-

rated consonants followed immediately after the palatals,for they often

confound themselves with these.

VI. An alphabet rectified in this way will present four series of homo-

geneous consonants, under which all those which one can imagine, and

that can only be modifications of the former, easily admit of being ranged.'

Thus:

I. II. III. IV.

i. s. n. r.

Jc'h. j.

m1.

g.ch. b. y.

ng. h. p.

tch. kh. f.

dj.V.

t.

d.

VII. There exists anaffinity

between the first and second series by

means of the mutual relations which k, k'h, and g have with kh or h aspi-

rated, and by means of those which t, d, tch, dj, bear to ch, s, andj.

VIII. The third and fourth series have fewer points of contact. Nev-

ertheless, g often changes into h, kh, and v ;the letters / and A are often

confounded;the v of the third and the y of the fourth series connect

themselveswith the

vowel sounds;the

liquids /, m,n

frequently supplyeach other's place ; while, in many idioms, n, d, and r are also con-

founded.

IX. The mutual interchange of vowels is of so frequent occurrence

tliat it cannot be taken at all into account in the comparison of languages

and dialects. Indeed, it often happens that, in the sajne idiom, the dif-

ference of vowel sounds only serves to indicate certain modifications of

the root.

First Example. Drawn from the French.

J'-ai, ,tu fl-s, ils o-nt, j'-o-v-ais, j'-cw-s, j'-aw-rais.

Second Example. Drawn from the change of vowels in the Ger-

I. Mtrian, p. 32.




man word stein (stone), which in the different cognate dialects

varies as follows :

German



196 OF ALPHABETICAL ARRANGEMENT.

same family, what must the changes be that occur in dialects belonging

to difl'erent families of languages And this single remark will serve us

as a guide in many an intricate speculation into hnguistic aflSnities.

XIII. Let us now pass to the variations of consonants, and give a few

examples in each of the series indicated under ^ VL

First




The interchange of F and Kh exists in the difTerent dialects of Japan.

Thus, the inhabitants of the isle of Sikokf say

Khirando for Firando, the name of a city.

khana

khassi

khehi

khisa

khonc

khourou

fana,

fassi,

fch,

fisa,

fone,

fuurou,

the nose,

a bean,

a snake,

the knees,

a bone,

toshake.

The interphange of S, H, or Kk, is also very frequent. For example,

German, salz, salt,

Latin, . sal,"

Slavonic, serdtse, heart,

Slavonic, zim-a., winter,

Breton, hal-on.

Old German, hall.^

German, hertz.

Greek, x^'H-^t

Latin, hiems.

Changes also take place between the sibilants and gutturals. Thus,

Armenian

Hebrew

Greek

Slavonic

Afghan

Arintse (Siberia)

sar \

har



198 OF THE AFFILIATION OP LANGUAGES.

The root of the Latin fdba," a bean," is found in the Slavonic hob

and in the French feve. So also numerous instances might be cited

where F is put for B and B for V.

Fourth Sekiks.

In all languages there is a mutual and very frequent change between

L and R. Thus,

Greek



OF THE INDO-GERMANIC TONGUES. 199

Spanish, and Portuguese are only, in strictness, so many corrupt dia-

lects of theparent

Latin ;and yet, at the same time, they

maybe

trulysaid to possess an afEliation among themselves.

IV". This affiliation between the Italian, French, Spanish, and Portu-

guese, will serve to explain what we mean by affiliation in the case of

the Indo-Germanic tongues. As the former all sprang from one com-

mon source, the Latin, and have pursued an onward route, side by side,

so the Zend, the Sanscrit, the Greek, the Latin, the German, and other

Indo-Germanic tongues, have all come from some parent tongue, now-

lost, and have all pursued routes side by side with each other, some of

them attainingto an early, others to a late maturity. To quote the

graphic language of Ovid,

" Fades non omnibus una,

Nee diversa tamen, qualem decet esse sororum.'"

V. OF THE INDO-GERMANIC TONGUES.

I. The term Indo-Germanic is applied by philologiststo the group of

nations extending from India, along central Asia, and throughout the

Continent of Europe.

II. This group, more strictly speaking, is divided into six principal

families, the Indian, Persian, Grceco-Roman, Slavonic, and Ccllic.

III. All the languages coming under the general appellation of Indo-

Germanic, whether in India, Persia, or Europe, and whether considered

with reference to their structure or phraseology, are originallyidentical

;

that is to say, they are composed of the same primitive roots, which the

influence of climate, of national pronunciation,and of logical

combina-

tions, has in various degrees affected and modified.

IV. Before entering, however, more fully into the analogies between

these tongues, we will give a brief sketch of each language, in order

that the points of resemblance between them may be more clearly un-

derstood.

INDIAN LANGUAGES.

I. At the head of these is to be placed the Sanscrit, the sacred idiom

of the Brahmins, and the common source of all the languages of India.

Its name means "complete," "perfect,"

or"altogether finished," from

stim,"altogether,"

and krita," done ;" and hence is equivalent to the

Latin confeetus.^

II. This very name "Sanscrit" is one among many proofs of the high

antiquity of the language ;for if it plainly point to an antecedent state

1. Wilkins's Sanscrit Grammar, p. l.—Bopp, Vergleichende Grammatik, p. iv.



200 INDIAN LANGUAGES.

of the tongue in question, when as yet the language had not become

completely settled,and

if,

as has been wellascertained,

the mostposi-

tiveliterary monuments carry back the Sanscrit, in its actual form, to

more than fifteen centuries before our era;

for how long a period must

it have existed prior to this, in afluctuating and changing state, before

itfinally settled down into an established tongue, and became entitled

to the appellation of"completely formed "

III. The Sanscrit has an alphabet offifty

characters; but, upon ex-

amining their powers with some degree of care, the number of simple ar-

ticulations may be reduced to twenty-eight, namely, five vowels, and

twenty-three consonants.'

IV. Sanscrit nouns are of three genders, masculine, feminine, and

neuter. They have three numbers, singular, dual, and plural,and they

are declinable through eight cases in each number.^

V. The names of the cases are, the nominative, vocative, dative, ac-

cusative, ablative, locative, instrumental, and genitive. The force of

these will be explained more fully hereafter.

VI. The Sanscrit verb has two voices, the active and passive ; but

the active voice has two forms, one with the ordinary transitive meaning,

and the other with a reflexive or intransitive force, indicating that some

action is exerted on the agent himself, or for his advantage or disadvan-

tage.This latter form is

analogousto the

middle voicein

Greek.VII. The moods in Sanscrit are five in number, the indicative, poten-

tial, imperative, precative, and conditional. Besides these, there occur

in the Vedas fragments of another mood, which the grammarians term

let, and which corresponds to the Greek subjunctive.

VIII. The indicative has six tenses, namely, a present, three preter-

its, and two futures. The conjugations are ten.

IX. The syntax of the Sanscrit is simple and logical, and the facility

in compounding words, which the language so abundantly affords, opens

one of the widest fields imaginable for the culture of poetry. Hence

poetic writing enjoyed a decided ascendency during all the four ages of

Indian literature. The primitive and religious epoch, marked by the

Vedas, was soon followed, about the time of the heroic ages, by the laws

of Menu, the Pouranas, or Annals of Mythology, and the gigantic poems

of Ramayan and Mahabharat, which celebrate, the one the conquest of

1. Those pretended philologists who regard the number of alphabetical characters

in the Sanscrit as a proof oC tlie modern orijfin of the language, appear to forget that

they are tliiis adducing an ar},'umen,t in favour of the very side winch they seek to op-

pose. For if tlie ajiiiellation of"Sansciit'' was only given to the tongue in question

after it was coniplctely formed, how many centuries must it have existed before its

alphabet was vKidernized by this large increase of characters I

2. Willans's Sanxnt Grammar, p. 36 and 1'21, seq.—

Bopp, Vergleickende Gram-

maiik, p. 617, stq.



PERSIAN LANGUAGES. 201

Ceylon, the other a contest between two dynasties,and the authors of

which poems, at once bards and philosophers, appear like two majestic

figures, the rivals and contemporaries of Homer. Soon after this suc-

ceeds the elegant and polished era, a short periodantecedent to Vir-

gil,when Jayadevas produced his pastoral elegies,

and Calidasas his

beautiful poem of the Sacountala. After these commenced the decline

of the language,which shows itself more and more in all subsequent pro-

ductions.'

X. The Sanscrit has ceased to be a spoken tongue, and is now studied

in India as the Greek and Latin are with us. Even when in a living

state, however, and at the period, too, of its greatest extension, it was

only spoken by the privileged classes. The main body of the people

employed what was called the Pracrit, that is, the"natural" or

"spon-

taneous" toncrue. This Pracrit contained the same elements as the San-

scrit, but under a rude and uncultivated form, and differing in each lo-

cality.

XI. Another language, more cultivated than the Pracrit, namely, the

Pali, and which was spread formerly throughout the south of India, was

adopted by the sect of the Buddhists, who, expelled by the Brahmins

from their native land, carried beyond the Ganges into Thibet, and also

into China, their dogmas, traditions, and literature, as preserved in their

sacred books.

XII. Of the modern dialects of India, which have arisen from the in-

termingling of the ancient idiom with the languages of various races as

brought in by conquest, we need only briefly speak. The most widely

extended of these is the Hindoostanee, which, originating on the banks

of the Indus, from the fusion of the Sanscrit and Arabic, has eventually

established itself throughout all the Mogul empire and all Mohammedan

India. The Bengalee, peculiar to the banks of the Ganges and to the

worshippers of Brahma, has deviated least from the primitive language

of the country. The Mahratta tongue in the north of the peninsula, the

Tamoul and Teliiiga along the southern coasts, and the Maldivian in

the isles of the same name, are the most important of those that remain,

and are all in a greater or less degree derivatives from the Sanscrit, or,

more conectly speaking, the Pracrit tongue.^

PERSIAN LANGUAGES.

I. The Persian family has for its primitive type the Zend, the sacred

idiom of the magi, the language of Zoroaster, which, issuingfrom the

same parent source as the Sanscrit, spread itself over the eastern part

1. Eichnff, p. 22.

2. Id. p. 23.



202 PERSIAN LANGUAGES.

of Asia, among the worshippers of the sun, and has been preserved for

us in the valuable fragments that remain of the Zend-Avesta.i

II. The Zend was in use among the ancient Persians, as the Pehlvi,

another idiom intermingled with Chaldee, was spoken by the Medes and

Parthians. More masculine and more concise than the Sanscrit, but less

varied in their terminations, these two languages, appropriated to warlike

tribes, were written in cuneiform characters before having special alpha-

bets.

in. The theory of Rask attempts to explain theorigin of the Zend

and Sanscrit by a bold and ingenious hypothesis. According to this

writer, the Scythian race had spread themselves, at a remote period an-

tecedent to all positive history, over the whole of Northern and Central

Asia, and had possessed themselves of India. The Japhetic race, how-

ever, advanced subsequently into India from the eastern part of Persia,

conquered the northern and more central parts of the former country,

and drove theScythian hordes towards the southern coasts, where the

remnants of the race are. still, at the present day, distinguished by the

darkness of their colour from the comparatively fairer hue of the Brah-

mins. Out of the Japhetic language were framed, according to Rask,the Sanscrit and Zend.^

IV. The Zend and the Pehlvi were displaced, about the commence-

ment of our era, by the Parsi, a dialect of the samefamily, which, after

being restricted for a long period to Persia proper, where it perfected

itself more and more, becameeventually, under the dynasty of the Sas-

sanides, the dominant idiom of the whole empire. It preserved itself

pure and unaltered until the period of the Mohammedan invasion, when,

from a union of the Arabic with the national idiom, arose the modern

Persian.

V. The modem Persian, notwithstandmg its doubleorigin,

which

places it in the same relation to the Zend as that in which the English

stands to the German, is nevertheless distinguished by conciseness and

force, and full of grace and poetic spirit. The monuments erected byits writers, the Schahnameh of Firdausi, and the Gulistan of Saadi, give

it a high literary importance, and plainly show what it is still able to ac-

complish. Enriched at one and the same time by Arabic and Indian

roots, the terminations of which it abridges, simple and clear in its syn-

tax, expressive in its compounds, it is with good reason regarded as the

most polished language of modern Asia.

VI. Around the Persian are grouped, at distances more or less re-

1. By the Zend-Avestaaremeanjthesacredwrilinps of the early Persians, in whichthe religion of Zoroaster is set forth. The work was (irat made known to Europe byAnquetil.

2. Ueber das Miter und die Echtheit der Zendsprache. Berlin, 1826.



GRiECO-ROMAN LANGUAGES. 203

mote, certain rude and barbarous idioms, such as the Afghan, spoken

in the kingdom of Caboul;the Bdoutche, on the confines of India

;the

Kourde, among the mountaineers of Persia ; and, finally, the tongue ofthe Ossetes, in the range of Caucasus, which is the most remarkable of

all, as aifording indubitable traces of the great migration of Indian com-

munities into Europe.

VII. Before leaving this subject it is important to remark, that the

modern Persian contains not only Sanscrit, but a large number also of

Zend roots, a fact which at once overthrows the opinion that the Zend

was never a spoken language, but merely brought in as a sacred idiom

from India.

GR-«CO-ROMAN LANGUAGES.

I. The Thracian, or Graeco-Roman family of languages, divides itself

into four branches, the Phrygian, Greek, Etruscan, and Latin.

II. The first or Phrygian branch is»that comprising the languages,

now extinct, that were formerly spoken in Asia Minor by the Phrygians,

Trojans, Lydians, and in Europe by the Thracians and Macedonians :

languages which now exist only in proper names (but which names are

sufficient to establish the Indian affiliation of these tongues), and also in

some fragments intermingled with the particular dialect of the Aruauts

of Albania.

III. Thesecond,

or

Greek, comprehendsthe

Pelasgic idioms, or,

in

other words, the language of that active and intelligent race which peo-

pled Thessaly, Epirus, the coasts of Italy and Asia Minor, and the con-

tinent and islands of Greece, and from the bosom of which sprang the

Hellenes, who gave to Europe the most beautiful of its languages.i

IV. The Greek, considered generally,is remarkable for its melody,

for the abundance of its inflexions, for the delicate shades of meaning

marked by the tenses of the verb, for its clear and highly logical syntax,

and its richness and facilityin compounding. In this last-mentioned re-

spect, as well as in the fulness of its terminations, no language in the

world approaches more closely to the Sanscrit than the Greek.

V. The third branch is that of the Etruscans or Rhaseni, of whose

early historyand of whose language so very little is known. As far as

an opinion may be ventured, the origin of the race was atriple one, Pe-

lasgic, Lydian, and Celtic, and their idiom, known only by some monu-

mental inscriptions,which have never been satisfactorily elucidated, par-

took, in all probability,of the features of the Pelasgic, Lydian, and Cel-

tic tongues.

1. The identity of the Pelasgic and Hellenic races is now generally acknowledged

by scholars.



204 GERMAN LANGUAGES.

VI. The fourth branch is that of the Osci or Ausones, and of many

other, if not all, of the Italian communities, the gradual blending of

which with one another and with the Greek produced the Latin tongue.

This last-mentioned tongue, concise and energetic, more Indian in its

substance than even the Greek, but less varied in its terminations, and

less pliant in the combining of words, underwent several changes before

it acquired an established character, an event which only took place about

the commencement of the Christian era.

VII. The Rustic Latin, or the idiom spoken by the lower orders of

the people and by the soldiers in the military colonies, and which subse-

quently became more and more altered by invasions from the north, end-

ed at last by transforming itself into various secondary idioms, which,

adopted by the new conquerors of Rome, have prevailed since that period

under the names of the Italian, French, Spanish, and Portuguese, through-

out all the south of Europe.

VIII. TheWalachian, spokei»in

a corner of

Turkeyin

Europe, mayalso be regarded as a fragment of the Latin, which, by its admixture with

the Slavonic, has assumed a form quite peculiar to itself, but which pre-

sents to the view but little culture, and possesses, therefore, but little

interest.'

GERMAN LANGUAGES.

I. The German race, spread over the whole of Northern Europe, ap-

pears to have been divided originally into severallarge tribes, the spoken

idioms of which constitute five great branches, the Teutonic, Saxon,

Anglo-Saxon, Norman, and Gothic.

II. The first of these, comprising the nations of Southern Germany,

produced the High-German, the monuments of which can be traced back

to the

eighthcentury of our era, and which was

spoken.at the courts of

the Franc and Saxon kings, until it was superseded at the former by the

Romance tongue, and at the latter by the Allemannic, which last was

the poetic idiom of the Minnesingers and of the Nibelungenlied. At

last, from the impulse given by the writings of Luther, in the sixteenth

century, arose the modern German, so conspicuous as a rich, picturesque,

and energetic tongue. If this language has lost that variety of termi-

nations which once brought it into so close an approximation with the

Greek and the Sanscrit, if its conjugation is too restricted, and its peri-

ods are too complicated, it has, at the same time, however, an incontest-

able advantage over all modern tongues in the exact derivation of its

words, in their almost unhmited composition, and, above all, in the tone-

I. Molnar, Walachisclie Sprachlekre, Wien., 1788.



SLAVONIC LANGUAGES. 205

accent, which, resting invariably on each radical syllable, imparts to the

German an intellectual type, which no other idiom possesses to the same

degree.

III. The second branch, that of Western Germany, comprises the old

Low-German or Saxon, from which has arisen the patois at present pre-

vailing along the German borders, the Prison, which is now extinct, on

the borders of Holland, and the Nethcrland, which, remaining in an un-

cultivated state in the Flemish dialect, has, on the other hand, become

in Holland a national and literaryidiom.

IV. The third branch, a mixture of almost all the rest, was formed in

England by the union of the Saxons, the Jutes, and the Angles, to whom

were added, at a subsequent period,the Danes. Thus arose the Anglo-

Saxon, the earliest monuments of which date from the eighth century of

our era, and which language, about three centuries later, combining in

its turn with the old French brought in by the Norman conquest, gave

birth to the English tongue.

V. The fourth branch, that of Northern Germany or Scandinavia, gave

birth to the Old Norman, the sacred language of the Edda, superseded

afterward by the Norwegian or Icelandic, in which the Scalds composed

their sacTas. This last-mentioned idiom also fell into disuse about theO

fifth century of our era, and from it arose the Swedish and Danish, two

languages intimately connected with each other, which to the force and

regularity of the German add a peculiar clearness and conciseness of

their own, and the culture of which is far from being neglected.

VI. The fifth branch, formed from the conquering nations which cov-

ered Eastern Germany, but the dialects of all of whom are now extinct,

is known to us merely by the Masso-Gothic, some fragments of which

are preservedin the Bible of Ulphilas.

This precious monument of the

fourth century, the most ancient that remains to us of the German idi-

oms, displays to us, in its rich grammatical forms, the common bond that

united these idioms to one another, and shows, at the same time, the

allihation, no less intimate and real, which connects them all with the

Latin, the Greek, and the Sanscrit.

SLAVONIC LANGUAGES.

I.

TheSlavonic

family,which

occupies

the eastern

part

of

Europe,divides itself into but three branches, which may be denominated the

Servian, Tchekhe, and Letton.

II. The first of these comprehends the eastern Slavi, whose language

was the old Slavonic, employed, about the commencement of the ninth

century, in the writings of Cyrill,who was also the inventor of their al-

phabet.This old Slavonic has given birth to several dialects, still used



206 CELTIC LANGUAGES.

in Illyria and Servia, but it has become an ecclesiastical and dead lan-

guage in Russia, where it has been superseded, in all the ordinary rela-

tions of life, by the Russia7i, which only differs from it, however, in

some small degree.

III. The Russian language, but little known beyond the precincts of

that empire, yields not, however, either to the Greek or the German in

the abundance of its roots, the regularityof its derivations, or the happy

combination of words, while, on the other hand, it surpasses the latter

in sweetness and harmony. Around the Russianare

grouped,with a

striking analogy, the Servian, Croatian, and Winde, spoken by the Slavi

of the Turkish and Austrian provinces.

IV. The second branch, that of the western Slavi, comprehends the

Bohemian, formerly a cultivated tongue, and of which the Slovaque, in

Hungary, is a rude dialect, the Polish, the Wi7ide, and the Sorabian, the

two latter of which remain still in an uncultivated state.

V. The third branch, very different in its character from, the other

two, which it in all probability preceded, is that of the central Slavi,

whose primitive idiom, the Pruc'ze, is now entirely extinct. The Lith-

uanian, however, and the Lelton, spoken at the present day in Lithuania

and Courland, still offer to the consideration of the philologist the most

interesting subjects of comparison with the other Slavonic dialects, whose

elementary forms they reveal to our view, as well as with the Sanscrit^

with which they appear immediately connected.

CELTIC LANGUAGES.

I. This ancient family, which we have reserved for the end of the list,

as having been the first that was separated, and, consequently, the farthest

removed from its Asiaticsource,

is divided iuto twobranches,

the Gae-

lic and Cymric.

II. The Gaelic branch, that of the pure Celts, who fled to the north-

ern part of England and to Ireland, is marked by frequent aspirations,

by a scarcityof terminations, and by the monotony of its combinations,

which leads to the supposition that there were earlier flexions than those

which have reachi^d us. This language, after having attained to a con-

siderable degree of culture, still exists, in some obscure degree, in the

Irish and the mountaineer-Scotch.

III. The Cymric branch, that of the Celto-Belgae, known at a later

period by the name of Bretons, is remarkable for its moveable articula-

tions and its close affinityto the Latm, the result of the Roman sway.

It remains in two popular dialects at the present day, the Welsh in Eng-

land, and the Bas-Brcton or Brei/zad in France.



INDO-GERMANIC ANALOGIES. 207

Such are the languages that compose the Indo-Germanic group, and

to an examination of the analogies between which we will now devote

the remainder of this volume. We have omitted, in the enumeration

above given,the Basque tongue, spoken in the southwestern part

of Eu-

rope,and the Finnish dialects in the northeast. The reason is, because

they present a physiognomy too different from that of all the languages

we have justbeen considering to admit of their being ranked m the same

class with them. It may be observed, however, that the Finnish dialects

have borrowed many words from the German and Slavonic, while the

Basque, notwithstanding its African origm, displays many points of con-

tact with the Celtic and Latin.'

VI. INDO-GERMANIG ANALOGIES.

I. In conducting the present inquiry, we will first turn our attention

to the interchanoe of sounds, consonants as well as vowels, traceable in

words etymologically corresponding to each other in the Sanscrit andits

European and Oriental sister tongues.

II. It is highly probable that, in all languages, only the simple vowels

a, i,and u primarily existed, and that all other vowels arose out of these

three elementary sounds by mixture, or, in some instances, by their mu-

tual influence when placed in close proximity to each other in the same

word and in successive syllables.'^

III. In Sanscrit, the short vowels a, i, and u only are represented by

distinct characters;and if we consider the extreme accuracy with which,

in the Devanagari alphabet,all the varying articulations of the human

voice are expressed,we are driven at once to the conclusion that, in the

age when that alphabetwas invented to fix the various sounds and com-

binations of sounds occurring in the Sanscrit language,the latter pos-

sessed no other short vowels but these.^

IV. It is even remarked by a recent writer,'' that, in the vernacular

idioms now current in India, he never was able to detect any sounds sim-

ilar to the Italian short c and o in the pronunciationof natives from all

the different provincesof India.

V. In the Gothic, the short e and o are in like manner wanting, and

the short German e corresponds to a, i, and u of the former tongue.

Thus,(or

faltJia,in

Gothic,we have in German {icli)

falte; and for the

Gothic giba, the corresponding form in German is (ich) gebc.

1. Eir.hnf.p. 24, seq.

2. Pott, Elymolugische For chungen,\<. 1.

3. Pott, I. c—Journal of Education, No. 20, p. ZW.—Bopp, Vergleichende Gram-

malik. p. 3.

4. Colonel Vans Kennedy, Researches, &.c., p. 243.



208 SANSCRIT AND TEUTONIC.

SANSCRIT AND TEUTONIC.

'

1. Vowel-changes.

I. For the Sanscrit long a the Gothic has almost always long o, the

long a being entirely wanting in this latter tongue. In contractions,

however, this long o becomes short a. Sometimes, in Gothic, long e is

found to correspond to the Sanscrit long a, as, for example, in the geni-

tive pluralof the masculine and neuter.

II. For t and l in Sanscrit, the Gothic has i and ei, which last is ev-

erywhere equivalent to l, and in the old High-German appears as such.

In the modern German this old I is most commonly changed to ei. Thus,

mein in German, mei?ia the Gothic genitive,min in old High-German.

III. As a general rule, the t as a final vowel disappears entirely in

German, and most commonly in Latin. Tlius,

Sanscrit.



SANSCRIT AND TEUTONIC. 209

Gothic.



210 SANSCRIT AND TEUTONIC.

shouna,



SANSCRIT AND GREEK. 211

•prinami.

ap (root).

frijo (" I love"), dfrindmi,^

ahva? (" river"), dfs,

V. Frequently, however, we have flections, or grammatical additions,

which do not obey the laws regulating the interchange of consonants,

but remain true to the primitivesound. Thus, the old High-German re-

tains the originalt in the third person singular and plural ; as, for ex-

ample, hapet, "he has," and hapent,"they have ;" with which compare

the Latin habet and habcnt. The Gothic, on the other hand, has hahaith

and Jiaband. So, also, in the participle present, and in that of the pas-

sive voice, the old High-German adheres to the t,as hapenter, hapeter,

whereas the Gothic, under the influence of the n that precedes, brings

in the d; as, halands, gen. habandins ; habaith, gen. habaidis.

SANSCRIT AND GREEK.^

1. Vowel-changes.

I. The short vowels a, 1, u, in Sanscrit, generally correspond to the

Greek a, i, v. The Greek language has seldom substituted these three

vowels one for another;but its two short vowels, e and o, have each their

share of the province which in Sanscrit is left to the a solely. The fol-

lowing examples may serve to tluow some light upon tlus subject.

I. Sanscrit a corresponding to a in Greek.

1. In roots.

Sanscrit.

labh (" to take"),

das (" to bite"),

dam (" to tame"),

tan ("to extend"),

han ("to

kill"),

apa (" oflf,""from"),

asm (" a tear"),

sata (" a hundred"),

a (negative prefix), a-.

2. In terminations, suffixes, &c.

as, the termination of the accusative case of the plural number of

masculine words, the crude forms of wh'ch end in a consonant, corre-

sponding to the Greek af in Xiovr-ar, &c.

1."

I ble.ss," from the Sanscrit root pri,"to love," with the preposition a prefixed.

2. The Zend afs and Sanscrit ap denote"water," and the Gothic form is explained

by the frequent change of p into k, (or which tlie law that regulates the inlercliange

of consonants requires h. Compare the Latin aqua.3. Pott, Elymol. Forsch. p. \80.—Journal of Education,'No. 20, f.Zi2,seq.,vi\ieto

an able abstract is given by Rosen of part of the German work.



212 SANSCRIT AND GREEK.

man is in Sanscrit the termination of a number of substantives, de-

rived from verbal roots, and generally denoting the result of the

action implied by the verb; as, ganman (nom. ganma),

"birth,"

from the root gan,"

to beget,""

to produce ;" karman (nom.

karma)," an action,"

" a deed," whether good or evil, from the

root krl,"

to do." To this termination corresponds the Greek suf-

fix-/la, gen. -fia-oc ;

as in opa/ia,"a spectacle,"

"anything seen,"

from opuu,"

to see ;" d?//xaand

6^fia,"a tie," from 6eu,

"to

bind,"

"

to tie," &c.an is in Sanscrit the termination of the crude form of the numer-

als for five, seven, -eight, nine, and ten, panchan, saptan, ashtan,

navan, dasan. The corresponding Greek numerals have dropped

the final 7i, and three of them, iTrrd, kvvea, and de/ca, have re-

tained the a, while irevTc and o/crw' have kept it only when placed

in composition before other partsof speech ; as, 6/craeT7?f, okto.-

fj-Tjvog, TtevTaiTTjg, TrevTumjxvCt <5lC.

II. Sanscrit a corresponding to £ in Greek.

1. In roots.

Sanscrit. Greek.

pat (" to fall"),

po.ck (" to cook"),

ad (" to eat"),

tap (" to be hot"),

taksh (" to build"),

abhi (" near"),

pari (" around"),

aham (" I "),

kyas ("yesterday"),

2. In terminations, &c.

a, the augment of several forms of the preterittense in Sanscrit,

has in Greek become e.

as in Sanscrit is the termination of the nominative case in the

pluralnumber of substantives, the crude form of which ends in a

consonant, corresponding to the Greek -eg in Movr-sg, &c.

III. Sanscrit a correspondmg to the Greek o.

1. In roots, &c.

Sanscrit. Greek.

sad (" to go"), OA, 66-6g.

pad (" to go"), nOA, TTOvg, ' To6-6g.

nET,



SANSCRIT AND GREEK, 213

pati ("master," "husband"), 7r6ff(f.

dama (" house"), dofiog.

pra,prati, T^po, npSc, izpori.

sama (" alike,""the same"), 6/zo,

in composition.

sah (" he"), o, of (for ovrog, ode).

2. In terminations, &c.

as is in Sanscrit the termination of the genitive case singular of

substantives, the crude forms of wluch end in a consonant, cor-

responding to the Greek of in 7i£ovt-oq, &c.

a, as the termination of the crude forms of a large number of San-

scrit nouns (substantives, adjectives, participles), corresponds, in

the majority of instances, to o in Greek; as, asva,

"a horse,"

tTTTTOf ; vrika,"a wolf," Tlvkoc, &c.

IV. The instances of words in wliich a Greek i corresponds to a in

Sanscrit are few in number. The following are some of the

principal ones :

Sanscrit. Greek.

pat, niT, n-iTVG).

khara (" an ass"),"

., , /cj^Xof.

as, la-dc.

was,ia-ria, Ionic la-Tirj.

2. Consonant-changes.

1. Gutturals.

I. The gutturalletters in Sanscrit and Greek generally correspond to

each other. Thus, in the case of the Sanscrit k, we have the root At?,

"to do," and in Greek Kpaivu,

"to accomplish," with which may be

compared the Latin creare. So, also, kapdla, "the head," Gr. Ke(pah/

(Alexandrian /cefiaA?/) ; kapi, "an ape," Gr. kijtvoq ; kumba, "a vase,"

Gr. KVjiCog, &c.

II. Sometimes the gutturalin Greek corresponds to a y or z sound in

Sanscrit; as, fjSr],

Sanscrit root yar (compare the Latin juv-enis), where,

moreover, the v sound has passed into a/3 ;

and rinap, gen. rjwar-og,

where the Sanscrit has yakrit and the Latin jecur. The old form of

jecur is thought to have been jecurt^ {jecurit), which would supply the

link.

III. Sometimes the Sanscrit k changes to a tt in Greek. Thus we

1. Instances are found also in Gothic; thus, sibun (S. saptan) ; Jidvor (S. tshat-

vari) ; Jimf {ii. pantsch) ; kiiimis{S. hanu) ; &c.

2. Pott, Etymol. Vorsch. vol.i., p. 113; vol.

ii., p. 290, 609.




have in Sanscrit, in the case of the interrogativ& pronouns and particles,

kas, ka, kim, &c., and in Greek the pronominal roots 1102, IIH, HON,

whence come tvov, Kodev, -nOTEpoc, &c. It is worthy of remark, that k

is used for tt, however, not only in Ionic, as kov, koOev, Korepoc, &c.,

but also in JHolic Greek, the oldest of the dialects, and more extensively,

too, in this than in Ionic' The Latin gu, equivalent to k, may also be

compared with this.

IV. The consonants ksh in Sanscrit answer to ^ in Greek (where the

.^olians say kg) ; as, aksha," a chariot," Gr. u^-uv {axis) ; daksha,

" the right," Gr. c5ef-idf. Sometimes, however, the k is preserved in

Greek, but the sh changes into a r; as, ksliinomi,

"to destroy," Gr.

KTlvvvfii,; riksha," a bear," Gr. apKTOQ ;

with which may be compared

vakshas,"a breast," in Latin pect-us.

2. Palatals.

I. The palatal consonants in Sanscrit are cJi and_;',

and their respect-

ive aspirates chh and jh. Neither of these sounds seems to have exist-

ed in Greek or Latin, and, accordingly, we must expect to tind their

places occupied by different letters in such words as are common to

either of these languages with the Sanscrit. Ch has often passed over

in Latin into q, and in Greek into n or r. Thus,

Sanscrit.

Latin quatuor, Gr. Tscrcrapeg, JEol. mcvpeg."

quinque, Gr. nevTS, iTi/XTTe

"voco, Gr. FfTTOf.

"coquo, Gr. iziiiTu.

"que, Gr. re.

"J)OSt.

3. Deyitals.

I. The letters of the dental class, the common t and d, with their as-

pirates,and n, are very extensively used in Sanscrit, and have, for the

mostpart,

been preserved unchanged in such words as are common to

the Greek and Latin with the Sanscrit. Thus, among others that might

be cited.

chatur




II. In some instances, the Sanscrit t has become a in Greek, but re-

mains unchanged in Latin. Thus,

Sanscrit.

tuam (" thou"), Gr. ov, Dor. and ^ol. tv, Latin tu.

chalur ("four"), Gr. reaffapsg, Latin quatuor.

•pat (" master,""husband"), Gr. Tcoaig, Latin polcns.

III. The instances where d has been kept unchanged are very frequent.

The following are a few of the number :

S.4.NSCRIT.

ad (" to eat") Greek e6u, Latin edo.

dam (" to subdue"),"

Safiuu, Latin domare.

da (" to give"),"

Ai2, dldujiL,Latin do.

da (" to cut"),"

daiofxat, whence 6a'i(.

sad (" to sit"),"

'EA, e^ofiai,Latin sedere.

IV. The number of words with n, which letter has generally been pre-

served unaltered in all the cognate languages, is also considerable. The

following may serve as specimens :

S.\NSCKIT.

man (" to think"), Greek MEN, fiefiova,Latin memini.

nri (" a man"),"

uvrip.

7iau ("a ship"),"

vavg,lu2Lt'm navis.

nas (" to die"), Latin nccare, ncx, Gr. NEK, veKpoc, &c.

II. GRAMMATICAL ANALOGIES.l

I. Ground-form.

I. The Sanscrit settles the long-contested question whether the nom-

inative is a case, or only the form from which cases are derived. In

this

language

there exists a theme or

ground-form entirely

distinct from

the nominative, and from which the noihinative itself is formed by add-

ing a distinctive termination.

II. Before we proceed to describe the manner in which the respective

cases are formed, it will be important to make some general remarks on

the end-vowels which connect the case-suffixes with these ground-forms

in different words, and on the points of resemblance or difference, in this

respect, between the Sanscrit and the other Indo-Germanic tongues.

III. The three ground-vowels a, i, u, appear in Sanscrit, as well short

as long,at the end of the ground-forms of words. The short a is al-

ways either masculine or neuter, never feminine, and we find a corre-

sponding a in Zend and Lithuanian. In the German dialects, however,

1. Bopp, Vergleickeiide Grammatik, p. 133, seq.




even in the Gothic, this a very seldom appears, and in the younger dia-

lects is superseded by m or c In Greek, the o of the second declension

(2.6yo-(:)answers to this same a, as was also the case in the early Latin,

where they said domino-s in the nominative for dominu-s.^

IV. The Greek masculines of the first declension in a-f, together w^ith

the form in ??-f, proceeding from them, point at once to the connexion

between themselves and the Sanscrit masculine a, while, on the other

hand, their identity with the o-stem is shown by the termination ov in

thegenitive. So, too,

in the

compounds ixvponukrj-^, nat.6oTpL6r]-g,the

vowel7] appended to the roots Ili^A and TPIB takes the place of the

Sanscrit a in similar compounds, where in Greek the o-sound generally

appears.

V. The shorti, which is of three genders, answers to the same vowel

in the other Indo-Germanic tongues. In Latin, however, this i is some-

times interchanged with e; as, facile for fadli, mare for mari, where

we may compare the Sanscrit root vdri, " water." In Greek, this same

i is weakened, for the most part, before another vowel, into s.

VI. The short it also appears in Sanscrit in the three genders, like

the Greek v and the Gothic u. To this corresponds the Latin u of the

fourth declension.

VII. The long vowels a, i, u belong in Sanscrit mostly to the femi-

nine, never to the neuter, very seldom to the masculine. In Zend, the

long final a is shortened in polysyllables. So, also, in Gothic, where

the Sanscrit feminine stem in a long changes to o long, this o becomes

short a in flectionless nominatives and accusatives singular. The Latin

also has shortened the old feminine long a in flectionless nominatives

and accusatives, while the Lithuanian, on the other hand, preserves the

a in the nominative lono-.

VIII. Thelong

i

appearsmost

frequentlyin Sanscrit as the charac-

teristic addition for forming the feminine stem. Thus, from mahat

(" magnus") comes mahati (" magna"). The same thing occurs in

Zend. The Lithuanian, however, has preserved this i as a feminine

characteristic in the truest manner, for in this language an i is added to

the old participle-sufEx aiit;and thus we have csanl-i (" she being") and

lu-sent-i (" she about to be"). In Greek and Latin this long feminine

i generally disappears, or else, when traces of it happen to be found, wealso find, at the same time, some letter added as a kind of support for

the case-ending. This addition is in Greek an a or d, in Latin a c.

Thus, the Greek ?;Je(a corresponds to the Sanscrit svadv-i, from svadu,

"sweet." And so also in Greek, -Tpta and -rpid in opxTjarpLa, and

1. Struve, uber die Lat. Declin. p. 11.




IrjOTpii, 7i.rjaTpL6og, answer the same purpose as the Sanscrit -tri in gan-

itri, which last again corresponds to the Latin forms genetri-c-s, gen.

geniiri-c-is.

IX. In such Greek forms as -yevETsipa the feminine i is removed one

syllable back, and the same analogy prevails in fiD'Miva, TuAaiva, ripsi,-

va, &c., and also in such substantive forms as Tinraiva, -depdnaiva,

?i.eaiva. The instances in Greek where the feminine i is supplied by a,

limit themselves to feminines from forms in vt, where the t changes to

a(7, and the v is transformed into an v or i, or else its place is supphed

by the lengthening of the preceding vowel. Thus,

ovcr-a, ELff-a, Eaa-a, ua-a, va-a,

for ovT-a, EVT-a, evT-a, avr-a, vvr-a.

X. The long u appears in Sanscrit very seldom at the end of ground-

forms, and is mostly feminine. The most usual terms with this are

vadhu,"a wife ;" bhu,

"earth ;" svasrii,

"a mother-in-law ;" hhru,

" the eyebrow." To this last corresponds the Greek b(ppvg, which has

also a long v in the termination of the nominative, though the short v in

the genitive.

XI. Very few ground-forms in Sanscrit end in a diphthong. None in

e, and only one in ai, namely, rai," a thing,"

"wealth," which in the

nominative makes rd-s for rai-s, and is evidently the same with the

Latin res.

XII. Ground-forms in o are seldom found in Sanscrit. The only two

thus far ascertained are dyo,"heaven," and go. In the former of these

the 6 changes into a in the accusative; as, dya-m, with which we may

compare the Latin accusative diem. The latter, namely, go, has sev-

eral significations, the most common of which are, in the masculine," a

steer," in the feminine," a cow," and also

"the earth." For the last of

these significations the Greek employs the formyij

or yd, but for the

meaning of "bull,"

"cow," &c., it brings in the diphthong ov, and

changes the old guttural letter into the cognate labial(3, forming in this

way (Sovg.^

XIII. Ground-forms in au are also few in number in Sanscrit. The

most remarkable is nau,"a ship," with which we immediately compare

the Greek vavc and the Latin navis. This Sanscrit root nau is thought

to have been originally snau, from sna,

"to

bathe," and which probably

signified at first also"

to swim," with which, in this sense, we may com-

pare the Latin na-lo and the Greek vu-u, ve-u. The digammated form

vaFeg may easily be assimilated to the Sanscrit nav-as. In the Latin a

foreign appendage presents itself; as, navis, navi-bus, for nau-s, nau-

1. Bopp, Vergleichcnde Grammatik, p. 146.

T




bus. As the half vowel v easily hardens into a guttural,we find a sister

form for nav, nav-am, in the German nach-en,"a wherry," which in old

High-German is nacch-o.

XIV. We now pass to the consonants. Of these, n, t, s, and r most

frequently appear in Sanscrit at the end of ground-forms. All the other

consonants are found only at the end of radical words that are of rare

occurrence, and appended to certain verbal stems whoseorigin is not

clearly established. Of the gutturals, again, namely, k, kh, g, gh, we

find none at the end of the more familiar verbal stems, whereas in Greek

and Latin they are of frequent occurrence, as iPIK, KOPAK, <I>AOr,

ONTX, DUG, VORAC, EDAC, LEG, &c. The d seldom appears in

Sanscrit ground-forms ;the t, on the

contrary, is of very frequent occur-

rence. The Greek, besides r, shows also 6 and &. We must be care-

ful, however, not to regard such words as K0PT9 and OPNI0 in the

lightof simple roots. In the former of these the G is part of the root

GH or GE, and the term denotesoriginally something placed

on ihe head.

In the latter case we trace the etymology to the Sanscrit arani, in Ben-

galee orojii,"a forest," whence the Greek opvi, which, with G added

from -deu,"

to run" or" move swiftly," indicates a creature that flies

swiftly through the woods, no unapt designation, certainly, of a bird.

XV. Ground-forms ending with a labial, the nasal m being included

in this class, appear in Sanscrit only in the case of naked roots, as the

last member of a compound, and even here not very often. We have,

however, as an isolated root, the term ap,"water," whence the Latin

aqua, the p being changed into qu, as in quinque, from the Sanscrit pan-

can,"

five," and a vowel being added. From this same ap comes the

Latin am-nis,"a river," like somnus for sopnus, and

aefivoQ for aeBvog.

XVI. Of the Sanscrit sibilants, the '5 and sh appear only at the end

of radicals, and therefore but seldom. The s, on the contrary, becomes

a closing letter for a very usual suffix in the forming of words; as, for

example, in as, which is employed in the formation of neuter nouns.

The Greek apparently is without any root in 2; but, the truth is, this

sibilant in Greek is commonly rejected between two vowels, especially

in the last syllable, and therefore neuters like fxevog and yevo^ (from

MENE2 and PENES, the e being changed to 0) form the genitive /nsv-

£0f andyiveog,

for

fihscog

andyivEaog.

II. Individual Cases.

I. The Sanscrit cases, as has already been mentioned, are eight in

number, namely, the nominative, vocative, dative, accusative, ablative,

locative, instrumental, and genitive.

II. The locative refers not only to place, as its name imports, but also



NOMINATIVE. 219

to the point of time conceived as space, and to the state, condition, or

circumstances made up of time and place.

III. The instrumental case indicates the instrument or means by which

anything is done, and, under the general idea expressed by this latter

term "means," are included the individual ideas of the accompanying

person, the member or part affected, and the quantity or amount effected.

IV. The genitiveis placed last, as it is a case per se, standing in the

same relation to the noun as the other cases do to the verb, and, although

a single case, imbodying all their different usages and acceptations.

Hence the wide range given to the genitive in the Sanscrit, Greek,

Latin, and German;and hence, also, this same case has been styled the

adnominal, since it is properly used with the noun, while the other cases

have been termed adverbial, from their relation to the verb.

Nomi7ialive.

I. The suffix of the nominative singular in Sanscrit masculine and

feminine stems that terminate in a vowel is s, and the origin of this may

be traced to the pronominal stem sa,"he,"

"this one." Thus we have,

among masculines,

vrika-s (stem vrika),"a wolf."

pati-s (stem pali),"a lord" or

" husband."

kawi-s (stem kawi),"a poet."

And among feminines the following :

priti-s (stem prili)," love."

tanu-s (stem tanu)," a body."

ndu-s (stem naw), "a ship."

II. In Zend, this s, if preceded by a, changes into u, and then the a

and u are blended into 6. The same happens in Sanscrit, but only be-

fore sonant letters. Thus, in Zend we have vehrko (from vekrka-u,

stem vchrka)," a wolf," and ko,

"this," for ka-u (stem ka). So in San-

scrit, sulo mama, "my son," from suta-u ; but sula-s lava, "thy son."

III. This nominative sufRx s appears also in Greek, Latin, Lithuanian,

and Gothic. Thus, Xviio-c, Koai-g, ttItv-c, oTT-g, eko-c ; lupus, hosti-s,

pccu-s, voc-s, opus ; Lithuanian, wilkas, pati-s,sunus ; Gothic, vulf's,

gasfs, sunus, &c.

IV. The Gothic, however, suppresses a and i before the s, except in

monosyllabic words, where such suppression would be impracticable.

Thus, it says hvas," who ;" is,

" he ;" but vulfs, gast's, for vulfas,

gastis} MascuUne stems in ja must be excepted from this rule, since

1. The term gasti-s means "a stranger," whence the English

"guesl." With the

Gothic we may compare the Latin hnsti.a, in its original acceptation, which, according

to Cicero, wasj also" a stranger." Thus, he remarks,

"Hoslis enim apud majores



220 NOMINATIVE.

they retain the vowel at the end*only softening it to i ; as, harji-s,"an

army." If, however, what is frequently the case, a long vowel or more

than one syllable precede the final syllable, then ji changes to ei; as,

andei-s,"the end ;" raginci-s,

"advice."

V. In others of the Teutonic dialects the nominative-ending s has

passed into r ; as. Old German, i-r," he ;" de-r,

"this

;'' hue-r," who ;"

plmte-r,"blind." Old Norse, ulf-r,

"a wolf ;" son-r,

" a son ;" blind-r,

"blind." German, er, der, wer, hlinde-r. Swedish and Danish, blind-r.

In the rest of the Teutonic dialects the nominative-characteristic is lost.

VI. If the ground-form in Sanscrit end in a consonant, the s is omit-

ted in masculines and feminines;and when two consonants close the

ground-form, the latter of the two isrejected by the same law of euphony.

Hence we have bibhrat for bibhrat-s," he that bears ;" tudan for tu-

dant-s," he that afflicts." The Zend, Greek, and Latin, on the other

hand, preserve the s, and therefore stand, in this respect, on earlier ground

than the Sanscrit. Thus we have, in Zend, df-s (for ap-s)," water ;"

kerefs,"a body." The Greek and Latin, when the final consonant of

the stem will not unite with the s, prefer giving up a part of the stem it-

self, and hence we haveX'^P'-i for

A'"P''''"f>comes for comit-s. Moreover,

the Latin, JEolic Greek, and Lithuanian agree in a surjirising manner

with the Zend, in that nt, when uniting with s, gives the form ns.

Thus we have amans ; ridevg ; Lithuanian, sukans ; Zend, sravayans,

"he that speaks."VII. A final n after a short vowel is no favourite in Sanscrit. Hence

we have the n rejected from a stem in the first part of a compound ;

as, rdga-putra,"the king's son," for ragan-putra. It is rejected also

from the nominative, in which rejection a preceding short vowel is made

long if the stem be of the masculine gender. Thus, rdgd,"

a king,"

from ragan, masculine, and ndmd,"a name," from riamart, neuter.

The Zend agrees in this with the Sanscrit, except as regards the length-

ening of the vowel; as, ashavd,

" the pure," from ashavan, masculine;

cashma,"the eye," from cashman, neuter.

VIII. The Latin follows the Stoscrit and Zend in suppressing n in

the nominative of masculines and feminines, but not in neuters; as,

sermo, sermon-is ; actio, action-is ; but nomen, not nome or nomo. The

root can at the end of compounds does not, however, reject the n, in

order, very probably, to prevent any further weakening of so feeble a

syllable. Hence we have tubi-ccn, fidi-ccn, os-ccn, &c. The term lien

is a mutilation from lieni-s. Pecten appears to be an isolated case.

IX. If the theme in Sanscrit end in r, the r is omitted;neither does

nostras is dicebatvr, quern nunc jierrgrinum dicimus" (De Off". 1, 12). The Indian

origin o( lioslts, iberefore, is fully apparent.



NOMINATIVE. 221

any nominative suffix s appear. The preceding vowel also is length-

ened. Thus we have blirdtd, from bhrdtdr, "a brother;" data, from

ddtdr, "a giver ;" mdld, from md/dr, " a mother; pitd, from pilar, "a

father." The lengtheningof the vowel appears to supply the place of

the rejected r.

X. The Zend and Lithuanian follow the analogy of the Sanscrit, and

rejectthe r, while, on the other hand, the Teutonic dialects, together

with the Crreek and Latin, retain it. Thus we have, in Gothic, brothar,

svistar, daughtar;

in the old

High-German, pruodar,suestar, tohla.r ;

in Greek, iraTfjp, (irirrip, -dvydri^p, dai'ip ;in Latin, paler, mater, /rater,

soror, &c. The question here presents itself, whether these forms in r

be the earlier ones, or whether the rejectionof this same letter be not

more ancient. A careful examination of the point will result in favour

of the latter opinion. In the first place, we have the testimony of the

Sanscrit, Zend, and Lithuanian for the early originof the rejection of r ;

and, in the second place, such Greek forms as Trarrjp, f^tjTijp, &c., showin their declension something peculiar and strange, since, as p and c are

unwilling to coalesce, they prefer giving up the case-sign and retaining

the stem-consonant, a process directly the reverse of what takes place in

the more regular forms, such as iraic and Tiovc, for Trald-g and -rroS-g.

XL Masculine and feminine ground-formsin Sanscrit that end in as

lengthen the vowel a in the nominative singular. They are mostly com-

pounds, and have for the last member in this composition a neuter sub-

stantive in as. Thus, dur-manas,"

bad-spirited,"from dies (which be-

comes dur before the sonant letters) and the neuter noun mands,"

spirit"

(the root, probably, of the Latin animus, but certainly the source whence

come mens andjievog).

We have, therefore, in the masculine and fem-

inine, durmands, but in the neuter durmands. The analogy between this

and the Greek 6, •/;, 6vuiiEv{]r,neuter to

6v(t/u.£vec,is very stxiking.

The

Sanscrit genitive, again,is dusmanas-as, with which we may compare

the old Greek form SvajxEvca-oc, whence, according to a previous para-

graph, comes the received form dvajiEve-og.The f at the end of the

nominative is to be regarded either as a stem-consonant, or a case-sign

before which the stem-consonant f has fallen away. The former of these

opinionsis the more probable one, and derives support from the analogy

of the Latin, where those masculineand feminine forms of the nomina-

tive which correspond to the Sanscrit stems in as arc, in like manner,

without a case-sign. Thus, the Sanscrit comparative suffix -iyas be-

comes in Latin -ior, with the usual change of s into r, and the nomina-

tive is without the case-sign in both the masculine and feminine;but in

the neuter we have us, corresponding to the Sanscrit as, the u being

T2



222 LOCATIVE.

friendly to a final s, and protecting it from being changed into r. Hence

gravius answers to the Sanscrit gariyas.

XII. Feminine ground-forms in d lose the s; as, dshiwd, " a tongue,"

kd," which." The same takes place in Zend

; as, hizwa, "a tongue,"

kci," which ;" and so in Lithuanian, rankd,

"a hand ;" with all which

may be compared the Greek and Latin forms ;i'wpa, fiovaa, terra, musa,

&c. We find, also, in Zend, feminine nominatives in e ; as, pereni,"

full,'' kaine,"a maiden ;" and these nominatives resemble very closely

in

appearanceGreek nouns in

//. The Zend form in c, however,appears

to be merely euphonic, and the e has been changed from an a through

the influence of a suppressed y (com.pare the Sanscrit form kanyd, where

this y appears). Hence it is not unreasonable to suppose that the e of

the Latin fifth declension, as in almost every instance an i precedes it,

has been changed from an a by the influence of this i. This may serve

to explain why we have occasionally two forms for the nominative, one

of the fifth and the other of the first declension ; as, for example, mate-

ries and materia, the latter of which follows the analogy of the Greek,

and allows a to remain unaltered before i,as in GO(^ia. The Ionic form,

on the other hand, follows the Zend, as aoflr].

Vocative.

I. The vocative in Sanscrit has no peculiar case-sign of its own. It

is often identical with the nominative, and where it differs from that case

it coincides very nearly with the naked theme or ground-form.

II. In monosyllables the vocative is the same as the nominative.

Thus we have, nom. bhi-s, "fear," voc. bhi-s, "oh fear," like /cj-j- and

other monosyllables in Greek.

III. In other kinds of words an a at the end of the stem remains un-

altered in Sanscrit and Zend, but in Lithuanian is weakened into e.

The Greek and Latin, like the Lithuanian, change o and u into a short

e in the corresponding declension, as Xiike, lupc. We must not, how-

ever, regard this e as a species of case-ending either in the Greek or the

Latin. The forms Ivke and Iwpe bear the same relation to the Sanscrit

vrika that rcevTe and quinque do to pancan ; that is, the old a, which in

2.VK0( appears as o, and in Ivpus as u, has assumed the form of a short e.

IV. Sanscrit stems in i and u are increasedby guna ;'

neuters have

also the pure vowel. Thus we have in Sanscrit pati, vocative oi pali-s,

"a lord" or "husband;" sunb, vocative of sunu-s, "a son;" nama,

vocative of nanian,"a name," neuter.

V. The guna-form in 6 (from a-J-w) agrees in a remarkable manner

^F

1. Guna, in Paiuscrit, means the insertion of a short a before i and u, and in then

Ui.iking a+i coalesce into e, and a-{-u into <5.



DATIVE. 223

with the Gothic and Lithuanian. Thus we have, in the two latter, su-

nau, sunaii, and in Sanscrit su7id (from sunaii).

VI. The Gothic and Latin, where the stem ends in n, suppress this

letter in the vocative as in the nominative, whereas the Sanscrit and

Zend restore to the vocative the nasal letter taken from the nominative.

Thus we have in Sanscrit dtman, in Zend asman, but m Gothic ahma',

with which compare the Latin sermo in the vocative.

VIL The Greek, in numerous instances, takes its vocative pure from

the nominative. In others, it gives this case the naked stem, or else

the stem only so far altered as euphony or assimilation requires. Thus

we have Tu7.av as the vocative of ruAa^, ;);apt'ev (for x'^P'-^vt) as the

vocative of;^;api£if,

and rval (for Tvald) as the vocative of Tra^f. The

Latin carries out still more fully the example of degeneration set for it

by the Greek in the case of the vocative, and, with the single exception

of the second declension, makes the vocative the same as the nominative.

Dative.

I. The dative in Sanscrit ends properly in e, which termination de-

rives itsorigin,

in all probability, from the demonstrative pronominal

stem e. The Zend has a similar ending. Thus we have in Sanscrit

bhrdlr-e,"to the brother ;" duhitr-e,

"to the daughter ;" and in Zend,

hratkr-e and dughdher-e.

II. Feminine stems in

a,i, u, and

occasionallythose in t and u,

lengthenout, in Sanscrit, this termination e into di. Stems in a have, moreover,

an i inserted; as, givdi-di,

"to the tongue" (stem givd). while those in

I and u take the guna before e ; as, sunav-e,"to a son" (stem sunu).

In Zend, feminine stems in d and i have also the ending of the dative in

di, as in Sanscrit.

III. Sanscrit stems in a add another a to the case-sign e, and then,

• since e is here equivalent to a-\-i, there results from this union the form

aya. Hence we have vrikaya,"to the wolf" (stem vrikd). The Zend

makes merely di ; as wehrkdi.

IV. The Sanscrit forms the dative-ending of pronouns in smdi, from

the particle«wa with an i appended ; as, tasmdi,

"to this," kasmdi,

"to

whom." In Zend, this sma changes to hma; as, kahmdi, "to whom."

In Pracrit and Pali, also, wc have the « converted info an h, but the h

and m at the same time are ])laccdin an inverted order, whence we find

mho, used for hma. In Pracrit, therefore, wc have amhe, "we," with

which compare the GreekufifZEg ;

and from mka we come to the Gothic

nsa, in u-nsa-ra and ti-nsi-s.

V. In Lithuanian the dative ends in i ; as, wilku-i, "to the wolf;"



224 ACCUSATIVE.

paii-m (lord) jmti-m

sunu-m (son) pasu-m

ddna-m(gift)

date-m

tanu-m (body) lanu-m

hosLc-m

pecu-m

donu-m

socru-vi

pati-n

sunii-n

*****

*****

gast''

sunu

daur''

handu.

sunu-i, "to the son." In adjectives and pronouns it ends in m; as,

tam,"

to him ;" gcram,"

to the good."

VI.The

usualGreek and

Latindative are taken from the original lo-O

cative, to which the student is liere referred.

Accusative.

I. The characteristic of the accusative in Sanscrit, Zend, and Latin^

is the letter m ; in Greek, v is substituted on grounds of euphony. In

Lithuanian the old m is still farther weakened into a species of nasal n,

which

mSanscrit is termed

anusvara. The Germaniclanffuacres

havelost the accusative-sign in substantives, and this loss shows itself as

early

as the Gothic. In masculine adjectives and pronouns, however, a ter-

mination appears, and this termination in Gothic is na, but in the old

High-German more correctly n.

II. The following tabular view will make this subject more apparent :

Sanscrit. Zend. Greek. Latin. Lith. Gothic.

vrika-m (wolf) loehrke-m ?t,vKo-v lupu-m wilka-n vulf

TTUCL-V

6upo-v

ttItv-v

III. Monosyllabic words, in Sanscrit, ending in i,u, and du, make the

termination of the accusative am in place of the simple m, and this ap-

pears to be done in order to give them somewhat of a polysyllabic ap-

pearance. Thus, hhi,"

fear," and nau,"a ship," do not make in the

accusative bliim and ndum, as we might be led to expect from the anal-

ogy of the Greek vavv, but bhiy-avi, ndc-am. With this agree the Greek

stems in ev, since they make, in the accusative, e-a, from cF-a, instead

of Ev-v; as, j3aaLM{F)a for (3aai?^€v-v.

IV. It is erroneous, however, to regard, as many do, the Latin m in the

termination of the accusative asoriginating from an earlier ending em ;

and to make, for example, lupu-m come from lupo-em ;horam from hora-

em; fruclum from fructic-em, and diem from die-em. That a mere nasal

letter is amply sufficient to indicate the accusative, appears from the his-

tory of not only the whole class of Germanic tonges, but also the Sans-

crit, Zend, Greek, and Lithuanian.

V. The Latin cm in the accusative of the third declension is of twofold

origin. At one time the e belongs to the stem, and stands for i; as,

e-m in ign-cm (Sanscrit agni-m), which corresponds to i-m in Sanscrit,

i-m in Zend, l-v in Greek, i-n in Lithuanian, and i-na in Gothic : at other

times, when the stem terminates in a consonant, the e of em answers to

the Sanscrit a, to which it also corresponds in numerous other instances.



226 ABLATIVE.

Ahlalive.

I. The abladve in Sanscrit has t for its characteristic, the origin of

which is to be traced, in allprobability, to the demonstrative pronoun

ta,"this."

II. This case-letter, however, only appears with stems in a, which

vowel is lengthened before it;as vrikdt,

" from the wolf."

III. In Zend, the ablative, in like manner, ends in t; as, wehrhdt," from the wolf ;" but stems in i have 6i-t ; as, dfritoi-t,

"benedictione ;"

radshbi-t, " institutione."

IV. The old Latin agrees in this respect with the Sanscrit and Zend

to a very remarkable degree. Thus we have on the Columna Rosirata,

and in the decree of the senate" De Bacchanalibus,^' such forms of the

ablative as prcesented dictaiorcd, prcedad, m allod marid, senatud, &c.

The Oscan also formed the ablative in d, as appears from the Bantian

inscription, where we find dolud, mallud, cum prcivatud, toutad, prcE-

senlid, &c. We may remark, inpassing, that the old Latin and Oscan

forms of the third person of the imperative, namely, es-tod and es-tud (for

es-to), correspond surprisingly to the Veda-form obtained from Panini,

giva-tat, whichsignifies as well "

vivat" as"vive," and which may it-

self be compared with "vivito" of both the third and second person.

V. In classical Latin we meet with a kind of ablative form in the in-

separable pronoun met, which, from having originally belonged only to

the first person, as far as we can hazard a conjecture (supposing it to

be cognate with the Sanscrit ablative mat," from me"), passed subse-

quently over to all the persons. The conjunction scd, too, appears to

have been nothing more, originally, than the ablative of the reflexive pro-

noun sc. In the decree of the senate" De BaccltanaUhus," scd occurs

twice as a pronoun governed by inter, whence we may infer either that

inter was construed, in early Latin, with the ablative, or that the accu-

sative had then, in some instances, the same force as the ablative. In

favour of the latter opinion we may cite the accusative use of med and

ted in Plautus, and the employment of ead for ea (accusative plural neu-

ter) in the decree just referred to. Wc find, in this same decree, the

preposition extra appearing under the form of extrad. This will serve

to strengthen the opinion that the Latin prepositions in a were all origi-

nally ablative cases, and even pro would seem to have been at first writ-

ten prod, as an ablative, since we find traces of this early form in prod-es,

prod-eram, &c., whereas, in prosum, the d has disappeared from before

s by a law of euphony.

VI. The ablative in Sanscrit expresses removal from a place, answer-

ing to the question" whence V and this is its true and

original meaning,



LOCATIVE. 227

which the Latin has preserved only in the names of places. From the

idea of"whence," the ablative passes over to the relation of cause,

since that, on account of which anything takes place, may be regarded as

the spot or place from which the action goes forth. In this way the do-

mains of the ablative and instrumental cases touch each other. When

used adverbially, the ablative embraces a still wider range, and express-

es, in the case of some words, certain relations that are otherwise quite

foreign to it. In Greek, adverbs in uf may be regarded as sister-forms

of the Sanscrit ablative;so that u-g, from a stem in o, bears relation to

the Sanscrit d-t, from a stem in a, just as dlduat does to dadd-ti. Hence

6jiu-cis related to the Sanscrit samd-l,

"similarly," both in its ending

and its stem. Now, in the Greek language, the change from T to 2 at

the end of a word was absolutely necessary, in order to prevent the

total suppression of the former letter; and, therefore, we may safely

conclude that such adverbs aso/zu-f, ovtu-c, oi-f, came originally from

S/xu-T, ovTU-T, u-r, &c. We have a similar analogy in the Latin ad-

verbial forms guomodo, raro, vero, perpetuo, &c.

Locaiive.

I. This case has, in Sanscrit and Zend, an i for its characteristic

letter.

II. In Greek and Latin the locative has united itself under one form

with thedative,

but still withoutlosing

its ownpeculiar

reference to

place.Hence wo have Aci6ui'i, MapadCtvi, I,a/iafiLVi, iiypu, ockoi, xo--

fiai.So also we find this same case retaining its reference to a point of

time conceived of as space ; as, ry avry r/fzepa, ry avry vvkt'l, and in

Sanscrit divasd,"

in the day," nisi,"in the night."

III. When the stem ends in a, the case-sign i passes into e in both

Sanscrit and Zend, except that, in the latter language, bi also stands for

e, which circumstance produces a singular analogy between Zend lo-

catives in oi and such Greek datives as oIkoi, fioi,ao'i.

IV. In Lithuanian, the stems in a agree surprisinglyin the locative

with the Sanscrit and Zend, since they convert this a, together with the

old iocativc-sign i,which nowhere, any more appears pure in this tongue,

into the vowel e, saying diewe,"

in God," stem diewa, with which we

may compare the Sanscrit dtve and the Zend da&ve.

V. Masculine stems in Sanscrit that end in i and m, and occasionally

also feminine ones, have a locative ending in an. ; as, taiiau,"in the

body." The Zend gives to stems in u the genitive ending o, while to

express a genitive meaning the form eu-s is more usually employed.

VI. In Zend and Sanscrit we discover in several instances a species

of alhance between the genitive and locative, and the one appearingfor



228 INSTRUMENTAL.

the other. The same remark holds good with reference to the Latin;

and as in this language the genitive of the first and second declension

only appears with a locative meaning, for example, RomcB, Corinthi, hu-

mi, not in the third declension nor in theplural,

the opinion has been

advanced that the Latin genitive of the first two declensions is derived

from an ancient locative. It would seem, therefore, that when the first

declension lost its genitive in d-s, the dative (in itsorigin a locative)

was compelled also to supply the place of agenitive. In the second de-

clension, the form in o-i, which belongs properly to the locative, corre-

sponding to the Greek o and ot, and of which examples still remain,

as popoloi Romanoi, underwent a twofold change. It lost in the one

case the vowel that marked the ending, as domino ; while, in the other,

it dropped the stem-vowel and retained the ending, as domini ; the for-

mer of these settled down into a dative, the latter into a genitive.

VII. This view of the Latin cases frees that language from a gross

absurdity of syntax invented by the grammarians. According to them,

the name of a town is put in the genitive when the question is" where V

provided that name be of the first declension;but if it be of the third

declension or of the plural number, the name is put in the ablative The

truth is, what the grammarians mistake for a genitive in the one case,

and for an ablative in the other, is in both instances the same, namely,

a locative, and the error has arisen from confounding similar forms.

Instrumental.

I. The instrumental case has d for its characteristic letter in Sanscrit,

and this termination appears to be nothing more than a lengthening of

the pronominal stem a, and identical with the inseparable preposition a,

"on," "along,""

to," which comes from the same stem.

II. In Sanscrit, masculine and feminine stems ending in a short vowel

take a euphonic n. If the vowel at the end be a it is changed into e.

Hence we have vrike-n-a, "by the wolf;" sunu-n-a,"by the son."

III. The Vedas show likewise the remains of a formation without n ;

as, swapnay-d, "by sleep," for swapnS-n-a, theme swapna; and the or-

dinary language exhibits two forms analogous to this in may-d,"through

me ;" and tway-d,"through thee," from ma and tiva.

IV. In Zend the instrumental case is marked, as in Sanscrit, by a,

but more commonly short than long. Thus we have zaosh-a, "through

design ;" wchrk-d,"by the wolf" Monosyllabic stems, however, in a,

always lengthen the case-ending ; as, kha,"proprio."

V. In Lithuanian, this case ends in u, a, and mi. Stems in a form

their instrumental in ti; as, diew-u,

" Deo ;" feminine stems in a retain

this vowel as a case-ending ; as, ranka,"by the hand ;" while all other



GENITIVE. 229

etems take mi as the tennination of the instrumental ; as, sunu-mi, "by

the son."

VI. In Latin, the ablative is generally employed to denote the instru-

ment or means. Traces, however, of an independent instrumental case

still appear in such adverbs of manner as dure,"hardly ;" bene,

"well,"

&c.

VII. In Gothic, the instrumental, usually called the dative, ends in a;

as, gast-a,"by the guest."

In the other Germanic tongues it remains

in certain pronominal adverbs of manner; as, in old High-German, diu,

swa, wio 1 in Anglo-Saxon, thus, swa, hu ? in Enghsh, thus, so, how 1

Genitive.

I. The terminations of this important case, in Sanscrit, are s, sya, as,

and as, whereof the first three are common to the three genders, while

the last is confined to the feminine.

II. In Sanscrit, the vowels i and u take the guna, and this is also the

case in Zend; as, pate-s,

" of a husband ;" suno-s, " of a son ;" in Zend,

patbi-s,"of a husband ;" tancu-s,

"of a body." The Lithuanian and

Gothic, on the other hand, take the guna in the case of these same vow-

els in a more limited degree. All zi-stems in these two languages in-

sert an a before their final vowel, and thus the Lithuanian sunan-s and

the Gothic sunau-s correspond to the Sanscrit suno-s, from sunau-s.

Theguna,

however, limits itself, in Gothic, in the case of t-stems, to

feminines merely; as, anstai-s, "of favour."

III. The Sanscrit genitive-endingas passes over, in Greek, intoof in

the case of t and v stems, as also where the stem ends in a diphthong the

last vowel of which is v. Thus we have -nopri-og, Ixdv-oc, {iaatM-og.

In these no guna appears, such as iropTSi-g, lx6ev-g, forms utterly un-

known in Greek as genitives ; but, on the contrary, the true forms cor-

respond, like no6-6(,to the Sanscrit

genitiveof

consonant-stems, pad-as,

"pedis ;" vac-as,"vocis," &c. The Latin, on the other hand, agrees

more closely with the sister tongues, though not so far as to have the

guna, and hence hosti-s resembles the Gothic gasti-s. In the case of

Latin M-stems (4th declension) the lengthening of the u may take the

place of the guna ;or perhaps, more correctly speaking, this class of

words follow the Greek or consonant-principle, and the vowel which has

fallen away from before s is compensated by the lengthening of m.

IV. Stems in a, and also the pronouns of the third person, of which,

however, only one, namely, amu, ends with any other vowel but a, have

in Sanscrit the fuller genitive-sign sya; as, vrika-sya, "of the wolf;"

ta-sya, "hujus," &c.; amu-S7ja,

"illius." In Zend, this ending takes

the form oihe; as, vehrkahe, "of the wolf;" ka-he, "of whom."

U



230 GENITIVE.

V. The Greek and Latin show manifest traces of this genitive ending

in sya. Thus, since Sanscrit stems in a answer to Greek ones in o, and

since a towards the end of Greek words, when placed between two vow-

els, generally disappears, there can be but little, if any, doubt that the

old epic genitive-endmg in to is a mutilation from aio, and that, for ex-

ample, in Tolo (compare the Sanscrit ta-sya), the first o belongs to the

stem, and lo to the case-ending. As regards the dropping of <j from

Tolo {togio), it may be remarked, that the Greek language exhibits an-

other olo, from which a a has been dropped, namely, 6l3oIo, the old form

of which wasdiduiao, just

asITiiyov comes

fromsMyeao,

and t(^i6ov

from edi6oao. It is easy to infer, therefore, by analogy, that toIo comes

from TOGLo, and that this last is identical with the Sanscrit ta-sya. In

the common language, this form toio, after parting with the old a, loses

alsoc,and makes to-o, out of which comes, by contraction, the form rov.

The Homeric termination ao, in Bopi-ao, Aivei-ao, and the like, belongs

to this same part of the subject, and stands for ai-o, which last was ori-

ginally a-Gio. The Latin, on the other hand, changes the Sanscrit sya

into jus, with the favourite conversion of a into u before a final s; as,

for example, hu-jus, cu-jus, e-jiis,illius for

illi-jiis,&c.

VI. The Lithuanian genitive of the a-stems deviates in a remarkable

manner from that of the other declensions, and has o for its case-sign, in

which vowel there is a blending also of the vowel that closes the stem;

thus we have wilko,"of the wolf," for wilka-s. The Gothic has pre-

served as little as the Lithuanian any trace of the full genitive ending sya,

and the Gothic a-stems are in this case like those in i, the a being weak-

ened before a final s into i, so that we have vulfi-s for vulfa-s. The

consonant-stems have in Gothic a simple s for the case-sign of the geni-

tive; as, namin-s,

" of a name ;" brothr-s,"of a brother." The earlier

sister languages, however, lead us to infer that this 5 was originally pre-

cededby

ana,

and at a later

period byan i,

which vowelssubsequently

disappeared, like the a from the nominative vulp-s for vulfa-s.

VII. Feminines have in Sanscrit, as has already been remarked, a

fuller genitive ending, namely, as. The Greek is somewhat analogous

to this in the long vowel which characterizes the genitive singular femi-

nine of the first declension; as, G(^vpug, M.ovGrig, &c. It appears also

in the old Latin genitive of the first declension, escds, terras, &c.

Dual Cases.

Nominative, Accusative, and Vocative.

I. These three cases have in Sanscrit, in masculines and feminines, the

ending aic, which arose very probably from as by vocalizing the s, and,

consequently, is nothing more than a strengthening of theplural ending



DUAL CASES. 231

as. Since the dual implies a clearer designationthan mere undefined

plurality,and involves more of strong expression and lively personifica-

tion, it loves the broadest endings, as well in the cases here named as in

the others that remain to be mentioned.

II. While the Pracrit and Pali have lost the dual, the Zend, on the

other hand, has preserved it, yet in such a way only as that theplui-al

frequently occupies its place.The dual in Zend is much less frequent,

however, in the case of verbs. The Sanscrit ending au becomes in Zend

do.

III. In the "Veda dialect, the ending au is mutilated frequently to a,

the latter clement of the diphthong being suppressed.In Zend, by a sim-

ilar process, a is used for ao, and more frequently, too, than the full form.

From this Veda-ending d, and the short a that often stands for it in Zend,

we easilycome to the Greek dual f, since this vowel is fond of taking

the place of the old short a at the end of words;and as, in the vocative,

?iVK£ stands foi: vrikd and vehrkd, so, in the dual number, uv6p-e (with

the euphonic 6) corresponds to the Veda-form nar-d andthe Zend nar-a.

IV. In Lithuanian the dual termination of masculine stems in a is m

contracted from wo ; and the Veda-form vriM, the Zend vehrkd, and the

Lithuanian wilku, are in principleidentical. In the vocative, the Lith-

uanian places a shorter v, and hence throws the accent back on the pe-

nult ; as, unlkii '. which resembles the change that takes place in the

Greek irar/jp and irdrsp.

V. Masculine and feminine stems in i and u suppress, in Sanscrit, the

dual-ending an, and in its stead lengthen the end-vowel of the stem; as,

j)ali,

" two liusbands," fromipaLi ; sunii,

" two sons," from silnu. The

same principle operates frequently in Zend ; as, maimju," two

spirits ;"

crezu," two fingers."

The Lithuanian, in like manner, suppresses the

case-ending of the dual in its i and u stems, and lengthens the end-vowel

of the stem in full accordance with the Sanscrit rule; as, awt,

" two

sheep," from aici (compare the Sanscrit avi, from avi) ; and sumi, " two

sons," from su7iu (compare the Sanscrit sunii).

VI. In Greek, the dual of the first two declensions follows the same

principle.In the first declension, the nominative singular, it is true,

often ends in tj,but the stem always terminates in u, and this becomes

a in the dual; as, Ke(pa?.-a, rifi-u, KOfi-a.

In the second, the u of the

dual is a

lengthening

of the o in the stem; as, Aoy-w, 66-6, 6up-u.

VII. Neuter nouns in Sanscrit have in the dual not au, but i for an

indiniT, as in the pKiral they have not as. but a short i. An a at the end

of the stem coalesces with this i into c, and hence we have sate," two

hundred," from sata-t. Other vowels insert a euphonic n; as, talu-n-i.

VIII. Lithuanian dual-forms of the feminine gender ending in i agree



232 INSTRUMENTAL, ETC., DUAL.

with those ending in c in Sanscrit and Zend; as, ranki, from ranka.

The accusative dual, however, is formed in Lithuanian, contrary to the

other sister tongues, after the analogy of the singular, by means of a na-

sal letter; as, wilkun.

IX. The study of comparative grammar shows that the dual was ori-

ginally common to the different branches of the Indo-Germanic family,

but that it has gradually disappeared from the greater number of them.

"We find it in the Sanscrit and Zend, for example, whereas in Pali it oc-

curs only in the two words dui,"two," and oubha,

"both." Traces of

it are found in the

Golhic,

but not in the more modern Teutonic dialects.

It occurs in Greek, but often with a mere plural meaning, whereas in

modern Greek it is unknown. In Latin we find it remaining only in two

words, duo and ambo, exactly as in Pah.

Instrumental, Dative, and Ablative.

I. These three cases have a common termination in the dual number

in bothSanscrit and

Zend,whereas in Greek the

genitivehas attached

itself to the dative, and borrowed its termination from the latter. The

Sanscrit termination for these three cases is bhydm, which in Zend is

curtailed to bya.

II. Connected with this dual termination is, in the first place, the end-

ing bhyam of the pronouns of the first and second person in the dative

singular and plural,but which, however, in the pronoun of the first per-

son, is curtailed to hyam.

III. The curtailment alluded to at the close of the preceding paragraph

appears to have existed at a very early period, since we find a remarka-

ble coincidence, as regards this form, between the Latin and Sanscrit,

the Latin pronoun mi-Az corresponding directly to the Sanscrit wia-Ai/am,

and the Latin ti-bi, on the other hand, to the full Sanscrit form tu-bhyam.

IV. In the second place, connected with the dual termination bhydm

is the form bhyas, which marks the <lative and ablative plural,which in

Zend becomes byd, and in Latin bus, by suppressing in this last-men-

tioned language the lettery,

and by the usual conversion of as into us.

V. In Lithuanian, in the dative dual, the letterm alone remains to in-

dicate the dual; as, for example, wilka-m. This m, however, is not to

be regarded as the final letter of the Sanscrit bhy-dm, but the initial la-

bial converted into a nasal.

VI. The dual-ending bhydm is also related to the Sanscrit Mis, which

is the mark of the pluralinstrumental. This latter termination, which

in Zend becomes bis, has settled down in Latin into the case-sign for

the dative and ablative; as, for example, in no-bis and vo-bis, where bis

takes the place of bus, that comes from bhyas. In Lithuanian, on the



INSTRUMENTAL, ETC., DUAL. 233

Other hand, mis (the labial being changed to a nasal) is peculiar to the

instrumental, and pati-misanswers to the Sanscrit pali-bhis

and the

Zend pati-bis.

VII. The old rpic ending in Greek in ^l and ^iv belongs to this part

of the subjectOn the supposition that

<l>ivis the earlier form of the

two, we may easily hazard the conjecture that it arose from fic, just as

we trace/xev

from /zffin the first person plural of verbs

;which ending

in/xeg, moreover, corresponds to the Sanscrit mas and the Latin mus.

'n accordance with this idea, the old Greek form(pig

will answer to the

Sanscrit bhis, and to the Latin bis in 7iobis and vubis. It is highly prob-

able, too, that originallya diilierence existed between ^t and (piv,

and

that the former belonged to the singular,the latter to the

plural, having

the same analogy between them as bi and bis in the Latin forms ti-bi and

vo-bis, and mi and mis m the Lithuanian aki-mi,"by the eye," and aki-

mis,"by the eyes."

VIII. That the

endings(pc

and(piv

belongespecially

to the dative is

well known. The locative and instrumental use of the same termina-

tions in such forms as avToipi, &vprj(pL, (3l7^(j)tv,is easily explained

on the

principlethat the common dative itself has assumed a locative and in-

strumental relation. That(j>i

and fiv, however, have at any time a

strong genitive meaning may very safely be denied;since when prepo-

sitions, that are otherwise construed in Greek with a genitive, appear also

with cases ending in (pc or (piv, there is no need whatever for us to re-

gard these last as genitives,or as supplying the place of a genitive.

All

prepositions that are construed in Greek with a genitive would be much

betterjoined

with an ablative or locative, if such cases existed in Greek.

Even the suffix -Qev, which is commonly regarded as supplying the place

of the genitive ending, is, strictly speaking, of genuine ablativesignifica-

tion, expressing as it does the departing from a place.

IX. The Greek dual-ending in lv appears to be a curtailing of the

Sanscrit form bhydm, by throwing out the initial labial, as, in the latter

language, vrikais is formed from vrikdbis, and then by contracting yam

into IV, just as, in Sanscrit again, ista is said for yasta,from yag,

"to

offer," and in Zend im,"haec," is formed from ryam. The third de-

clension in Greek might, by its dual termination, as in 6aiu6v-OLv, give

rise to the suspicion that otv, and not iv, was the trueendijig.

The

latter, however, appears in both the first and second declensions, where

IV, and not oiv, attaches itself to the final vowel of the stem; as, MoiJaa-

IV, ?^6yo-iv,&c. Hence, in the third declension, we are to regard the

o before iv merely in the lightof a connecting vowel between the stem

and case-ending.

X. On the principlethat the dual-ending in tv is contracted from My-

U2



234 NOMINATIVE AND VOCATIVE PLURAL.

dm, we discover also the origin of the iv appended to the dative plural of

certain pronouns, namely, r/n-lv, vu-iv, a^-iv. This latter iv appearsto

have been of very early origin,since we find that the Sanscrit has bhyam

for the ending of the dative plural of the pronouns of the first and second

person, but in all other wordsblnjas.

From this bhyam we come as

easily to iv, as from the dual termination bhyam. The accusative use of

this same ending, in such forms asj-dv

and vlv, may be explainedin two

ways : either by supposing that the original dative force of the termina-

tion had becomeforgotten,

or that the

analogy

of the accusative

endingin V was followed, |Ut-i',

vi-v.

Genitive and. Locative.

I. These two cases have in Sanscrit the common ending bs, which

may possibly be connected with the genitive ending of the singular.

Thus we have vrikay-bs, paty-os, tanu-os.

II. In Zend, this ending seems to have disappeared, andits

placeto

have been supplied by theplural.

So also in Lithuanian, where, for ex-

ample, awj-u is both the dual and the plural genitive.

Plural.

Nominative and Vocative.

I. Masculines and feminines in Sanscrit have the nominative plural

ending in as, with which case, as in the sister tongues, the vocative is

identical in all the declensions. This plural termination in as appears

to be nothing more than an enlargement of the s which forms the case-

sign of the nominative singular, in order that by such enlargement the

idea of plurality might be symbohcally, as it were, expressed.

II. The neuter, as in the singular and dual, so also in the plural,

wants the letter s, which would seem, therefore, to have too much of a

personal reference to harmonize with this gender.

III. In Zend, as becomes 6, but before the particles ca and cit it

changes merely to as\ In Greek it appears under the form ff, though

with some limitations;

in Latin it maizes Is ; in Lithuanian, when the

stem ends in r, the termination of the nominative plural is es, otherwise

merely s. Hence we have in Sanscrit duhitar-as ;in Zend, dughdhar-

as^-ca ; in Greek, dvyaTEp-eq ; in Lithuanian, dukter-es ; with all whichwe may compare the Latin m,atr-es.

IV. The masculine pronominal stems in Sanscrit, Zend, and Gothic

that end in a do not take the full nominative sign, but, in place of this,

they lengthen the stern by the addition of an i, which vowel, on being

blended with the a of the stem, becomes in Sanscrit e, and in Zend e or

Cii. Hence we have in Sanscrit te, in Zend le, and in Gothic thai, all



ACCUSATIVE PLURAL. 235

signifying"these," whereas the feminine forms of the same case and

number are tds, tdo, and thos, corresponding to the masculine forms

just mentioned in the Greek toi (Doric for ol). In Greek, and Latin,

however, this i,which is added to the stem in Sanscrit, Zend, and Goth-

ic only in masculine pronominal themes, takes a much wider range, and

is to be found connected with all other stems of both the first and sec-

ond declensions. Hence we have X'^P'^h ^vkoi, for;^;6Jpa-ef, XvKO-eg ;

and lupi (from lupoi), terra (from lerrai), for lupo-es,terra-es.

V. Stems in i and u have in Sanscrit the guna, and hence we find

patay-as and sunav-as for paty-as and sunv-as. This guna has been

preserved in the Gothic, though in its weakened form i,which before the

vowel u changes into aj.

Hence in Gothic we have sunj-us,"sons,"

for suni-us, from stinau-s. In the Gothic i-stems the guna-i blends

with the i of the stem and becomes long i (written ei) ; as, gastei-s, from

gasli.

VI. Neuters in Zend, asin

thesister

languagesof

Europe,have a

short a for the ending, the remains, in all probability,of the fuller form

as, after the s had been thrown away as having too much of personal ref-

erence to harmonize with the neuter. This a remains also in the accu-

sative, since masculines and feminines most commonly have as for the

termination of this case.

VII. Corresponding to these Zend-European neuters in a the Sanscrit

has neuters in i, which latter vowel is evidently a weakening merely of

an earlier a. The end-vowel, moreover, of the stem is lengthened, and

between this and the case-endmg a euphonic n is inserted;whence we

have ddnd-n-i, varl-n-i, madhu-n-i. Stems ending in a consonant, n and

r excepted, place before the same a nasal, and lengthen the preceding

vowel; as, vacdn-si. With this insertion of i we may compare the very

isolated neuter-forms which appear in the Latin qua {guai) and h(tc

Qiaic). But the analogy is most strikingbetween qua and the Sanscrit

he, formed from ka-\-i,which appears as a dual, but was originally also a

pluralform.

Accusative.

I. Stems ending with a short vowel in Sanscrit affix an n and lengthen

the final vowel of the stem;hence we have vrikd-n, pati-n, sunii-n.

This n in the accusative plural is a curtailment of the full form ns, which

has remained fullyin the Gothic

; as, rulfa-ns, gasti-ns, sunu-ns. The

Greek, on the other hand, has retained the sibilant, but converted the v

into a i^; as, Mkovc. The form ?.vKovg, therefore, bears the same anal-

ocryto TiVKOvg that rvirrovaL does to Tvnrovai (formed from tvtttovti.)

II. For w6ai-ag, IxGv-ac, and the like, however, we cannot expect that



236 ACCUSATIVE PLURAL.

any such old forms as TrSai-vg, ixSv-vg ever existed. In the case of their

I and V stems, the Greeks constantly follow the same rule as in stems

ending with a consonant, namely, by appending ag, as in Sanscrit, where

we have padas corresponding to the Greek -rrodag.

III. This as for ns may be compared with the Ionic arat, oto, for

vrai, VTO, a form which has extended itself from cases where the vocali-

zing of n was absolutely necessary ; as, 7rE7r€i.6arai, T£Tpu(j)araL, for

itenEidvTai, rerpiKpprai, even to those where v could very properly have

been allowed to remain; as, TrEiravaraL, nEK'^laTaL, for iriTravvTai, kek-

TlLVTaL.

IV. Feminine stems ending in a vowel follow in Sanscrit the analogy

of consonant stems, with the suppression, however, of the a, and they

have therefore s for as or ns. Feminines ending in a short vowel length-

en this, in order to compensate, very probably, for the suppression of the

a ; hence we have prUi-s from priiy-as, and tanu-s from tanu-as.

Something like an analogy with this may be found in the Greek formsof the accusative plural ending in tf and vg, but these are not limited to

feminines, and the same terminations occur in the nominative also for

i-Eg and v-sg.

V. The Zend follows, like the Greek, in its i and u stems, the analo-

gy of consonant stems;while in feminine stems in i and u we sometimes

find a form corresponding to the Sanscrit in i-s, u-s; as, for example,

gairi-s, " mountains ;" perelu-s, " bridges." Masculine stems ending in

a have in the accusative art ; as, im-an,"hos ;" mazislan,

" maximos."

VI. In modern Persian, animate objects form the pluralin an, and in-

animate in ha; as, merd, "a man," plural, mcrd-an, "men ;" murg, "a

bird," murg-an, "birds;" ruz, "a day," ruz-ha, "days ;" kluican, "a

table," khiican-ha,"tables."

VII. A peculiar neuter suffix in the singular number of Sanscrit

nouns is found, as has already been remarked, in as. This occurs still

more frequently m Zend, and forms, in this latter language, its plural in

Jia. The modern Persian Aa, with its vowel lengthened, stands in close

analogy with this. So also in the modern German many striking resem-

blances to the modern Persian may easily be found. That the German

worter (" words'"), however, shows an analogy in termination with the

Persian hd, can only be discovered through the medium of the Sanscrit

and Zend. And this discovery is readily made when we call to mind

that the old High-German, in its earliest periods, almost continually

changed s into r, and as frequently converted a into i, which became at

a later period e.



PLURAL CASES. 237

Instrumental.

The Instrumental plural has already been referred to under the head

of the instrumental dual. In Sanscrit it ends in bkis ; in Zend, in Ms ;

in Lithuanian, in mis ; in Gothic, in m ; in Greek, in 04 or<^lv ;

in Latin,

in bis, &c.

Dative and Ablative.

I. The suffixes of both these cases have already been referred to. In

the Latin, all that remains of the termination bus in the first and second

declensions is merely the letter s ; as, pcnm-s, terri-s, lupi-s, dmnini-s ;

except forms in a-bus, presently to be mentioned.

II. The vowel i in terris, lupis, &c., belongs to the stem, not to the

case-sign. Lupi-s, in fact, is for lupo-bus, according to the analogy of

amho-bus, duo-bus. From o-bus, the language passed over to i-bus, for

the purpose of lightening the end-vowel of the stem, just as in the be-

ginningof some

compoundswe find

multi-plcx

for

muUu-plexor multo-

plex.

III. The form i-bus remained in the vulgar dialect of the lower orders,

and hence we have in Gruter (2, 9, 24 : 6, 46, 9 : 5, 618, 3 : &c.)

such forms as dibus, diibus, filibus, parvibus, &c. (Compare also En-

nius, ap. Charis., p. 4.)

IV. In the first declension the form a-bus has remained in several in-

stances as a convenient mode of distinguishing between feminines and

masculines. No traces of i-bus are found in this declension. Still, how-

ever, we can hardly suppose that the language passed at once from a-bus

to i-s. It is far more probable that a-bus weakened the stem-vowel a,

into I,and that this t was subsequently lengthened as a compensation for

the removal of bu. Hence terri-s arose from terri-bus, for terra-bus;

just as the verb mdlo arose from mdvolo.

V. The Erse language makes aibh the termination of the dative plural,

and this striking analogy connects that language at once with the case-

system of the other European tongues. Thus we have, in Erse, ghri-

anai-bh,"to" or

"with suns ;" fearai-bh,

"to" or

" with men."

Genitive.

I. The Genitive pluralin Sanscrit, in the case of substantives and ad-

jectives,ends in dm ;

in Zend, in anm. The Greek ov connects itself

at once with the primitive am, just as, in verbs, kdld-uv answers to the

Sanscrit adad-dm. The Latin has preserved the final m unaltered, but

has shortened, through the influence of this letter, the preceding vowel;



238 PLURAL CASES.

and hence we have, in this latter language, ped-um, whereas the corre-

sponding form in Sanscrit is pad-am.

II. The Liihuanian terminates the genitive plural in u, rejecting the

m, and in this rejectionof m the German agrees with it. In Gothic, the

m in like manner disappears, and the vowel that remains assumes the

form either of an e or an o. The o appears in feminine o and n stems.

III. Stems ending in a vowel, with the exception, generally speaking,

of those that are monosyllabic, insert, in Sanscrit, a euphonic n between

the case-ending and the stem;and when this is done, the end-vowel of

the stem, if short, is lengthened. This insertion of n appears to be of

very early date, since the Zend participates in the same, though in a

more limited degree ; namely, in stems that end in a and a ; as, vehrka-

n-anm, gihoa-n-anm. Analogous, in astriking degree, to this is the

genitive of the corresponding class of words in old High-German, in

old Saxon, and in Anglo-Saxon, which genitive ends in b-n-b or e-n-a.

Thus we have, in old High-German, kipb-n-b ; in old Saxon, g'ebb-n-b ;

in Anglo-Saxon, gife-n-a.

IV. Pronouns of the third person have in Sanscrit the genitive plural

ending in sdm instead of dm. It is probable that this sdrn was the

earlier form of the two, and that dm is merely the ending of this ending.

The High-German has here, as in many other instances, changed the

sibilant to an r. The Latin docs the same, as in istorum, istarum, &c.

V. Thisrum,

in the termination of thegenitive plural, has passed

over, in Latin, from the pronominal inflection to the first, second, and

fifth declensions. And this was the more easily effected, since these

pronouns of the third person are all in the genitive plural of either the

second or first declension. Forms, however, occasionally present them-

selves, especially in earlier Latin, which show that the language was not

always equally favourable towards the reception of this ending in rum,

and hence we have such genitives plural as the following, socium, deum

amphorum, drachmum, agricolum, &c.

VI. The Latin rum and Sanscrit sdm would lead us to expect auv in

Greek. Such, however, is not the case. But still the forms that do

occur in u-uv and e-cjv, such as avru-uv, avre-uv, uyopu-uv, ayope-uv,

point very plainly to a consonant that has fallen out. It remains a ques-

tion, therefore, whether a a has been dropped in every instance or only

a cr in pronouns, and in other words a v, as in/isi^u, from p.e[^ova. If

this latter view be correct, ?ivkuv will be for 7mko-v-uv, x^^pduv loixup-

a-v-uv;but tQv for toouv, and rduv for Taouv.



PLURAL CASES. 239

Locative.

I. The characteristic of the locative plural in Sanscrit is su, which is

converted also, on some occasions, into shu. For this in Zend we have

shu and hu. The primitive form in Sanscrit, however, was swa, from

which comes shwa in Zend, which is more usually employed for shu

and hu.

II. The primitive ending swa. is identical with the reflex possessive

stem swa. And as in Latin si-hi points to an earlier form su-hi, which

we would be led to

expect

from su-i ; and ti-hi to an earlier form tu-hi,

which we may compare with the Sanscrit tu-hhyam, so the Greek dative

locative ending in oi (or aiv) points at once to the Sanscrit su.

III. Stems in a append to this vowel, as in many other instances, an

i, and from the blending ofa-j-i

arises e, to which the Greek oi corre-

sponds, as in T^vKOL-ai., Sanscrit vrike-shu. The l in Greek passes over

from these stems to others in d and rj, and either appears in its full force

or as a subscript l. Hence we have THaraMaLV, 'OXv/iniaai, 'A'&rjv-

rjai, &c.

IV. In Lithuanian, the endings of the locative plural are for the mas-

culine se, for the feminine sa. This sa appears to have arisen from swa,

by rejecting the w.



240 NUMERALS.

o

oa>

a

aou

03

•T3

a

c3

J3

> <U

-3 >

oj o

CO

W

1-3

1—1

Pf4

<i1

O

KH

O

i^

P^

<^

h5

<;

O "^

=*o

>

(Ut^

v2'3-

K5

u ^w ~-i to to (, ja, fi

-3a ii

-to 'O

O to

2- ^

S

3

a3

O3 s

c>



NUMERALS. 241

Remarks.

I. A very slight inspection of the preceding table will show that nearly

all the words contained in them are derived by each language from some

of its cognates, or by all from a common source. •

II. Certain consonants, or certain classes of consonants, in one lan-

guage, are almost uniformly substitutes for certain others in a different

lancuacre. And one of the most striking facts that appears on compa-

ring these lists of numerals is, that in some of the languages of Western

E\irope guttural or hard palatine consonants abound, and take the place

of the sibilants, soft palatines,and dentals, and even of the labial con-

sonants which are found in the more eastern and in some northern lan-

guages.

III. The following examples will prove the truth of this remark.

Numeral 4.

chatur,

chetyre,

chehar,

rsTTapeg,

TTtavpeg,

pedwar,

petor,

fidwor,

fiuuar,

pancha,penj,

irevTE,

TTE/nre,

pump,fimf,

shash,

shesh,

se.x,

saihs,

saptan,

septem,

saith,

ashtan,

hesht,

wyth,

Sanscrit,

Russian,

Persian,

Greek,

Welsh,

Oscan,

Gothic,

Teutonic,

ch

>become <

Sanscrit,Persian,

Greek,((

Welsh,

Gothic,

Sanscrit,

Persian,

Latin,

Gothic,

Sanscrit,

Latin,

Welsh,

Sanscrit,

Persian,

Welsh,

\

K

\<

Numeral 5.

p and ch

^

p andj

q, quatuor, in Latin,

k, keathair, in Erse.

7r and r

TT and TT

p and pf and f )

>become q and q, quinque, Latin,

k and g, kuig, Erse.

Numeral 6

sh and sh

sh and sh [ , S

s and X

s and s

s and pt

s and pt

>become

ch and ch ) chwech,

guttural, J Welsh.

( (') and f, b^, Greek.}

Numeral 7.

> become

s and th ) ( (')and ttt,

Numeral8.

( s and cht,

: < h and ft,

Erse.

Persian.

Greek.

sht

sht

th

ocht,

OKTCO,

oclo,

ahtan,

Erse.

Greek.

Latin.

Gothic.

1 . Prichard, Eastern Origin of the Celtic NatioTis, p. 40, seq .



242

dashan, Sanscrit, sh

vinshali, Sanscrit,sh

trinshat, Sanscrit, sh

satam,

sad,

Sanscrit,

Persian,

NUMERALS



NUMERALS. 243

V. The Latin displays nearly the same phenomena as the Erse. It

puts c or q, equivalent to k, in the place of the letters above mentioned.

Neither the Erse nor the Latinadopts the p of the Welsh and ^-Eolic

Greek, but they have c or j instead of it, as in other instances where the

Sanscrit has ch.

VL The Gothic and other Teutonic dialects resemble the Welsh and

the ^Eolic Greek, except in the circumstance that they prefer aspirate

consonants, as finfc fortte/xtte

or pump ; fidwor for pcdwar or nirvp ;thri

for tri. They hkewise substitute the simple h in the place of palatines

and sibilants in other languages, as may be seen in a variety of instances,

as in the numerals, 6, 8, 9, 10, 100. The Persic and the Greek lan-

guages use the aspirate in some instances in a similar manner.

MoreSpecio.l Analogies in the Cardinal Numbers.

1.

I. In designating the number one a great diversity prevails among the

Indo-Germanic tongues, owing to the circumstance of pronouns of the

third person being employed to express it, and the wide scope thus af-

forded by the early richness of their forms.

II. The Sanscrit eka, the comparative of which we have reappearing

in Greek in the form SKuTspog, appears to have arisen from the joining

of the demonstrative stem e with the interrogative ka;which same ka

unites likewise withapi,

"also,"

forming kopi,

"

anyone,"

" whosoever."

III. The Gothic ain's, from the theme aina, the same as the Ger-

man ciner, connects itself in origin with the Sanscrit defective pronoun

ena,"

this one." To this same pronominal stem we may trace the old

Latin form oinos, the accusative of which, oinom, appears in the inscrip-

tion found in the tomb of the Scipios. From this oinos comes the later

unus, by the common change of the old o into u, with a lengthening of

the vowel at the same time, in order to compensate for the i which is

thrown out.

IV. Besides the analogy pointed out in the preceding paragraph, the

Latin unus also shows a surprising resemblance to the Sanscrit una-s,

which properly signifies"less" (compare the German wen-ig,

"little ;"

wen-iger,"less"), and is placed before higher numbers in order to ex-

pressdiminution by unity ; as, una-vinsati,

"nineteen," in Latin unde-

viginti ; una-lrinsat, " twenty-nine," in Latin undctrigintd, &c.

V. The Greek ev connects itself very probably with this same Sanscrit

ena, and has lost its final vowel, like the Gothic aina, in the nominative

masculine, namely, ain's. The Greek olo^,"alone," in Latin unicus,

comes in all likelihood from an old form oti^of, analogous to the old Latin

oinus.



244 NUMERALS.

2.

I. The theme in Sanscrit is

dwa,which is

naturallyinflected with the

dual endings. The Gothic has in place of this tica, and as it dispenses

with a dual, it inflects this theme like aplural,

Nom. twai, twos, twa ;

Dat. twaim ;Accus. twans, thwos, twa. With twai the form bai,

"both,"

connects itself from the root ha. Dat. laim; Accus. hans. Tliis ba is

supposed to come from the Sanscrit ubha, stem oho.

II. In Greek and Latin, dvcj, dm, and duo, have changed the old w

into M, but have not parted with the end-vowel of the stem ; 6vu agrees

with the masculine dwa, found in the Vedas. In Sanscrit, the a of dioa

becomes weakened into i at the beginning of compounds ; as, divimdtri,

"having two mothers." The Greek, where such a form as dFi is im-

possible, employs 61; as, difiiircjp.

The Zend and Latin agree very re-

markably in altering this dwi, since they throw away the d, and change w

into 6 by a hardening pronunciation. Hence we have in Zend bipaitis-

tana, and in Latin biceps, bidcns, &lc.

III. In old Norse we find swar, which appears in tkriswar, "three

times," and with which is connected the syllable ce, in the English tivice,

thrice, &c. This swar may be traced to var, which corresponds to the

Sanscrit vara, and this latter indicates"time." Thus we have ekavdra,

"once," and vdramvdram, "repeatedly." Now from vara comes the

Persianbar,

alsoreferring

to

time; as, bar-i, "once;"and from this

same source, in allprobability,

is derived the Latin termination her, ap-

pended to the names of months; as, Septem-ber, &c., meaning literally

the seventh time-portion of the year ; Octo-hcr, the eighth ; Novem-ber,

the ninth, &c.

3.

I. The theme inSanscrit, Greek,

Latin, Lithuanian, and Slavonic is

tri, for which we have in Zend and Gothic thri.

II. The declension of this theme is in most of these languages quite

regular, except that in Gothic, on account of the word being a mono-

syllable,the i before the vowel-ending does not disappear, but becomes

ij,and hence we have the genitive thrij-e,

and nominative neuter thrij-a.

III. The Sanscrit and Zend, however, have, the former tri, the lat-

ter thri, only as a designation for the masculine and neuter. In the

feminine they employ the Sanscrit tisras for tisaras, from the root iisar,

and the Zend tisaro.

4.

I. The Sanscrit feminine theme is chatasar, which follows the analogy

of tisar mentioned in the preceding paragraph, and the resemblance be-



NUMERALS. 245

tween the two is sostriking as to lead rs at once to the supposition that

chatasar is formed from tisar (itself a weakening of lasar) by the addi-

tion of the particle cha, "and." Viewing tasar as identical with the

demonstrative stem in Sanscrit, we may obtain a glimpse of the earliest

and most natural mode of counting ; namely, it, this, that, and-this, &c.

II. The Gothic fidcor connects itself with the Sanscrit cAa/r«r by the

ordinary change of consonants. This form chatvdr is thestronger, and

chalur the weaker, one in Sanscrit. The Lithuanian keturi may also be

compared with the same;but still more clearly the Latin quatuor (i. e.,

chaivor). The Greek TerTap-e^ (riaoap-eg) connects itself with the Sans-

crit chatvdr-as, the nominative masculine of chatvdr. In Pali the form

is cha/ldr-6, and both this and the Greek TETTapeg gain the second t by

assimilation.

III. The Zend converts the softer form chalur into chathru at the

beginning of compounds, which agrees in a very striking manner with

the Latin qitadru in quadrupes, quadruplcx, &c.

IV. The adverbial s, by which are formed in Sanscrit dwis,"twice,"

tris, "thrice," is dropped in chatur, "four times," for chaturs. The

Latin drops the s in both three and four; as, ter, quater.

5.

I. The Sanscrit-Zend panchan is the theme, and the genders were

notdistinguished

in this and the

followingnumerals.

Moreover,we

have the nominative, accusative, and vocative always in the singular

neuter form, whereas the other cases show plural endings ; as, genitive

panchdndm, in Zend panchananm. This irregularity in inflection pre-

pares us for a total want of it in the Greek nevre and Latin quinque.

II. It is also worthy of remark, that the final nasal in panchan appears

in none of the sister European tongues, whereas the n of saptan, 7tavan,

and dasan is found also m Lithuanian and Gothic. The final n in the

Sanscrit and Zend numerals was properly a later addition, and theorigi-

nal termination would seem to have been cha,"and," which occurred

as a prefixin the case of the number four in Sanscrit. Analogous to

this are both the Latin quinque, ending withqzie,

"atid ;" and the Greek

nevTE, ending with the enclitic re. In pan-cha, therefore, the root pan

will be euphonic for pam, and the final m.will be the neutercase-sign,

while pa, as a pronoun, will be identical with ka, to which we have re-

ferred in our remarks on the numeral one. This interchange of p and k

has already been alluded to, and we niay compare the old Latin form

pidpid for quidqnid, as well as iroloQ for Kolog, &c.

III. From what has been premised, it would appear that the numeral

five, when traced to its origin, meant," and one," indicating the one,

X2



246 NUMERALS.

namely, which, on being added to four, made up the number five. We

may, however, derive fanchan at once from the Sanscritjiani,

"the

hand," and malce the term refer to the number of the fingers on the hand,

just as the v/otd finger is to be traced, through the Gothic _^^ots (i. e.,

fingrs) to the numeral filnf, i. c.,fimf,"

five."

6.

I. For the Sanscrit shasJt, the Zend has cswas, and it is highly probable,

inasmuch as sh does not properly commence a syllable in Sanscrit, but

requires a A to precede it, that the original form in this latter language

was kshash.

II. In Latin, Greek, and German the guttural appears to have been

inverted, and hence we have in Latin sex, evidently inverted from xes.

7.

I. The Zend has haptan, which closely resembles the Greek form;

the Lithuanian, on the other hand, hasseptyni, and the Slavonic sedmi.

The m in seplem and sedmi appears to have come in from the ordinal

number, which in Sanscrit is saptama, nom. masc. saptama-s, and in

Slavonic scdmyi. The same remark will apply to osmi,"eight,"

and to

the Latin novem and decern, in Sanscrit navama-s, dasama-s,"ninth"

and "tenth."

II. It is not probable that the final n of the Sanscrit cardinal forms

changes to m in seplem, &c. The change of m to n is very frequent,

especially at the end of words, in which case it becomes in Greek a ne-

cessary alteration. But the change from w to m is hardly ever met with.

8.

The termination au in asht-au reminds us very strongly of the av in

the Latinoctav-us,

of the

oYin the Greek

uy6oY-o^,for

oydoog, and ofthe ow in the Teutonic dative ahlow-en.

I. The Lithuanian has dewyni, the Slavonic devyati. Both of these

appear, at first view, altogether different from the forms that occur in

the other sister tongues. On a closer inspection, however, we will find

that they all agree, the nasal letter being converted in the Lithuanianand Slavonic numerals into the medial, just as we have dpofog in Greek

from the same source with the Sanscrit mrita-s, with which compare the

Latin mort-uus.

II. Etymologists deduce the Sanscrit navan from nava,"new," as

indicating a new number after eight ;and they refer, in support of this

etymology, to the Latin secundus,"second," from sequor.



NUMERALS. 247

10.

The Gothic tailmn involves twopeculiarities

of thatlanguage. In

the first place, the letters h and r never allow a pure i or u to precede

them in Gothic, but always call in the aid of the guna, converting, there-

fore, i into ai, and \i into au. In the next place, the old a does not every-

where remain unaltered in Gothic, but is frequently, through the influ-

ence of aliquid that follows after, converted into u, not only in the radical

syllables, but also in endings.

20—100.

I. The increase by tens is expressed in Sanscrit by sati, sat, or ti,

and in Zend by said, sata, or ti. The words to which these terminations

are appended are substantives with singular endings.

II. The analogy is very striking in Greek and Latin as regards the

termination ti, for which we have tl, ra, ti, la. Thus,



248 PRONOUNS.

Tabular View of the Ordinal Numbers.

Feminine Gender.^

1st



PRONOUNS. 249

Dual.

Sanscrit.



250 PRONOUNS.

Remarks.

I. The Indo-Germanic tonguesall

agree,after a

remarkable manner,in forming the nominative singular of the pronoun of the first person from

a theme altogether unlike that whence the oblique cases are deduced.

The am in aham is only a termmation, as in twain, and in the European

languages,with the exception of the Greek and Latin, all traces of this

ending disappear.In ^Eolic Greek we have lyuv, which comes nearer

the Sanscrit than the later form syu. In the pronoun of the second per-

son, all the European tongues, including the regular Greek and the Latin,

drop the ending am. It occurs, however, in dialective varieties, such

as the Boeotian romi, and the Doric and Laconic tvvt] and tow?}, where

traces of the ain are very apparent.

II. The oblique cases have in Sanscrit ma for the theme of the pro-

noun of the first person, and twa for that of the second. These themes

in some cases coalesce with an i, and become me and twe. With the

stem ma the Greek stem MO connects itself, and forms the basis of the

genitive iiouand dative

jnoi.The £ in EMO arises from the strong ten-

dency in Greek to prefix a vowel to stems beginning with a consonant;

as, for example, in ovofia, oSovCt ofpvg, tvlajiV) where in Sanscrit we

have nama, danta-s, bhru-s, laghu-s. In MO or 'EMO, the o interchanges

with e, and hence we havekfielo, k/nedsv, for

kfioio, tfio-dev (compare

TTodev, uXXo-Oev,and the

like),as also

ijiiofor

kiioo,and

hjiEv, fieij,for

e/iov, /lov.In the jEolo-Doric forms

£/z£(}f, ifiovc, the a is a later ad-

dition (as in Tei'C, Tcovg) and was brought in as a characteristic of the

genitive,after the old genitive sign s, which in the o-declension stood

not at the end, but in the middle (compare toIo for tooio), had complete-

ly disappeared.

III. The theme of the pronoun of the second person, namely, twa, as-

sumes in Greek two forms, according as the a or w is dropped. In the

former case we have 2T, in the latter 20, and the o is interchanged

with e in aeio, aidev, and the like.

IV. The Gothic weakens the a in ma to an i, and contracts the va ot

tva to M, whence arise the two themes MI and THU. The Latin, like

the Gothic, shows the a of ma weakened toi,

and hence wc have mi-hi

in the dative, where in Sanscrit we find 7na-hyam. The accusative

me is for mem, as hoste-m, from the theme Jiosti, and the ablative me

is for med, like the Sanscrit mat. The genitive mci is connected with

the locative may-i (euphonic for mi-i) in Sanscrit. From the form mei

we would expect, by analogy, some such a form for the genitive of tu

as tvei, from the Sanscrit tvay-i, but euphony changes the v after a con-

sonant into u, and at the same time rejects the vowel that follows, aud



252 PRONOUNS.

appended to various pronouns, as egmnet, memet, tumet, nosmet, vosmet,

&,c., and this met connects itself readily with sinat the ablative, from

which we pass at once to the Sanscrit ablative plural, a-smat, yu-shmat.

Now, as this last-mentioned case is employed also by the Sanscrit gram-

marians as a species of ground-form for all cases and numbers, we may

easily account for the free employment of met in the Latin tongue.

VIII. The Greek dual has N£2 and S<I>i2 as themes for the pronouns

of the first and second person, and from these conic vui. and cr^ut.The

peculiar form of vC)i anda(fC)i,

as duals, has led to the supposition that

the i is a weakening of the a whichoriginally formed the dual-ending of

the masculine and feminine, and which a, in the ordinary declension, was

changed to e.

Tabular View of the Pronoun of the Third Person.

Singular.



PRONOUNS. 253

this pronoun the analogy of the second person, and distinguish it from

the latter by the initial s for t. They also, like the Latin, Greek, and

German, dispense with the nominative, since they use the pronoun re-

flexively ;and they employ the singular instead of the plural.

Remarks on the Demonstrative Pronouns.

I. The stem ta (feminine td) signifiesin Sanscrit

"he,"

"this one,"

"that one." The Zend-form is identical, except that the middle mutes

often take the place of the tcnues; as, for example, in the accusative

singular masculine, where for ttm we have dcm, or, more frequently, dim.

In Greek and German this pronoun has supplied the place of an article,

a part of speech that is wanting in Sanscrit and Zend, as in Latin, Lith-

uanian, and Slavonic.

n. The stems to, Gothic tha;feminine rd, ti], Gothic tho, correspond

to the Sanscrit-Zend ta and td, with which the Lithuanian demonstrative

stem ta, in the nominative masculine tas, feminine ta, is completely

identical. The Latin has no demonstrative pronoun from a similar stem

which it employs by itself, if we except certain adverbial accusative-

forms, as turn, tunc (like hunc), tarn, tan-dem, tam-en, and certain deriv-

atives from such a pronominal source; as, for example, talis, tantus,

tot, totidem, toties, totus, &c. A demonstrative, however, of the form

here referred to appears in the compound iste, and is declined withit,

the first part of the compound, namely, is, being an old unchangeablenominative masculine, the case-sign of which, as if unconscious of its

origin,remains also in the oblique cases

; as, istius for ejustius,&c.

in. In the nominative singular masculine and feminine the Sanscrit

and, in surprising accordance with it, the Gothic, substitute an s for thet,

which in Zend becomes an h, and in Greek the rough breathing. Thus

we have in Sanscrit sa, sd, tat ; in Gothic, sa, so, thata ;in Zend, ho,

hd, tat, and in Greek, 6, 'a, to (the Doric a for ri). The early Latin em-

ployed a form in the accusative closely connected with the primitive stem;

namely, sum for cum, and sam for earn, and used also sapsa as a nomi-

native for sa-ipsa. There are remains of the old s-form also in the G^eek

adverbs ct'ijiEpovand arJTec, though here, since these compounds express

an accusative, not a nominative meaning, the Attic rii/iepov, -ijTEg are

more in unison with the Sanscrit usage, ta being the general theme, and

sa only that of the nominative. It is an anomaly in Greek when the as-

piratetakes the place of the ^sound in the nominative plutal also, as ol,

a'l. The Doric form is much more accurate, toI, tci, and harmonizes

with the usage of the sister tongues.

Y



254 PRONOUNS.

General Observations on the other Pronouns,.

I. The change from a tenuis to a middle mute has already been re-

ferred to, and must again be mentioned as playing a very important part

in comparative philology. Thus, for example, 66e is not compounded

of 6 and dt', as is generally supposed, but the latter part of the word is

evidently to be traced to the demonstrative stem to, the vowel changing

from o to e, as in the vocative of the o-stem, and also in such accusatives

as[li, as, e, &c. In the word ode, therefore, both parts of the compound

are of similarorigin, and we are reminded of the doubling of the pronoun

in Sanscrit, Latin, and other tongues ; as, yd yas,"quicunque ;" yan

yam,"quemcunque ;" and in Latin, quisquis, quidquid, sese, &c.

n. The principle alluded to in the preceding paragraph is farther il-

lustrated by the Sanscrit neuter forms i-dam,"

this," and a-das,"that,"

where the d takes the place oft, just as in the Latin i-dem, qui-dam,

&c.,the

syllables dam, das, &.c., beingall traceable to the demonstrative.

Examples of a similar kind occur in the Latin dum, dcni-urn, don-ec,

den-ique, &c. The adjective totus, on the other hand, retains the t un-

altered, and its primitive meaning evidently is, "this and this," i. e.,

this and the other half, or the" whole."

III. The pronominal i-stem, consisting merely of a simple vowel, ex-

presses in Greek and Latin the meaning"he," but in Sanscrit and Zend

" this one." In the two latter languages it has no declension of its own,

but has only left behind certain adverbs, such as, ilas," from here,"

" from there ;" itha," so" (compare the Latin ita), &c. We have also

from the same pronominal root i the derivatives itara-s,"the other"

(whose accusative ilera-m reminds us at once of the Latin iterum), id,-

risa,"such," &c. The Latin is enlarges its theme in many cases by

means of a w or an o, in feminines by an a ; the i also is converted into

an e, especially before vowels; hence, as from the verbal root i come eo

and eunt, in opposition to is, it, imus, itis. Ham, &c., so from our pro-

nominal root come cum, eo, eorum, eos, and the feminines ea, ecs, earn,

earitvi. To the primitive i-type there belong merely is, id, the old forms

im, ibus, the genitive and dative e-jus and e-i, and the locative ibi.

IV. The stem of the relative pronoun in Sanscrit and Zend isya, fem-

inine yd. The Greek 6f, TJ, 6,converts the initial

yinto an

aspirate,a

change that often occurs;as in vfid^, for yushme ; a^u, from yag,

"to

revere," &c.*

V. The interrogativestem in Sanscrit, Zend, and Lithuanian is KA,

from which came the Greek interrogativestem KO. This latter was

preserved by the Ionic dialect, but was converted in the others, from

the ease with which gutturals and labials are interchanged, into IIO.



PRONOUNS. 255

The actual declension, however, of this KO or IIO was superseded by

rtf, and we have therefore remaining of it only certain adverbs and de-

rivatives; as, KOTE,

TTore; Kug, Trwf ; Korepov, noTepov (compare

the

Sanscrit kataras," which of the two") ; Koaog, noaog ; koioc, Tiolog ;

all which point clearly enough to the existence, at one period, of such a

form as KOf, ki), k6. This interrogative stem afibrds a basis, also, for

those cases of the Latin interrogative and relative which belong to the

second declension, namely, quod (compare the Zend kat), quo, and, in

theplural, qui, quorum, quos. The neuter plural qucs deviates from an-

alogy, and ought to be qua. It is possible, however, that this qucE maybe the remains of an old dual, subsequently received as a

plural, since

it agrees precisely with the Sanscrit ke. The Latin feminine has, in its

different cases, a Sanscrit-Zend feminine stem for its basis, namely, kd,

and hence we compare quam with the Sanscrit kdm ; quarum with kd-

sdm ; quas with kds.

VL The Gothic changes the k of the interrogative stem to an h, and

as the gutturals are fond of uniting in this language with a v, it places

this last-mentioned letter after the h, making thus HVA out of KA, and

HVO out of kd. The Latin, like the Gothic, loves to place a euphonic

V after the gutturals, and hence the Latin QVO corresponds to HVA, iu

its departure from the Sanscrit KA;and so also aqVa agrees with the

Gothic ahva,"a river," just

as angVis is related to the Sanscrit ahi-s,

"a snake," and the Greek

e_;^;^f.

VIL The interrogativestem ki also occurs in Sanscrit, from which

there appear to have been formed, in this same language, kit, and, before

the vocal letters, kid. This reminds us at once of the Latin forms quis

and quid. That there existed at one time, in Sanscrit, a masculine

nominative kis, analogous to the Latin quis, is proved conclusively by

the compound forms mdkis and nakis, which appear in the Vedas, and

with thelatter of which we

may comparethe Latin

nequis.Vin. The Latin hic appears, notwithstanding its difference of mean-

ing,to be derived from the same parent-source as quis and qui.

It has

the same peculiarityof declension, hu-jus like cu-jus, huic like cui, and,

besides, the nominative pluralneuter shows a strong analogy to the cor-

responding partin quis and qui, namely, qua. The final c in hic appears

to be shortened from cc, which remains in hicce (more correctly hice),

and is analogous to que, pe, quam, and piam, in quis-que, quip-pe, quiS'

quam, quis-piam, all which terminations are nothing more than different

forms of the Latin quce. And as these terminations, on being appended

as suffixes to the interrogative stem, change its meaning and part with

the interrogation,the same thing operates in hic. The earlier form ap-

pearsto have been cic, cccc, coc, and traces of the initial c still remain in



256 PRONOMINAL ADVERBS.

ci-s, ci-tra, just as in ul-tra we have the remains of the opposite pronoun

ilk (oUe), deprived of its lastsyllable.

Pronominal Adverbs.

I. Locative adverbs are formed in Sanscrit by the suffix tra, which

connects itself immediately with the theme; as, a-ira,

"here ;" ta-tra,

" there ;" ku-lra," where 1" &c. To this same source are the Latin ad-

verbs ci-tra, ul-tra, to be assigned. Locative pronominal adverbs are

formed also in Zend by the suffix dha, which reminds us at once of the

Greek termination i?a, in tv&a, ivTav-&a, &c.

IL In Sanscrit, by means of the suffix tas, adverbs are formed not only

from pronominal stems, but also from substantives and adjectives, and

these adverbs denote the removal from one place to another; sometimes,

also, they take the place of the ablative. Analogous to this, in some re-

spect, is the Latin termination tus in cccli-tus,"from heaven ;" divini-

tus, fundi-tus, &c. The final s appears to have changed to r in igi-tur,

and the first part of the word connecting itself with the Sanscrit iha,

"here," we have for the primitive meaning of igitur,

" from here," i. e.,

" on these grounds," or"therefore."

IIL In Sanscrit the termination tas is sometimes converted into dhas,

from which last come the Greek -Qev and the Slavonic du. Thus,

Sanscrit. Greek. Slavonic.

ku-dhas, k6--&ev, ot-kii-du.

ta-dhas, To-i?ev, ot-tu-du.

ya-dhas, b-'&EV, ju-du-sche.

W . The locative adverbs Mc, illic, istic, wereoriginally datives, of

whose primitive form we have a trace remaining in ruri. The enclitic

c being added to hi (changed from hui), illi, and isti, converted them into

adverbs, and at the same time distinguished them from datives.

V". Adverbs of time are formed in Sanscrit by the suffix da ; as, kadd,

" when ;" tadd," then ;" ya-dd,

"at which time," &c. The Greek ter-

mination re, in similar adverbs, appears to be analogous to this; as,

TTore, TOTE, oTE, &.C., and we may also find a trace of the Sanscrit termi-

nation in the Latin quan-do.

Verb.

I. One system of personal terminations belongs to all Sanscrit verbs,

and the diflTerences of conjugation which are distinguished by gramma-

rians consists in the changes which the verbal roots undergo. The fol-

lowing is an example displaying the terminations of the present tense,

as they are subjoined to the verbal root tud,"to strike," in Latin tundo.

1. PricharcVs Eastern Origin of the Celtic Nations, p. 94, seq.



VERB. 257



258 VERB.

Augmented Preterit.

1st Person. 2d Person.

Sing.

Dual.

Plur.

Sing.

Dual.

Plur.

Alagam,

eXeyov, '

Alagava,

Alagama,

E?iEyOfJ.€V:\

Alagas, >

sXeyec, J

Alagatam, )

i?.ByETOV, )

Alagata, )

tXiyere, J

Reduplicated Preterit.

1st Person. 2d Person.

Lalagitha,

'Ke^.exO'TOv

Lalaga,

"keXEXO-TE,

\\

Sing.

Plur.

Sing.

2d Per.

Laga

UyE,

Lalaga, )

Lalagiva, )

Lalaglma, \

"kEMxafiEV, \

Potential Mood,

Present,

\st Person. 2d Person.

Lageam, ) Lage, )

MyoLfj-L, \ XiyoLQ, \

Lagema,)

Lagete,)

MyoiiiEv, ) TieyoLTE, \

Imperative.

3i Per. 2d Per.

Lagatu, \Plur. Lagata, )

TieyETE, )

5d Person.

Alagat, )

E?lEyE. )

Alagatam, )

iXeyeTTjv. >

Alagan, )

sXsyov. )

3d Person.

Lalaga, )

Lalagltus,

Lalagus, >

^.EÊxaoi.5

3d Person.

Laget,

TiEyoL.

LageyuhTiEyouv.

) Lagatu, )

5 TtÊyiru. J

Zd Per.

Lagantu, \

7\-EyovTuv, >

Attic, &c. J

VL The Sanscrit infinitive is preserved in the first supine of the Latin

verb; as, falitum,

"alitum ;" sanitum,

" cinciwm" (old form "cingi-

tum").

Vn. The present participle of the masculine gender is closely analo-

gous to that of the Greek and Latin; as,

Sing.

Plur.

Nom.

LaganAeyuv

legensl\

Gen.

Lagatah, j

MyovTog, >

legentis,

Bat.

Lagate

TiEyOVTL

legenti

Ace.

Lagantam,

Têyovra,

legentem,

N. and A.

Lagantas,

TieyovTEr^

legentes, 1

Gen.

Lagatam,

?iiy6vTo)v

legentium

im,J Lagadbiah, ^

uv, >Tieyovai,, >

ium, J legentibus, J



VERB. 259

VIII. The present participle of the middle and passive voices is also

nearly the same in Sanscrit and Greek; as,

Lagamanas, > Lagamanah, ) Lagamanam, )

7i.Ey6iJ.Evog, \ lEyofiivr], 5 lEybjievov . )

And the Sanscrit past participle has been preserved in Latin; as,

Lagatas, ) Lagatah, ) Lagatam, >

legaius, ^ Icgata, ^ kgatum. )

Verb AsMi,"

I am," and its cognates.

Present.

1. In Sanscrit.

1st Per. 2d Per. 3d Per.

Sing.



260 VERB.

between the different languages does not exceed such as exists between

proximate dialects of the same speech.

II. The imperfect tense is not to be traced with so much regularity.

It is in Sanscrit as follows :

Sing. asam, asis, asit.

Plur. asma, asta, asan.

In Latin, esam was probably the old form of eram, since s was often

changed into r, and esam would regularly form esscm in the subjunctive,

which is actually found. Thus,

Sing. esam, esas, esat.

Plur. esamus, esatis, esant.

III. The second form of the verb, in the arrangement adopted by the

Sanscrit grammarians, is the potential. The potential form of the verb

asmi bears a strong analogy to the old potential stem in Latin, and also

to the Gothic potential. Thus we have,

Singular.

Sanscrit.



VERB. 261

Sing. asani, aidhi, astu,

Plur. asanya, sta, santu.

Compare astu with laru, esto; sta with €Ote, cstc, and santu with simto.

The second person aidhi bears a strong analogy to some of the modifi-

cations of the verb substantive in Celtic.

VII. There is also in Sanscrit the verb bhavami, from the root bhu,

allied to the old Latin verb fuo, and in the sense of oriri, nasci. With

this may be compared the Greek (bvu, and the verb lo be in English, to-

gether with the Celtic bydh, the Russian budu, and the Persian budemi.The Sanscrit has preserved the whole of bhavami, whereas the cognate

verbs are defective in most other tongues.

Remarks on the Endings of Verbs.

First Person.

I. The characteristic of the first person, in its original shape, is m in

Sanscrit as well for the plural as the singular.In the first person dual,

however, this m changes to a v.

II. The full expression of the ending of the first person singular, in

the active voice, is mi, and this is found in all Sanscrit verbs without

distinction. In Greek, however, the number of verbs in fu is compara-

tively small, being only about 200. The rest of the Greek verbs have

entirelysuppressed

this

ending,

and their final w, as well as the Latin o

of all conjugations, answers to the Sanscrit a, which a, in such forms as

bodh-d-mi, tud-d-mi, &c., belongs neither to the root nor the personal

ending, but characterizes merely the class to which the verb belongs.

When this consists of a short a, or of a syllable ending in a, this a is length-

ened before m and v ii a. vowel follow, and hence we have bodh-d-mi,

bodh-d-vas, bodh-d-mas, but bodh-d-si, bodh-d-ti, bod-d-nli, &c.

III. The Greek takes no part in this lengthening of the vowel,but

gives TEpir-o-jisvas corresponding to the Sanscrit tarp-d-mas. In the

singular, however, the form Tip-n-u-fu, answering to tarp-d-mi, may per-

haps have existed; and, if so, it is very probable that the w became short-

ened in the passive and middle voices by reason of the greater stress that

was laid on the ending of the verb.

IV. The passive and middle ending infiat clearly shows that all verbs

in Greek had originally fit as the termination of the first person active,

iox fiaiarises from

[ii, justas aai, rat, vrat, do from ai, tl, vtc, and no

TepTTo/xai.could ever have come into the language except from a repKufic

orTEpnojj.1.

V. We have, in what has justbeen said, a remarkable conlinuation of

the fact that the different members of the great family of languages mu-



262 VERB.

tually illustrate and complete each other, since the richest of them have

not reached us in a perfect state. While the ending fiaistill remains

firm in the modern Greek passive, the corresponding Sanscrit form lay

already in ruins at the early period when the Vedas were composed ;

while, on the other hand, Homer employs but seldom the form in/xc,

out of which have arisen his numerous present and future forms infiai,

although it is universal in Sanscrit, and is even employed at the present

day in many Lithuanian verbs;such as esmi,

" I am ;" dumi,"

I give ;"

eimi,

"I

go ;" demi,

"Iplace,"

&c.

VI. It has been already remarked, that those tenses of the Sanscrit

which have the augment prefixed to the verb have the personal endmgs,

as in Greek, in a more contracted form. With these the ending mi be-

comes merely m, and this curtailed termination changes in Greek, by the

laws of euphony, to v. Thus we may compare the Sanscrit atarp-a-m

with the Greek IrepTz-o-v ;adadd-m with kdidu-v

;and add-m with klu-v.

So, again, dad-yam is analogous to 6l6o-t,7}v, and de-yam to So-ltjv. In

the first aorist active the Greek has lost entirely the characteristic of the

person ; as, edeiâ, whereas in Sanscrit we have adiksam. The earlier

form 'ideiâv, of the first person, appears to have come from a still older

one, eSeiâfi, as is indicated by the first aorist middle, kSeiû/i-riv.

VII. The Latin, on the other hand, shows a strong attachment to the

ending in m; as, amabam, amem, amarem, dtc, all which point to the

existence, at one period of the language, of verbs in mi. Traces of the

m termination in the present tense are still found in sum and inquam,

the originalforms of *hich were, undoubtedly, sumi and hiquami.

VIII. As regards the origin of the ending for the first person, it may

be remarked that mi is, in all probability, weakened from ma, which lat-

ter form is, in Sanscrit and Zend, the theme of the oblique cases of the

personal pronoun.Hence the

syllable ml,in

dadd-mi,bears the same

analogy to ma that the i in cin, in the termination of the Latin tubi-cin,

does to the a in the true form of the root, can, from ca7io. The change

from mi to m is a still farther weakening, and would seem to have been

occasioned by the stress of the voice, laid, in pronouncing, upon the aug-

ment or initial syllable.

IX. The Sanscrit ending mas, in the first person plural, connects itself

at once with the Latin mus ; as, ama-mus, amaba-mus, &c., and also

with the old Greek termination/zsf,

for êv ; as, (jiepo-fiec, dido-fxe^,lara-

ueg, for(pipo-/iev, 6i6o-/j.ev ; lara-fiev. This plural ending in mas is

equivalent to m-as, where m indicates the pronominal stem, and as the

plural ending.

X. In the dual the Sanscrit vas becomes va in the augmented tenses,

in analogy with the plural endings mas and ma. This v, in the dual, is



VERB. 263

a softening from m, and the change must have taken place at an early

period, since the same peculiarity in the dual ending may be traced in

the Gothic, Slavonic, and Lithuanian.

Second Person.

I. The Sanscrit pronominal stem tva or tve assumes different forms in

Its combination with verbal themes. The t either remains unaltered, or

else becomes th or dh ; or, like the Greek av, is converted into an s.

The V, moreover, either remains or is dropped ;while the a is retained

unaltered, or is weakened to i, or else entirely disappears. The pronom-

inal form appears fullest in the middle voice, since this part of the verb

loves the weightier endings, and therefore avoids, more than any other, the

curtailing of the pronouns.

II. The full ending of the second person present of the dual is tlias,

and in the pluraliha. But there are strong reasons for believing that

the second person plural originally ended in thus, and that from this arose

the dual ending thds ; and, farther, that in the course of time thas of the

plural dropped its *, and thds of the dual its long vowel. On the suppo-

sition that the second person plural ended originally in thds, we can

readily see the analogy of the Latin tis, as well as the correctness of

Thiersch's remark in relation to the hiatus, namely, that for the ending

T£ in Homer, in the second person plural, we ought to read reg, from the

analogy of /leg for fiev in thefirst

person.

III. The Lithuanian has preserved the ending si of the second person

singular,in common with the Greek, only in the substantive verb, where

es-si and the Doric kc-ai show clearly their common lineage.In the case

of other verbs, however, the two languages part company, the Lithuanian

everywheie retainingthe i but parting with the s, the Greek pursuing a

directly opposite course. The Latin and Gothicagi-ee

with the Greek.

Hence we may compare the Lithuanian dud'-i with the Sanscrit dadd-si,

the Slavonic da-si, the Greek 6l6u-c, the Latin da-s, the Gothic vigi-s.

With regard to Greek verbs in w, it would seem that the t of cc, after

having been dropped, has gone back and united itself to the preceding

syllable ;and as, for example, yeviretpa comes from ycvETipia, and

jie-

?Miva from ixe?Mvia, fiei^uvfrom fxe^iuv, x^'P'^'^ from x^P'^'^v, u/ieivuv

from afiEviuv,so also TspTv-ei-g

is formed from rep-rt-e-ai, corresponding

to the Sanscrit tarp-d-si.

IV. We find also in Sanscrit two other endings of the second person,

dhi and tha, the former appearing in the imperative, the latter in the re-

duplicated preterit.The first of these, namely, dhi, reminds us of the

termination i9t in Greek imperatives ; as, la--&c, KEKpax-'&i, uvo>x-'&i;

(j>d--&i,&.C. The second presents, at first view, a striking analogy to



264 VERB.

the Greek terii».ination -Sa, but it is in reality a deceptive one, since & on

other occasions corresponds to the Sanscrit dh, and arises from the influ-

ence of the preceding a, just as, in the passive and middle, all the active

personal endings in r become & by the influence of the g preceding.

V. The Sanscrit tha will remind us then of the Greek i?a, although

these two terminations are not in fact identical, since the Greek &a comes

from dha, and the d has been converted into a i^ by the influence of a

preceding c, just as the r of the active personal endings is converted

into &in the

passiveand

middle bythe insertion of a. The a of the

active voice, however, belongs to the root, and hence we must divide as

follows : Tjc-^a, ola-'&a (for oid-d-a).

VI. In Latin the termination sli corresponds to the Sanscrit ending

tha, the a being weakened to an i, and an * being inserted before the t,

the aspirate also disappearing. Thus we may compare the following :

Latin. Sanscrit.

dedi-sti, dadi-lha.

steti-sti, tasthi-tha.

momord-isti, mamard-i-lha.

tiitud-isti, tutod-i-tha.

Third Person.

I. The pronominal stem ta has, after the analogy of the first and sec-

ond persons, weakened its vowel to an i in the unaugmented tenses, and

in the augmented ones has laid it aside entirely. The t, however, in

Sanscrit and Zend, undergoes, the termination us excepted, no change

whatever, whereas the t of the second person becomes, as we have just

seen, t, th, dh, or s. The Greek, on the contrary, retains the t of the

third person only in the substantive verb tort, Sanscrit asti, and on other

occasions either has at, as in diduai, or el, as in ripTiei.

II. The form 6i6uaL resembles more the Sanscrit second person dadd-

si than the third person daddti, and it is only distinguished from its own

second person diSug by the latter dropping the i. Thatoriginally,

how-

ever, even in the w conjugation, the third person singular ended in ri,

is proved by the middle and passive ending rai, since TspnErat bears the

same relation to TepTr-e-rithat dichrai. does to dlduri. The form rep-

Tret, in fact, arises from the rejection of r, just as ridei comes from rt-

deri, 6i6oi from dlSodi, Kepa from niparL, oIkol from oIkoOl, &c.

III. In the augmented tenses, on the other hand, the Greek lays aside

entirely the T sound, and agrees in this with the Pracrit, the Gothic, and

Slavonic;whereas the Latin retains the t throughout the verb, and in

this, as in many other instances, displays far more of an Indian character

than the Greek.



266 VERB.

has in the third person plural sacrificed the v to the a, and in this respect

harmonizes closely with the Sanscrit. Hence we have arai in Ionic,

formed from avrai., as in Sanscrit ale from a7ite.

IX. The Slavonic changes the nasal in many of its verbs to a short u,

and this u, coalescing with a preceding vowel, forms ou or u, so that ve-

zut), from vezontj, issurprisingly like the Greek

e;(foi;(7<, from exovai for

iXovTL. The Bohemian wezau, on the other hand, has preserved the

old a of the Sanscrit vah-a-nli and Gothic vig-a-nd, which in the Latin

vehunt becomes a u,

through

the influence of the

nasal,in

oppositionto

the i of the other persons {vchis, vehit, &c.).

X. In the augmented tenses the final vowel in nfi or ayiti disappears, just

as it does from ti, si, mi of the singular ;and with this vowel the person-

al characteristic t also disappears, in accordance with a law of euphony,

which forbids the union of two consonants at the end of a word. The

Greek, which cannot endure a final r, goes on a step farther than the

Sanscrit, and removes the t from the thu'd person singular also. Hencewe have IrepTV-e answering to atarp-a-t, and, where the resemblance is still

more clearly shown, Irepn-o-v agreeing withatarp-a-n (for atarp-a-nt).

The Greek aorists, however, which make av in the third person plural,

agree better with the Sanscrit form, since the sibilant has preserved the

a from being converted into o. Thus we have i6ei^-av, corresponding to

the Sanscrit adikshan.

XI. In the unaugmented tenses the Sanscrit terminates the dual in tas;

in the augmented ones, in tdm. The former of thesecorresponds to the

Greek tov; as, repn-e-Tov, Sanscrit

tarp-a-tas. The other ending, tdm,

has divided itself in Greek into the two terminations ttjv and tuv, of

which the first is the more prevalent one, while the latter is confined to

the imperative. Hence we have ETepn-E-Tijv, corresponding to atarp-a-

tam ; edeiK-Ga-Tijv to adik-sha-tdm;

butTepir-i-Tuv

toiarp-a-tam.

Hence it follows that the distinction between tov on the one hand, and

rrjv, Tuv on the other, in the dual number, is of very early origin, and

is not, as Buttmann Supposes, a later formation of the prose language.

Four places occur in Homer, it is true, where tov takes the place of ttjv,

but in three of these it is occasioned by the metre, and the fourth is,

therefore, only a solitary instance. The same remark will apply to the

augment, which is not to be viewed merely as a later addition because

it is sometimes suppressed in Homer, since it is common, in fact, to both

the Greek and the Sanscrit.



VERB. 267

Remarks on the Passive and Middle Endings.

I. The passive and middle endings distinguishthemselves from those

of the active by a greater degree of fulness, though the mode of forming

them is not the same in all the sister tongues.

II. The Sanscrit, Zend, and Greek agree in lengthening out a final{,

in the unaugmented tenses, by the insertion of an a, and form, therefore,

[latout of

/z£,aai out of crt, rat out of Ti, and in the plural vrai out of

VTi. In the Sanscrit and Zend the vowels a and i then coalesce into an e,

which answers to the Greek at.

III. The Gothic parts with the i out of the diphthong ai, and has,

therefore, in the third person, da for dai ; in the second, za (euphonic for

so) for zai;

and in the third person plural, 7tda for ndai. The first

person singular and the iirst and second persons plural are lost, and were

supplied by the third.

IV. The Sanscrit and Zend, in both the unaugmented and the aug-

mented tenses, parted with the pronominal consonant of the first person

singular, and along with it have also lost the a of the verb-class in words

of the first conjugation. Hence we find budc for bod-d-me. Compare

the followins :



268 VERB.

purpose of indicating the second person. Now, if this be so, either the

first or the second of the personal nidications irnbodied in iha-s must have

been used todesignate

the individual on whom the action is exerted or

for whose advantage it is performed, a meaning inseparably connected

with the middle voice. Hence, in the Sanscrit adat-tlid-s,"thou gavest

to thyself" (i. e., thou didst take), either th(i stands for"thou," and s

indicates"

to thyself," or vice versa. If we allow this, and if in the

Greek first person the v of the ending iirjv (Doric nuv) be organic, that

is, not a later unmeaning appendage, but an expressive element bequeathed

by the earliest periods of the language, then hdi^ou-qv properly signifies,

"I gave to myself," whether it be that the subjective relation is expressed

by iirj (ud) or by the v. To complete the analogy, we may take for the

third person the ending ta-t found in the Vedas, and where the person

is doubly expressed. Regarding this remarkable ending as a middle one,

we have the same resemblance between it and the Greek ending to as in

the case of repw-i-Tu and iarp-a-tat, edldu and adaddt, &c.; and, to make

the case still stronger, we may call in the aid of the Bantian inscription,

where the old Oscan imperatives end in a d, as licicu-d for liceto, estu-d foi

csto ; all which would tend to show that the primitive form of the Greek

ending to was tot, and that the final r was rejected for euphony. The

Sanscrit-Veda ending idt will express the action of the third person upon

himself, like the other endings in the case of the first and second persons.

VIII. Thefirst

person plural in Sanscrit endsin

make, but in Zendit terminates in maidhe, from which latter comes evidently the Greek

ending /isda, which drops the i like the Gothic forms.

IX. The second person dual ends, in the unaugmented tenses, in dike,

the third in ate. In the augmented tenses, on the other hand, the second

person ends in dthdm, the third in dtdin. There is every reason to sup-

pose, however, that these endings were originallytdthe and tdic, tdtliam

and tdldm. The initial syllable ta became a in Greek, and the follow-

ing t was converted into an aspirate through the influence of the a. Hence

arose in this latter language such forms as diSo-a-6ov, tSich-tj-Oov, &c.

X. In the Latin verb, the final r of the passive voice would appear to

owe its originto the reflexive pronoun, and to have been changed from s

by a favourite principleof conversion. In those persons which end with

a consonant, a connecting vowel was necessary, and the u wasbrought

in, probably through the influence of the liquid ;as in amatur, amantur.

The imperative forms amalo- r and amanto-r require no connecting vowel.

In amamur the s of amamus disappears before the reflexive, and the

more readily as it does not express any persona indication. In amer,

on the other hand, the personal characteristic itself is given up, since

amemr could not stand, and amcmur was required in the plural for ame-



VERB. 269

musr. In amaris, ameris, &.C., we have either a metathesis for amasir,

&c., or else the personal characteristic s could not withstand the strong

inclination to become an r between two vowels ; and this having taken

place, the reriexive preserved unaltered itsoriginal s. In the imperative

amare the reflexive has preserved its own vowel, and if we change r back

again to s, we have in sc the accusative of the simple pronoun. So, also,

the old infinitive amarier is nothing more than amarc-cr by metathesis for

amarc-re.(i. e., amare-se).

XL The form amamini deviates from all analogy, as will readily be

perceived, and presents no small degree of difficulty. It is probable that

amamini is the nominative plural masculine of a passive participle, and

was joined to estis, so that amamini stood originally for amamini estis,

as in Greek we haverervfi/XEVOi,

elai. The Latin suffix is -minus, and

corresponds to the Greek -uevoq and the Sanscrit -mana-s. Now when

thisparticiple, forced, as it were, out of its ordinary path, changed to

amamini from amaminvs, this amamini, so

employed

in the secondper-

son plural, appears to have remained in that person as a kind of unalter-

able form, and to have been regarded, in the ordinary usage of the Latin

tongue, as having a verbal termination. The consequence was, that the

substantive verb was dropped, and amamini became employed for both

genders. In support of the opinion that amamcnus wasoriginally a pas-

siveparticiple,

we Inay cite the forms alumnus and Vcrtmnnus, w'hich

are both evidently of participial origin. So, also, terminus, "what is

stepped over ;" femina,"she that bears" (middle participle), the root

being fe, whence we have fetus, felura, and fecundus ; and, finally, gcm-

ini for genimi,"they who are bom at the same time."

XII. But how are we to explain the imperative amaminorl Is the r

identical with that in amor, amalor, aman/or 1 The answer must be in

the negative, since to express the passive or reflexive meaning here by

appending a pronoun would be unnecessary, as the participial suffix has

this employment. The best way is to seek for a plural case-ending in

amaminor, as we did in amamini. Now it happens, luckily enough,

that the Eugubian inscriptions supply us with what we want, for we

there find subator for subacli, scrchilor forscripti. This plural ending

in or agrees very well with the Sanscrit as{a-\-as) and Gothic vs, where-

as the Latin i has forced its way in from the pronominal declension.

Still farther, the nominative singularof the second declension masculine,

in the Umbrian dialect, ended in o, and we still find orlo for orlus, and

subalii for subalus. Now it is very remarkable that we find, in the re-

mains of early Latinity, imperatives singular ending in mino ; as, /amino

in Festus, and prafamino in Cato. We have also fruimino in an in-

scription given by Gruter, "is cum agrum nei habeto nei J'ruimmo."Y2



270 VERB.

Here fruhnino indicates the third person, a circumstance which tends

very clearly to prove it a participle that may be applied to either person.

We have now reached the limit which we had proposed to ourselves

in the prosecution of the present inquiry, and cannot but entertain the

hope that the result will prove satisfactory to every one who will bestow

upon the subject his candid attention. The analogies existing through-

out the Indo-Germanic chain of languages are not the mere results of

accident. To assert this would be the height of absurdity. They prove,

on the contrary, the affiliation that exists betweenall

these individual

tongues, as v/ell as their common descent from one parent source, what-

ever this source may have been, or in whatever region of the globe it

may have been prevalent.

THE END.



CLASSICAL WORKS

PUBLISHED BY HARPER & BROTHERS, NEW-YORK.

ANTHON-'S SERIES OF CLASSICAL WORKS.The following works, already published, may be regarded as specimens ofthe 'whole

series, which will consist of about thirty volumes.

First Latin Lessons, containing

the most important Parts of the

Grammar of the Latin Language,

together with appropriate Exer-

cises in the translatmg and wri-

ting of Latin, for the Use of Be-

ginners. 12mo.First Greek Lessons, containing

the most important Parts of the

Grammar of the Greek Language,

together with appropriate Exer-

cises in the translating and wri-

ting of Greek, for the Use of Be-

ginners. 12mo.

A Grammar of the Greek Lan-

guage, for the Use of Schools and

Colleges. 12mo.

A System OF Greek Prosody and

Metre, for the Use of Schools

and Colleges ; together with the

Choral Scanning of the Prome-

theus Vinctus of .iEschylus, and

the Ajax and CEdipus Tyrannusof Sophocles ;

to which are ap-

pended Remarks on the Indo-Ger-

manic Analogies. 12mo.

Sallust's Jugurthine War andConspiracy of Cataline, with

an English Commentary, andGeographical and Historical In-

dexes. Sixth Edition, corrected

and enlarged. 12mo. Portrait.

Caesar's Commentaries on theGallic War

;with the first Book

of the Greek Paraphrase ;with

English Notes, critical and ex-

planatory. Plans of Battles, Sei-

ges, &c., and Historical, Geo-

graphical, and Archaeological In-

dexes. Map, Portrait, &c. 12mo.

Select Orationsof Cicero, with

an English Commentary, and His-

torical, Geographical, and LegalIndexes. 12mo. With a Portrait.

CLASSICAL LIBRARY.

With Portraits on steel. Bound uni

Xenophon. (Anabasis, translated

by E. Spelman, Esq., Cyropa-

dia, by the Hon. M. A. Cooper.)The Orations of Demosthenes.

Translated by Tliomas Leland.

Sallust. Translated by William

Rose, M. A. With Improvements.CyESAR. Translated by William

Duncan. With a Portrait.

CicERO. The Orations translatedby Duncan, the Offices by Cock-

man, and the Cato and Lselius byMelmoth. With a Portrait.

Virgil. The Eclogues translated

by Wrangham, the Georgics by

Sotheby, and the .^Eneid by Dry-den. Portrait.

.iEscHVLUs. Translated by the Rev.

R. Potter, A.M.

Sophocles. Translated by Thom-as Francklin, D.D. Portrait.

Euripides. Translated by the

Rev. R. Potter, A.M. Portrait.

Ovid. Translated by Dryden, Pope,

Congreve, Addison, and others.

Horace. Translated by Philip

Francis, D.D. With an Appen-dix, containing translations of va-

riousOdes,

&c.And

formly, but each work sold separately.

Ph^drus. With the Appendix of

Gudius. Translated by Christo-

pher Smart, A.M. Portrait.

Thucidides. Translated by Wil-

liam Smith, A.M. Portrait.

LiVY. Translated by George Ba-

ker, A.M. With a Portrait.

Herodotus. Translated by the

Rev. William Beloe. Portrait.

Homer. Translated by AlexanderPope, Esq. With a Portrait.

Juvenal. Translated by Charles

Badham, M.D,F.R.S. New Ed-

ition. To which are added, the

Satires of Perseus.

Pindar. Translated by the Rev.

C. A. Wheelwright. And

Anackeon. Translated by Thomas

Bourne, Esq.

Plutarch's Lives. Translated

from the original Greek, with

Notes, critical and historical, and

a Life of Plutarch. By John

Langhorne, D.D., and William

Langhorne, A.M. A new Edition.

A Life OF Washington. In Latin

Prose. By Francis Glass, A.M.,

of Ohio. Edited by J. N. Rey-nolds. 12mo. Portrait,



.. ^rf-



'"^fj^ # ^c= :u.

6

4o

I

i

University of Caiifornia

SOUTHERN REGIONAL LIBRARY FACILITY405 Hilgard Avenue, Los Angeles, CA 90024-1388

Return this material to the library

from which it was borrowed.

^ Kmysl

W' 24^000

tjff ÎCiC^

'^^•mhmi^ '^'ômmn^' ^'-ÔKmm^'^y<^r

.^C.IIPD^DY ^ ^ lu



^^

CO

-<

l~

"âÂiNfi-awv

-^

3 1158 01166 4553

,.r\F.rA"-"^r'

UC SOUTHERN REGIONAL LIBRARY FACILITY

i5 A A 000 342 146

8^

:3: «i? '

^ÛIBRARYQ/:>i

:5?

.a:

<

CO

<ril33NVS01t̂

^lOSANCflfj>

:33

%J13AINn]WV^

» AOfCAllF0%, ^^V.^ JNiVER%

:^

.3 V

ÂJi3AINa-3WV

^^

^•lOSAVCElfT/

"âaAiNfi-mv

.^^l•lIBRARY<?/^_ -^^t-UBRARYQc

^^'< /0JI]V3JOV

^lOSANCafj>

%a3AiNa3i\v

,S;OFCAIIF0% ÔFCAliFOfi*ÔS o

^. ,i?

^<?AHvaaiiiv^ ^<9AaviiHn-i^'^

cc<

=3

r -v^lllBRARYQr<^^.WFUNIVER^/^ ^lOSANCElfj>.^

'

A System of Greek Prosody and Metre

Documents

Transcript of A System of Greek Prosody and Metre